JP2020028347A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine includes game control means for controlling progress of the game, and performance execution means capable of executing a performance. The game control means can control a game state to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, a special state different from the advantageous state, a special state in which a game value is easily imparted by the special state, and a specific state different from the special state. The game control means, when controlling a state to the specific state, based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, can shift a state from the specific state to the special state. The performance execution means can execute a suggestion performance suggesting that the game state is to be shifted from the specific state to the special state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 19-2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launch device, and when a game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one that is configured. Further, variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value is provided. (A so-called pachinko machine).

The prize value means paying out a prize ball, giving a score, or giving a prize in accordance with a prize of a game ball in a prize area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in a state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win a hit ball, That is, a right to be in an advantageous state is generated, or a condition for paying out a prize ball is easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of a special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on a game ball winning the starting winning opening. In this case, a "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the state shifts to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is won, the winning prize opening is closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds).
An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and if the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

Some of such gaming machines are configured to be controllable to a special state (for example, a small hit RUSH) in which a gaming value is more easily provided in a special state (small hitting game state) than in a normal state. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes that when a variable number of display operations is performed a specified number of times in a probable change mode in which a high probability state and a time saving state are set, a transition to a small hit RUSH mode in which a small hit occurs with high frequency is performed. .

JP 2017-148127 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since it is clear that in the probability change mode, the display is shifted to the small hit RUSH mode by performing the variable number of display times of the specified number.
Amusement interests cannot be sufficiently improved.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a gaming interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of performing a game), and the game progresses. The game control unit includes a game control unit (for example, a CPU 103) for controlling the game, and an effect execution unit (for effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect. The game control unit changes a game state to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous state for a player). A big hit game state), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), and a special state (for example, the second KT) in which a game value is easily given by the special state.
State) and a specific state different from the special state (for example, the first KT state). When the specific state is controlled, a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability change big hit B).
It is possible to shift from the specific state to the special state based on the fact that a predetermined number of times of the fluctuation display are executed after the big hit game of (D) (for example, the CPU 103 performs step 014).
IWS001B to 008B), the effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a stage effect or a zone challenge effect, etc.) indicating that the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state (for example, an effect) The control CPU 120 determines in step 012SHS10
2 to S108, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 012SHS162 to S108.
S167 is executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a transition to the special state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the effect execution means may include, as the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of suggestion effects having different aspects (for example, a stage effect having a plurality of types of stages, a gauge increase effect for each zone). Is performed, and the rate at which the game state shifts from the specific state to the special state differs depending on which type of the suggestion effect is executed (for example, in the case of a strong stage). Has a high ratio of shifting to the small hit RUSH (stage effect determination table 012SH20 in FIGS. 19-3 to 19-5), and when the gauge increases, the ratio of shifting to the small hit RUSH is high (FIG. 19-15). Gauge increase effect determination table)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility of transition from the specific state to the special state depending on the type of the suggested effect to be executed. Can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the game control means may include, as the advantageous state, a plurality of types of advantageous states having different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the probability variable hits B to D, Big hits A to C: big hit type determination tables 012S in FIGS. 19-1 and 19-2.
H10), whether or not the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state according to the type of the advantageous state (for example, shifts to the special state in the case of the probability change big hit B to D,
Usually, in the case of the big hits A to C, the state does not shift to the special state), and the type of the predetermined condition is different (
For example, in the case of the probability variable big hit B, the number of changes is 90 times in the specific state, and in the case of the probability variable hit C, the number of changes is 65 times in the specific state.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of conditions for transition to the special state, so that it is possible to focus on which kind of advantageous state is present, and to improve the interest of the game. Can be.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a stage effect) in which the mode of the effect changes as the suggestion effect. According to the mode of the specific suggestion effect (for example, the mode of the stage), the degree of expectation that the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state and the length of the remaining period of the specific state are suggested (for example, Depending on the mode of the stage, the degree of expectation to shift to the small hit RUSH and the length of the remaining period of the first KT state may be suggested).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the production mode of the specific suggestion production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4), the effect executing means may notify an effect that informs that a gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state (for example, a small hit RUSH). Branching effect that informs the transition to) can be executed, and in the specific state,
The notification effect may be executed in response to execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 90 times, 65 times or 45 times).

According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the notification effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory control process process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing a production mode of a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a production mode of a setting suggestion effect. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting change flag is set at power-on. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning prize ball apparatus in the characteristic part 044IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 044IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory control normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during opening of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to change a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory pre-opening process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows a waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows a waiting process per special figure. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of a set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display mode of right-handed notification. It is an explanatory view for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. 15 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol change process in a first modification. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol change process in Modification 1. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of another special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification Example 1. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a first special symbol variation process in a modification 2. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a second special symbol variation process in Modification Example 2. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modified example 2. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol change process in Modification 3. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of another special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification Example 3. 15 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol change process in Modification 4. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol change process in Modification 4. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big hit end process. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to change a game state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining output timings of a big hit signal 1 and a big hit signal 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory pre-opening process. It is an explanatory view for explaining a battle challenge effect and a chance battle effect. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an effect mode determination table and an effect pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a meter increase effect process. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of a battle challenge effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of a battle challenge effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of a chance battle effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of a chance battle effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect aspect of a small hit meter effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining the case where it is constituted so that a set value can be changed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table 12SH10a concerning the characteristic part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect by 1st KT state by the characteristic part 012SH, and the effect after completion | finish of 1st KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stage effect determination table in the characteristic part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stage effect determination table in the characteristic part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stage effect determination table in the characteristic part 012SH. It is a flow chart which shows an example of variable display start setting processing in feature part 012SH. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production mode setting processing in feature part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation mode of the production | presentation performed in the characteristic part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation mode of the production | presentation performed in the characteristic part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a screen of the stage effect in the characteristic part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a screen of the 1st branch effect performed at the 40th fluctuation | variation after being controlled in the 1st KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a screen of the 3rd branch effect performed at the 90th change after being controlled in the 1st KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect in the 1st KT state in the characteristic part 012SH. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the variable display start setting process in the characteristic part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the gauge increase effect determination table in the characteristic part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production | presentation mode of the production | presentation performed in the characteristic part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production | presentation mode of the production | presentation performed in the characteristic part 012SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the screen of the stage effect in the characteristic part 012SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. First to do
A special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is a number indicating "0" to "9" or "
− ”And the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed indicator 26 for urging a right-handed operation of performing a firing operation aiming at the right of the game area. I have. The right-handed indicator 26 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and is controlled to be turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
A variable display of a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, “
The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" (for example, scrolling display in a vertical direction or updating display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended is provided. In this example, a first hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and a second hold display for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure An area 5B is provided. Note that a display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-turn notification LED 37 for prompting a right-turn operation is provided. Note that the right-turned notification LED 37 is controlled to be turned on by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold display 25 including a plurality of LEDs is provided.
A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number by the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays by the number of LEDs lit. The second reserved storage number is displayed.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back of the game board 2 and the first starting switch 2
Detected by 2A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting winning opening, so that game balls flowing down from the right side of the gaming area do not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Have been.
As described above, the row 19 of nails for preventing the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the operation of firing the game balls aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). Only when the player has operated the game ball, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning port.

Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the gaming balls are configured to be able to win in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails. It is not limited. For example, the first starting winning opening may be provided on the left side of the game area so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when a left hit operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be provided. A mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area and a row of nails 19 may also be provided so that a game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when a left hit operation is performed.

On the right side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down, in the front-rear direction,
An open state (also referred to as an open state) in which game balls can be won at a large winning opening located below the bottom member is changed to a closed state in which game balls cannot be won (also referred to as a closed state). Special variable winning ball device 7
Moves the bottom member forward in the big hit game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Open control is performed to move the bottom member backward from the closed state so as to open the large winning opening that is a winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 for forming a special winning port for small hits, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port. As shown in the figure, a special variable prize ball device 17 is disposed on the left side, and a variable prize ball device 6B is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B
Extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and is positioned below the bottom member by moving the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-rear direction. An open state (also called an open state) in which game balls can be won in the special winning opening or the second start winning opening is changed to a closed state (also called a closed state) in which game balls cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 17
In the small hitting game state that occurs when the predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward and forward. Open control is performed to move the bottom member backward from the closed state to open the special winning opening that is a winning area. In addition, the variable winning ball device 6B has a normal symbol display 2
When the symbol hits 0 and the symbol is derived and displayed, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the second start winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. Execute release control.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6
B is formed to have a similar structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from upper left to lower right, so that the game balls dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable prize ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable prize ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable prize ball device 6B thereunder.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from upper right to lower left, so that the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 17 and the variable prize ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, so that the special variable prize ball device 7 can be placed on the variable prize ball device 6B without winning. When the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is open, the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening, and the special variable winning ball is dropped. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls as it is toward the out opening.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulating pieces for reducing the flowing speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom member. I have. In this example, the special variable prize ball device 7, the special variable prize ball device 17, and the variable prize ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow to flow is delayed more than when there is no regulating piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 17 is disposed on the left side and the variable prize ball device 6B is disposed on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to be gently inclined from upper right to lower left, and when the bottom member is not receded and is in a closed state, the special variable winning ball device is changed from the variable winning ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable prize ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable prize ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side in this sense because the game ball is configured to flow toward the 17th. It can be said that.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened,
This is an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the gaming ball into the special winning opening and obtain a prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

In the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, although the number of prize balls is smaller than when the gaming ball has won the large winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) another prize port, such as the first start prize port 1 or the second start prize port. Therefore, if the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning port is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the game ball to the special winning port to obtain the prize ball, and therefore, for the player, You will be at a disadvantage.

In the second start winning opening, a second starting switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball winning in the second start winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, and during a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area by a firing operation (a so-called right-hit operation). )I do.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the normal symbols is changed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, and thus the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game state shifts to the big hit game state based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, so that the passing gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays both roles of the normal starting area and the operating area.

On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.
Are provided, and a frame LED 9 for a game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). )
A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous that the player performs a firing operation (a so-called left-hand operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. Pachinko machine 1
When the player performs a left-handing operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the game ball into the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display device 4A causes the game ball to enter. One special map game is started.

Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ", the actual design differs depending on the type of jackpot described below. ) Is displayed as "big hit". If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained. Note that, even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be "small hit".

After the display result in the first special map game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes a timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing of the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaching a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, the opening mode of the special winning opening (
A number of rounds and open upper limit period) and a number of game states (normal state, probable change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state are prepared, and the big hit type is set accordingly. Have been. As a big hit type, a big hit type that can get many prize balls,
A jackpot type with few or almost no prize balls may be provided.

After the big hitting game state ends, the state may be controlled to a certain change state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

In the KT state, KT control is performed, which is more likely to cause a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, so that less prize balls can be obtained than in the big hitting game state, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, a control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure change time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is executed (hour saving state), and the general figure game is described as "per-figure hit". For example, by increasing the probability that the game ball becomes higher than the normal state, a control (high opening control, high base control) that allows the game ball to easily enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The high base state is a special design (especially
This is an advantageous state for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol) is improved.

The probable change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. I do. A condition in which the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games is an end condition is also referred to as a frequency cut (such as a frequency cut probability change).

The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probable change state, a KT state, a high base state, and the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when a predetermined reset process is not performed after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). It is in a state where it is done.

When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, KT state, or high base state,
It is advantageous that the player performs a firing operation (right-hand operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handing operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol display device 20 starts the ordinary figure game. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”.
Becomes When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ", the actual design differs depending on the type of jackpot described below. ) Is displayed as "big hit" when the stop display is performed, and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "small hit" is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

After the display result in the second special map game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special map game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed).

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to excite the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. In addition,
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the frame LED 9
May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol )
Is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, “7”) are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C,
A decorative symbol forming a chance eye is stopped and displayed on a predetermined activated line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition,
Various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
Etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A).
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10
4 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, the ROM 10
The RAM 102 is used as a main memory using various data (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, and data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later) stored in the RAM 1. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). Control (drive) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like.
And an output port for transmitting a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B)) for game ball detection, and count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (For example, a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on), and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, and the solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory and a door for a special winning opening door. The signal is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The production control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). ))
And a command for designating the state of the game (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening state of the special winning opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of stored memories, the game state), the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in the memory 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a controller sensor unit 35A and a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute an effect based on a detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character G
an effect ROM, a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and execute an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be performed, based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5.
To be displayed. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal designating the sound to be output) in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-turn notification LED 37. The LED is supplied to the substrate 13, and an LED signal (a signal for designating the ON / OFF state of the LED) is supplied to the LED control substrate 14. The display control unit 12
3 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

The LED control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. The LED control board 14 drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right strike notification LED 37 are turned on / off.
In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on / off of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, control of turning on / off the LED (supply of a sound designation signal, LED signal, and the like), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 includes various random number values (random numbers for production) used to execute various productions.
Numerical data indicating is counted updatable. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, L
And an output port for transmitting an ED signal).

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3).
). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), an initialization process (Step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, C
The PU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102 by RA
M clear processing is performed, and an initial value is set in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), the RAM
It is determined whether or not backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, and the like).
In addition, the status of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in No. 02 (Step S4; No), an initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the RAM 10
It is determined that the data of No. 2 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CP
U103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 includes:
An appropriate screen display may be performed based on the effect control command.

After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after finishing the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (
Step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) to the CPU 10.
3 and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.
First, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 are executed via the switch circuit 110 by executing a predetermined switch process. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hits) and start information (start information) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Information indicating the number of winnings, etc.)
Then, data such as probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability variation state) is output (step S23).

Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). C
The PU 103 executes the first special symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, so that the execution and suspension management of the first special symbol game and the like are realized (details will be described later). Also, the CPU 103
Executes the second special symbol process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process every time the timer is interrupted, execution of the second special symbol game, management of suspension, and the like are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel.

Subsequent to the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process at each timer interrupt, control of a big hit game state, a small hit game state, control of a game state, and the like are realized (details will be described later).

Subsequent to the accessory control process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26).
). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Then, C
The PU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the game machine to be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to also output a test signal (right-handed test signal) capable of specifying a period during which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right strike test signal during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol processing, C
The PU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination processing, occurrence of a start winning in the first start winning opening is detected, and the RAM 10
A process for storing the hold information in the second predetermined area and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a winning start occurs in the first winning opening, a random number for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored in a first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information. Is done. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first number of stored memories, a transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start winning prize, the first number of stored memories, and a determination result such as a pre-reading determination to the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special map process flag provided in the RAM 102. Each processing of the first special symbol processing (step S
In 110A to S113A), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the first special symbol normal process of step S110A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0”.
Executed when (initial value). In the first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the first special symbol normal process, the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” or “big hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. . Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the first variation pattern setting process in step S111A, the value of the first special map process flag is “
1 ". In this first variation pattern setting process, the random number value for determining the variation pattern is determined based on a result of a prior determination as to whether the display result is" big hit "or" small hit ". And a process of determining the variation pattern to be one of a plurality of types using the above. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is a reach), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

In the first special symbol variation process in step S112A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”.
Executed when In the first special symbol variation process, a process for setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is measured. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the first special symbol change processing ends. I do.

In the present example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (Step S112A) and the first special symbol is changed.
When the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the small special fluctuating display may be controlled to be a small hitting game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hitting game is being performed (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is set before the small hitting release). It is determined whether or not the value is equivalent to the processing from the small hit end processing), and if the small hitting game is being performed, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing. In this way, the value of the first special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing unless the small hit game is being performed. By performing such control, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the small hit game ends. It is controlled to be. It should be noted that, in addition to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (the timer is stopped). The update may be interrupted.

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, if the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be interrupted, the interruption period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the execution period and the interruption period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference is large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stoppage of the swing of the decorative design, and the effect gives the player an uncomfortable feeling. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than the KT state (the first KT state and the second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state while the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state.

Further, in the case of the above-described configuration, for example, in the first KT state, the game ball is substantially difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is performed, so that the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. May be configured. On the other hand, in the second KT state, in the small hit control, the game ball can easily win, and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be configured to be longer than in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, in the first KT state, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds, whereas in the second KT state, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds.

Further, the length of the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pre-processing period may be varied depending on the game state, similarly to the small hit ending period.

In the first special symbol stop process in step S113A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”.
Executed when In the first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the change of the first special symbol, and stops and displays the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol (
Derivation) is performed. When the display result is "big hit", a setting process for starting a big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, a process for starting a small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the control is set to the probable change state, the KT state, or the high base state, and the end of the rounding is established. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

The processing executed in the second special symbol processing (step S25B) is the same as the processing executed in the first special symbol processing (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored as the hold information in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102.

In this example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol change process to change the change of the second special symbol. During display, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol and the small hit game may be controlled. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103
) Determines whether or not a small hit game is being played (specifically, whether or not the value of the first special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing to the small hit ending processing). Judgment), if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing, and if not in the small hit game, the second special figure process The value of the flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the first
During the small hit game based on the special symbol variation display, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the small hit game ends. In addition, not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol,
The processing for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the change of the second special symbol may be interrupted (the update of the timer is interrupted).

In addition, the small hit control based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol may be configured such that the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period varies depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process, the CPU 10
Step S12 is performed according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102.
Any one of the processes from 0 to S128 is selected and executed. In each process of the accessory control process (steps S120 to S128), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

The accessory control normal processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “0”. In this character accessory control normal processing, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is performed, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is performed, the processing for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “1”.

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “2”.

The big hit opening pre-processing of step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit game state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set in accordance with, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

The big hit opening processing in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and a process based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. The processing includes determining whether it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “4”. The processing during the opening of the big hit is ended.

The post-big hit release processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the big winning port has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether the number of times of execution of the round has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “3”. On the other hand, when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value of the flag is updated to “5”. When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The big hit end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as a staging operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control, KT control, and high base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the special winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening pre-processing ends.

The small hit opening processing in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “8”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

The small hit end processing in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set to a predetermined time (for example, 2
(Milliseconds). At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, when a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibition state is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt inhibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s) The timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. Is For example, the effect control command that has been read out may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1 may be stored so that which effect control command has been received or the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like.
For example, it turns on a reception flag provided in the CPU 22. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the CPU executes the effect control process process (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative luminous body such as a frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and a driving of the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a control effect command at the time of a start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control
Steps S170 to S1 according to the value of the rendering process flag provided in
One of the processes of 77 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. Image display device 5
If it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in, the value of the effect process flag is set to “
1 ", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 is driven, the voice control board 13 8L, 8 by the output of a command (sound effect signal) for
Various types of display during variable display of decorative symbols, such as outputting voices and sound effects from R, and turning on / off / flashing the frame LED 9 and decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Performs production control. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

The wait process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect process. Also, when the reception waiting time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure ends.

The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In this small hit production process, the production control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed based on the set contents. In addition, in the small hit effect production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. is there"
5 ”, and the small hit production process ends.

The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hitting game state, and executes various effect control based on the set contents at the end of the small hitting game state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and executes various effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-").
The variable display may be performed only by repeating the display of the symbol and the extinguishing of the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).
.

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form distributed by installing it in a storage device included in it. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (“high”, “high”
Expressions such as "low" and "differentiate") may include that one is a "0%" ratio. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM01 as shown in FIG.
6, various control boards are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also has a main board 1
Relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between 1 and effect control board 12
And so on. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and the effect control board 12 includes speakers 8L, 8R, a frame L
Various effect devices such as ED9 are connected, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG.
Various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the M201. The main substrate 11 mainly includes
A function of setting random numbers used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an example of command information addressed to a sub-side control board including the effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting control commands as control signals, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The display of the variation of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

As shown in FIG. 9C, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029.
The information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the TM030.

The main board 11 captures various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, and the like. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 for transmission to the terminal 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is sealed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material as shown in FIG. 9-3, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided at the center of the main board 11. (For example, 7 segments), and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is disposed on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Main board 11
Is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, so the front when viewing the main board 11 is when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened. , Which is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) has a winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entry area"). ), And the various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning ratio based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, various winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination after the installation in the game hall can be confirmed. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also,
When the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed.

In addition, the power supply board is sealed in a board case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency,
A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later is provided on the lower right side of the rear surface of the power supply board.
2 and a power switch 21TM055. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade can set predetermined power on the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037 and the like. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated,
If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is executed. By disposing the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05
2 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by operating a predetermined key is opened, and only a clerk having a predetermined key operates. Operable. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among game store clerks. The lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and off by a predetermined key.
Although the switch is capable of performing the switching operation of the FF, the switch may be capable of performing the switching operation and performing an operation (for example, a pressing operation) different from the switching operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even when no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which a key can be inserted and removed only in an OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the keys, so that the clerk at the game hall leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. Can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 9C, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging the gaming balls that have won each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and a decoration. An LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the application LED is included.

FIG. 9B is a block diagram illustrating components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9B, the payout control board 21
The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037
PU21TM371, payout control microcomputer 21 having RAM and ROM
This is realized by TM370 and an I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then is output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

As shown in FIG. 9B, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2, and the front face of the game board 2 can be opened and closed. And a door frame opening sensor 21TM300 which is provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a to be covered, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function of determining the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is input. 21TM37
0 indicates that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

The detection signal from the delivery motor position sensor 21TM295 is transmitted to the relay board 21TM07.
2 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037.
The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and indicates that a game ball is clogged.
That is, it is used to detect so-called ball bite. The dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the dispensing control board 21TM037 includes a ball-out switch 21T.
If the detection signal from M187 indicates that the ball has run out, or if the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates that the tank is full, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state,
The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a low level full signal to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the launch of the ball from the hit ball launching device. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The tank full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is
A driving signal (a signal for driving the firing motor 21TM094, which is input to one of the input sides of an AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the TM090 and drives the firing motor 21TM094, and serves to supply power from a power supply board) Is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal, the firing motor 21TM094
The output of the firing motor signal to is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a serial communication circuit 21T for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100.
M380 is built in. In this embodiment, a game control microcomputer 10
0 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to the serial communication circuit 21TM.
In order to confirm the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the 505, 21TM380, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal, ) Is exchanged (transmitted / received). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When a prize ball request signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, a signal notifying the fact (reception A
(CK signal) to the microcomputer 100 for game control. In this embodiment,
By putting specific data on the prize ball request signal or the received ACK signal, a specific data is transmitted between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange data. For example, when a prize occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of a prize ball request signal, and sets the prize for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. And the payout control microcomputer 21TM3.
When the winning ball payout operation is completed, data indicating the end of the winning ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the set received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. I do. When a predetermined error (error such as lending a ball, filling up the tank, running out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is performed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits, via the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lending balls to a terminal board (an external terminal board for a frame and an external terminal board for a board). Is output to 21TM160. Note that a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b.
Are omitted.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is connected to the output port 21TM37.
An error signal is output to the LED 21TM374 for error display using a 7-segment LED via 2c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to prize ball LED21TM053 and ball out LED21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. The detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

Further, the payout motor 21TM from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.
The drive signal to 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a.
Are provided, but are not shown in FIG. 9C.

A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 has a frequency display LED
21TM060, ball lending possible LED 21TM061, ball lending switch 21TM062 and return switch 21TM063 are connected.

From the interface board 21TM066, to the card unit 21TM050, a ball rental switch signal indicating that the ball rental switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are supplied to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066.
A connection signal (VL) is provided between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037.
Signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) are input ports 21TM.
372f and the output port 21TM372d. Card unit 21
An interface board 21TM066 is provided between the TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037.
Is interposed. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9B.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 causes the card unit 21TM050.
To output the PRDY signal. When the power is turned on, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a VL signal. Dispensing control microcomputer 21TM37
0 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit controls the payout control board 2.
A BRQ signal is output to 1TM037.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a card unit 21T.
When the EXS signal for M050 rises and the falling of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of loaned balls to the player. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21T
M370 lowers the EXS signal to card unit 21TM050. afterwards,
The prize ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100 on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is the payout control board 21T.
It is supplied from M037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed by the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066.
Done through. In this example, the card unit 2TM is connected to a power supply line of 24V AC for the card unit 21TM050 provided in the interface board 21TM066.
A fuse for protecting 1TM050 is provided to prevent a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage from being supplied to card unit 21TM050.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, a jackpot winning probability (a winning rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value. . The set value is made up of six steps of 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate.
That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player,
As the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the degree of advantage gradually decreases.

FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display, and the case where the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value of the big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability (1/30) as that of the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.
0) wins the jackpot.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability (1/28) as that of the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.
0) wins the jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (
1/280) to win the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 9D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. "2", "3"
”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of“ ”. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/250) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9E, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. "2", "3"
, And "4", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9F, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. "2", "3"
, "4", and "5", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability according to the set value. FIG. 9-4
The “probability” shown in (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9A to 9F. Provided separately, the jackpot determination is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special figure designation buffer. Is also good.

In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion effect)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value. Fig. 9-5 (1),
(2) and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” ending image is selected on the big hit end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which the “cloudy” ending image is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen.
FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the big hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 sets the setting value specified by the received setting command to R
By storing in the AM 102, it is possible to determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set values. For example, based on an effect control command transmitted when the big hit gaming state ends, a character (“B
END image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the stored set value, together with the “ONUS end” character).

The table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4) shows that the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the “fine” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), respectively, FIG. 9-5 (2)
The determination values for the case of determining the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9 and the case of determining the “rain” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (3) are allocated.

The effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “1”.
In the case of "2", it is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) is executed at a low ratio (for example, 20%), and a medium ratio (for example, 40%) so(
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in 2),
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). Further, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%).
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “sunny” mode shown in (1), and the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%) ) Is determined to be executed, and the “rain” shown in (3) is performed at a moderate rate (for example, 30%).
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the mode. When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a low rate (for example, 20%), It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in what mode the setting suggestion effect is performed, and The entertainment of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in the manner in which the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends is performed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the “sunny” mode. You expect it to be done.

(Process at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21).
TM4010). In this process, a parity check is performed as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103
Indicates that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is a regular value, for example,
5 is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values as set values stored in the set value storage area, and six levels of set values having different big hit probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. The set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like correspond to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the game arcade), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is set in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is assumed to be stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (step S21)
(TM4020 YES), confirm whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21 TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the mode shifts to a setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030),
The CPU 103 checks whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S
(YES in 21TM4040), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is determined that the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is to be executed.
This indicates that the M clear has been determined to be executed. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear is executed after the processing relating to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power recovery is 0 (the initial value is not set). The notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described later, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It may be performed.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are determined by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300.
The detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected is sent from the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the opening of the glass door frame 3a. A detection signal indicating that the state has been detected is output.
When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, Upon recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected,
By notifying the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 side allows the game machine frame 3 to be opened and the glass door frame 3a to be opened. The open state can be individually recognized.

In addition, a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected from the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 to the game control microcomputer 100. If the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the game control has been output (that is, the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 By the input of the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4070). . And lock switch 21TM
If 051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070), as shown in FIG.
Processing after step S21TM4510 relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
Move to When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, setting values can be checked and changed. When the mode shifts to the setting checking mode, setting values can be checked.

That is, the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S21T).
The setting value is a regular value (YES in step M4010) (YES in step S21TM4020).
), If no power interruption has occurred during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030)
The setting value can be changed and / or confirmed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070). Becomes On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode Without being controlled by the mode, step S21TM4 described later
The process proceeds to 760 (transmission of a setting command).

In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value to a state in which the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be checked (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (2) 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON are required. CPU
103 indicates a state in which the set value can be confirmed when the conditions (1) and (2) are both confirmed by the determination processing in step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), (3) a clear switch (setting changeover switch)
On condition that the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that 21TM052 is ON (YES), a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode), as described later, is provided. It is possible to transfer to.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the set value, is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. Can not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or there is some irregularity. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the set value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting change mode is not controlled.

In this embodiment, when one of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state as the condition (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although the control is possible, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even if the glass door frame 3a is open, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode May not be controlled.

On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the mode is not controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and a step S21TM47 described later is performed.
The process proceeds to 60 (transmission of setting command). When it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM407).
0, NO), and the flow shifts to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010),
If the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103
The process moves to step S21TM4120. Also, in checking the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), the set value storage area contains a regular value (0 to 5).
Is not stored (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103
The process moves to step S21TM4120. In addition, in checking the setting change flag,
If it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030) (YES in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21T.
The process moves to M4120.

Here, even if the normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, NO is determined in step S21TM4010. Then, control goes to a step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Mode. Also, if the backup RAM area is checked for data (step S21TM4010), but the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), a normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Also, if the setting change mode was controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). CPU
When 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (
In step S21TM4130, it is checked whether lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4130).

If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130)
The CPU 103 checks whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S
If YES in 21TM4140), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes in and after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, step S21TM413
0 and the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (step S21TM4
If NO in step S21TM4140, if clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON in step S21TM4140 (N in step S21TM4140)
In O), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value abnormality indicating that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. An error command is transmitted to effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5
Informs that the set value may be abnormal. For example, a message that “the setting value may be abnormal” is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn off the power switch 21TM055).
), When the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on), a notification is issued to prompt the user to shift to the setting change mode and perform an operation for changing the set value (fix the set value). For example, a message is displayed that states "Please turn on the power after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode." Note that similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined loop process (step S
21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM420).
After performing 0), by displaying the character “E” on the display monitor 21TM029,
“Even though the setting value may not be a regular value (0 to 5), a transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all YES is determined in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is satisfied. Has not been entered and the mode has not been shifted to the setting change mode "(step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from an output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21T).
M4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit provided for the gaming machines, a call lamp device, or the like). Is done.

During the loop processing, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is
The letter "E" is displayed every s. The provision of the 4 ms weight prevents excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. Also, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer or the like, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a regular value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal. ), It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode).

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (step S2).
If the setting value is not a regular value (NO in 1TM4010) (step S21TM4020)
NO) and when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when YES is determined in step S21TM4030). If so, the game should not be performed in this state. It is necessary to fix the set value of the storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1
) The gaming machine frame 3 is open, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON,
(3) Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state.
Two conditions are required. The CPU 103 determines these (1) by performing the determination processing in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140.
When it is confirmed that all of the conditions (3) to (3) are satisfied, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, the game cannot be shifted to the normal game process. Therefore, if the determination in any of Steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 is NO, the process shifts to the above-described loop processing (Steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), it is not possible to shift to the normal game process. No. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to urge the user to turn off the power.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (step S21TM4)
(NO at 030), to change the set value, but to allow the set value to be checked (setting check mode) (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is open (step S2).
Two conditions are required: (1) YES in TM4060) and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4)
030, YES), (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is open (step S21TM4120)
(YES in step S21TM4). (2) Lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4)
Even if the two conditions of (YES at 130) are satisfied, the setting check mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied,
(3) Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 in step S21TM4140
When it is determined that 2 is not in the ON state (NO), the game is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Will be.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS.
This will be described using -8. 9-7, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). Regular values (0 to 5) are stored in the set value storage area.
) Is stored (YES in step S21TM4510), step S21
Move to TM4530. If the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores the regular value in the set value storage area as “0” having the lowest big hit probability. Is stored (step S21TM4520).
Then, control goes to a step S21TM4530.

Next, after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530), the CPU 103 executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure or the like has been input. Immediately before the operation becomes impossible due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, R
A process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up to the AM 102;
The data protection processing of the RAM 102 is executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off processing, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

Thereby, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S
Repeat processing from 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or step S21T
(M4530 to Steps S21TM4570 and S21TM4650 are being repeated), if power is cut off, Step S21TM40 after power is restored.
At 10, the data check is properly executed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the set values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area.
Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4550).
). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. The clerk of the amusement hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the amusement hall may actually May be incorrectly recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is
The set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Then, CPU1
03 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570)
If YES, that is, if the RAM is not cleared after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command designating that the mode has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4650). Then, the flow shifts to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the end of the mode (here, the setting change mode), CP
U103 sets a setting change in-progress flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM4580). The area where the value of the setting change flag is stored is
Since it is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power supply is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) at the next power-on.

Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that control has been performed in the setting change mode (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of the setting change mode command, the game control microcomputer 100
Can be specified to have shifted to the setting change mode. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is being controlled to the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting switch information indicating whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and checks whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (YES in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4.
The process moves to 680. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time a store clerk at the game hall operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on and when the last power is turned off) is 3 If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 is accordingly updated. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4650).
21TM4590) and the state in which the setting value cannot be updated (step S21TM4620) correspond to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed.
The period during which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode is from step S21TM4530 to step S21.
The processing of TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21T).
M4070 is determined as YES), clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052
Is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag remains 0).

In addition, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) are executable, the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590), and the setting value is updated (step S21TM4620).
Is equivalent to a setting change mode in which setting values can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21T).
M4070 or step S21TM4130 is determined to be YES), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 is determined to be YES, and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150). That is set).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms (step S21T
(M4530), and repeats the processing from step S21TM4540. That is, R
If the value of the AM clear flag is 0, the control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control in the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (YES in step S21TM4680), CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4680).
Step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the process proceeds to the normal game process thereafter. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt processing is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or whether the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560),
In response to the end of any one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continuously output until at least one second has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The value of the security signal timer is set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed irrespective of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or to the setting confirmation mode (determination of which mode is performed). (Without) a common process. In step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also performed regardless of whether the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (to determine which mode is controlled). No) is performed as a common process. As described above, the output control of the security signal is simplified by sharing the output start control and the output end control of the security signal when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Thus, the control burden can be reduced.

Also, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of either the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the output of the security signal in response to the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , It is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, step S21T immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.
In M4710, a common value (1000 ms) is set in the security signal timer when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode and the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode, the external device side can use any mode. It will be difficult to determine whether or not it has been controlled.

Thus, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, step S21 is performed once.
After setting 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in the TM4710, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 to be described later, reset the value of 30,000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM (overwriting) ). That is, after the security signal remaining output period is once set to 1 sec, the security signal remaining output period is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the above-described signal output control is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is set to the end of the setting confirmation mode if the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2). 1 sec has elapsed since the start of the setting change mode, and 30 sec has elapsed since the end of the setting change mode when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted. In processing (for example, information output processing), the value of the security signal timer is 10
The output of the security signal is continued from 00 ms to 0 ms, and is controlled in the setting change mode (when the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is 1).
In the case where the time is changed from 30 seconds to 30 seconds), in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted, the security signal is output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30000 ms to 0 ms. Will be continued. When the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, or when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 3 ms) at a timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing.
The output of the security signal may be continued from 0000 ms) to 0 ms, and the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process after the output of the security signal.

As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 second between when the control in the setting confirmation mode ends and when the control in the setting change mode ends,
When the control is performed in the setting change mode, 30 seconds after the control in the setting change mode ends.
Until the time elapses, the security signal is continuously output. With such a configuration, while the output of the security signal is shared, the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode,
The output period of the security signal can be made different between the case where the setting change mode is controlled.

As a result, in the external device, it is also possible to know whether the initialization process has been performed and the setting has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode, or the initialization process has been performed and the setting has been changed to the setting change mode. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the control mode has been set to the setting confirmation mode without performing the initialization process. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the setting process has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

In addition, even if a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor,
A security signal will be output. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area of the RAM 102 (however, an area cleared by the initialization processing) based on detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, the security signal is output for four minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode at the time of power restoration, since the RAM clear is not executed, the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output processing. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to prevent the output period of the security signal from being limited to a period until one second elapses from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, if the setting is changed to the setting change mode when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so that the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (the power failure occurs). At this time, it is unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected.) As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds elapse (according to the execution of the RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 in FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. The value of the security signal timer to be set in the period may be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the setting change in progress flag is cleared and the power is cut off thereafter, it is determined that the setting change in progress flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (0
To 5) is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S5).
21TM4760). Note that, even when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed, and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and the effect control CPU 12
On the 0 side, if the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is, the player may erroneously understand the setting value. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the setting value (1 to 6), and An effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

The present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the CPU 103 sets the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command, and For C
You may make it transmit to PU120. As a result, the setting value range specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command on the image display device 5 as it is, or executes an effect indicating the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command. By doing so, the set value can be reported or suggested appropriately. Also, effect control CP
It is not necessary for the U120 to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, by executing an effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command, the setting value can be suggested. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770).
This means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S
21TM4010), the set value is determined to be a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), and no power interruption has occurred during the setting change (step S21T).
NO at M4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is
Since it is in the FF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the processing at the time of power-off recovery without RAM clearing may be executed.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and executes the game control timer interrupt processing (special (Including a pattern process). That is, when the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, or when the control in the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is 0 or not. Without executing the clearing, the backup command is transmitted as the command at the time of the power-off recovery, and the process shifts to the normal game process.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power interruption based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply is performed (the RAM is not cleared). That). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the frame LED 9
And the like, it is possible to notify that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed (the RAM has not been cleared) based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the process at the time of power-on with the RAM clear.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as a value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. After the interruption is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, R
The data (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the AM 102 is cleared and the initial value is set. The set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and are not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which the tally values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are stored for each set value is not cleared, and the tally for each of these set values is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). Note that RA
By the M clearing process, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

The reason why the set values stored in the set value storage area are not cleared in the RAM clear processing is as follows. (A) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It is stored (YES in step S21TM4020).
(B) If the setting is changed to the setting change mode, the value of the set value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or a normal value is stored by an operation in the setting change mode (step S21TM4610). And step S21TM4620).
Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). Step S21TM1
By the processing of 430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a flag for selectively performing processing in accordance with a control state such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, or the like is initialized. The value is set.

After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21T).
M1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). Effect control CPU 120
Then, the initialization processing was performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM was cleared without restoring from the power-off based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply). Recognize When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect such as the game state is initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 (data when the power supply is stopped). On the basis of the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovery from the power failure.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). Thereby, step S21TM4 after the setting change mode ends.
The value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in 710 is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. If the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer without executing step S21TM4710. ), The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, if the RAM clear has not been executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode has been controlled), this step S21TM14 is executed.
Since the processing in step S65 is not executed, the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM47.
The value remains at 1 second set at 10.

By setting the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). Thereafter, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the interrupt, the value of the security signal timer is set to 2 m.
The output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 by subtracting s.

Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11
Outputs a connection confirmation signal to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (
Step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 executes a process in accordance with, for example, a random number circuit setting program, so that the random number circuit 104
Make settings to update the value of.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the predetermined time (for example, 2
The register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, 2 m
It is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every s.

Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to a normal game process in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is used to determine an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for determining whether or not a symbol has been hit is usually one round (in the process of transmitting a command signal for controlling another microcomputer, or the process of controlling the gaming machine). When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power-off recovery.
If it is determined in 21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). (Depending on the state of the frame 3a), the processing may be shifted to the processing at the time of restoration from power interruption.

Further, in this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear))
However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. If it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Under the condition (according to the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear))
You may move to.

As described above, the clerk of the game arcade turns the lock switch 21TM051 on when turning on the power.
By setting the N state and setting the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to the ON state, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode, and to initialize the gaming state and the like (to clear the RAM). Execution). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state and the like can be controlled. Is not initialized (step S21TM40)
It is possible not to set the RAM clear flag to 1 by making a NO determination at 40 or step S21TM4140). In this way, the clerk at the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. I have.

As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting was changed to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the setting value that is to be determined on the game arcade side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process and stops the game (step S21). S21TM4200 to step S21TM42
20 loop processing), and outputs a security signal in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed), and to prevent the game from being started when the power is turned on.
It is possible to notify the external device that the apparatus has been controlled to the setting change mode when the power is cut off.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 determines that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode (step S21TM4030). If step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES, the setting value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140).
The game is stopped (step S21TM4200) together with step S21TM4190).
"E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the loop processing of step S21TM4220).
Is displayed (step S21TM4210).

In the example illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 10, the character “E” is displayed on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, thereby causing the store clerk at the amusement arcade to generate an abnormality (in the setting change mode). (It is possible that a power failure has occurred in a controlled state). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays a message on the image display device 5 that “Please turn on the power after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode”, thereby displaying Operation to change the set value by turning off the power once (power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turning on the power again (when power switch 21TM055 is turned on). (To confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, when the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3
Is open (YES in step S21TM4120), and (ii) lock switch 21T
M051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii)
The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21).
When it is determined that the answer is YES in TM4140), the mode is controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM0)
29 is not executed, and a message is displayed on the effect control board 12 (“E” is displayed).
After turning off the power, turn on the power again and shift to the setting change mode.)).

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 receiving the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “the setting is being changed” or a message “change the setting by performing the setting change operation” can be displayed on the image display device 5. Thereby, the clerk at the game hall or the like can recognize that the setting change mode is being controlled, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052.
Is operated, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed to the expected set value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state to fix the set value and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game process.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, (i) to (ii) above
If any of the conditions in i) is not satisfied, the mode is not controlled to the setting change mode,
After the setting value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), the game is stopped (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21T)
The display of “E” in M029 is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side (“Please turn on the power after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode”) is also performed. .

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). To change to the setting change mode. ")
Is also performed, the state of the gaming machine is notified that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied after the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Will be. In this case, the clerk at the game hall grasps that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stopped state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again by operating such that all of the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed to the expected set value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be determined and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

As described above, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied at the time of power restoration (a),
Error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM029)
The display is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without performing “E” in the above, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the set value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied at the time of power restoration (b), the system cannot shift to the setting change mode at the time of power restoration, even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. State, the game is forcibly stopped (step S21TM420).
0 to a loop process of step S21TM4220), and an error display (step S21TM4210: “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 is performed. This makes it possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value has not been determined, thereby realizing appropriate game control.

If the setting change flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030)
ES), when the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transition to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and when one of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) is not satisfied, A different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the setting value may be abnormal.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode (or the condition for shifting is satisfied). Is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 receives this command.
In this case, it is preferable to display a message “the setting value may be abnormal” and a message “the setting is automatically controlled to the setting change mode” on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the transition condition is not satisfied, as described above, the step S21TM4
It is preferable to send a 190 setting value error command.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process proceeds to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21T
In response to the operation of M051 (change from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch (Clear switch) When the 21TM052 is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. become.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) issues a lock switch operation command,
And / or an operation for changing a setting value is performed based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command even though the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not controlled. Can be specified and that effect can be notified. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the character “operation of the lock switch has been detected.” In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the text “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed. As a result, the store clerk at the amusement arcade clearly understands that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and Can be confirmed.

The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process proceeds to the normal game process, the lock switch 21TM
051 has been operated, and a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052
The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140).
Only when it is confirmed that the three conditions are satisfied, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step S21T).
NO at M4570).

The present invention is not limited to this mode, and as shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii)
), The RAM clear flag is set to 1 without checking whether or not the three conditions are satisfied (step S21TM4150), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step S21TM4).
(NO at 570).

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. (Step S
At 21TM4030, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied (step S21TM4150), and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (step S21TM4150). The part that is not controlled in the game stop state (the processing corresponding to the loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is different from the processing shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. The state is controlled and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, and the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the three conditions (determined NO in step S21TM4570). When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting values in the setting value storage area can be changed (YES in step S21TM4030). Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied, the control is forcibly controlled to the setting change mode.

As described above, when the power is cut off during the control to the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. Is automatically controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not
Workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

If the setting change flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030)
ES), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM).
Even when the condition of (YES in 4130) is not satisfied, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off.
By operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the state,
The set value stored in the set value storage area is changed (Step S in FIG. 9-7).
21TM4610 and step S21TM4620).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is that the lock switch 21TM051 is
That is, the state is switched from the N state to the OFF state (this is to determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, the store clerk who has performed the setting value change operation, once the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, in order to fix the set value and terminate the setting change mode, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S21T).
M4680 is determined to be YES).

Thus, the case where the setting change flag is not set (step S21TM40)
30 (NO in step S21), and when the setting change flag is set (step S21TM40).
30 (YES at 30), while the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is made different, while the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) is made common. The conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode are clarified, and the process is appropriately shifted to the normal game process.

Here, the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030).
), The lock switch 21TM051 is turned on.
A notification urging the user to enter the state may be provided. For example, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190 described above). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and switch it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing when the setting change flag is set. For this reason, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the gaming machine side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is not ended, it becomes impossible to cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take a measure for fixing the set value.

(Setting value storage control in case of power failure during setting value change)
Next, the control for storing the set value when the power is cut off during the change of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, in the setting change mode, when the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area is changed.

First, FIG. 9 shows control in the case where power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by performing a setting value changing operation during the setting change mode. This will be described using -12 (1).

As shown in the order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode.
In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. Next, as shown in the order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in the order 3, in the setting change mode, the first setting change switch (
The setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from “0” to “1” based on the operation of the clear switch 21TM052, and “2” is obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM05
1 remains in the ON state. Further, as shown in the order 4, in the setting change mode,
Based on the operation of the second setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed from “1” to “2”, and the changed set value is set to 1 Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in the order 5, it is assumed that in the setting change mode, the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for terminating the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052.
In the power-off state, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in the order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is set in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 as the set value.
Is stored. This set value “2” is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in the order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the RAM 102
Is read out from the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

When the power is turned on in the order 6, since the setting change flag is set, even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared) when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 is applied. Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the mode is automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

Thus, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, and the lock switch 21TM0
If the power is cut off without turning off the power supply 51 (without terminating the setting change mode), the set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is retained in the set value storage area when the power is restored. It has been done. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been scheduled may be set. In this case, the clerk of the game arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing the operation of changing the set value again. It is sufficient to shift the gaming machine to the normal game processing, so that workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the end of the setting change mode) by performing the setting value changing operation during the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG.

Orders 1 to 4 are the same as in the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), and a description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in the order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051
Is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the determined set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

Thereafter, as shown in the order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, R
The setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the AM 102
Is kept as it is.

Next, as shown in the order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is set in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 as the set value.
Is stored. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in an order 8, when the setting change mode is started, the RAM 102
Is read out from the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled to the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control of the setting change mode ends. In any case, when the power is restored, the set value changed in accordance with the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is used. , The effective set value (the set value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

Note that the present invention is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when controlled in the setting change mode, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is controlled in the setting change mode. 21
When the TM052 is operated, an operation of changing the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area without changing the setting value of the setting value storage area and ending the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on) The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (by overwriting) based on the fact that the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state is performed, and the setting value is determined. May be. In this case, the display monitor 21TM029
Is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is In accordance with the change, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, even when the setting is changed to the setting change mode upon power-on and a setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. The operation for ending the change mode is not completed (the lock switch 21TM0
51 is not switched to the OFF state) and the power is turned off, the RAM 10
The setting values stored in the setting value storage area 2 have not been changed since the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area when the power is last turned on is continuously held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is:
The value becomes a value corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time.

As described above, it is possible to appropriately set a set value in the case where power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

In the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode described in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability according to the setting value is provided. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this. Although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to gaming machines (the jackpot probability is 1/300).

  Also, the present invention 21TM discloses the following invention.

As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. In the case of a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when the setting value is changed, etc. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. is there. The invention relating to the means O1 to O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of the means O1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different).
And
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value (step S
A game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620;
Setting check mode control means (step S)
A game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing 21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650;
A specific signal output unit (a game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode control; ,
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (a value of a security signal timer) relating to a period during which a specific signal is output
) And
The setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (in step S21TM4710, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the setting confirmation mode With the end, the security signal is continuously output until one second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode.
Continue to output security signal until 0 seconds have elapsed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
The game machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the game state (step S21TM4050, step S21TM
A game control microcomputer 100) that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in 4150,
The initialization means initializes a game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as a value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting unit can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (If the RAM clear is executed, step S2
30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer with 1TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continue to output security signal until 30 seconds elapse)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value both when the control in the setting change mode ends and when the control in the setting confirmation mode ends, so that the setting change When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so that the setting process by the setting unit is common and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. The period can be set.

The game machine of means O3 is
A game machine of means O1 or means O2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) to end the setting change mode in the setting change mode. The setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode in the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102), which stores the specific information (setting change flag), and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (step S21 based on the fact that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied).
TM4200 to step S21, and repeat the processing of TM4220 until the power is turned off).
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM46)
A game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of 20);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for terminating the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (step S21T).
A setting value error command is transmitted in M4190, and the character "E" can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display in step S21TM4210).
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control unit issues a notification for prompting an operation for changing a setting value. Please migrate "message is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the clerk at the amusement arcade, and to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. The invention according to the means P1 to P4 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of the means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different).
And
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value (step S
A game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Step S21TM472
A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at 0.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means P2 is
The game machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch (setting Changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an ON state), and can be controlled to the setting change mode,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the establishment of the setting change condition (when power is turned on, steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4).
Based on the determination of YES in all 140, the process shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the condition controlled by the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is switched to the setting change mode without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided to appropriately set the setting value. You can prompt a change.

The game machine of the means P3 is
A game machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification and set the game to a stop state (when the power-on condition is not satisfied, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (any one of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). If NO is determined in step S21TM4200) without shifting to the setting change mode.
To the loop processing of step S21TM4220)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM46)
A game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of 20);
Said specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In such a case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (step S2).
1TM4190 transmits a setting value error command, and the character "E" can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210).
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control unit issues a notification for prompting an operation for changing a setting value. Please migrate "message is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the clerk at the amusement arcade, and to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. The invention according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. Is to do.

The gaming machine of the means Q1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different).
And
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value (step S
A game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Step S21TM472
A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at 0.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means determines whether the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (step S21TM when the power is restored).
If it is determined in 4030 that the setting change flag is set, the control is switched to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and the lock switch 21 is set).
TM051 is ON and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05
The control is automatically switched to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not a condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 2 is ON is satisfied.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
It is to be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, R21 in step S21TM4050, R21 in step S21TM4150).
RAM clear based on the AM clear flag being set (step S21TM
The game control microcomputer 100) for executing 1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
The gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means, based on a setting change condition being satisfied, When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. And the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the end of the setting change mode due to the ON state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. If the setting change condition is satisfied, control is performed in the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030). ), Automatically switches to the setting change mode regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A game machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a shift operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (step S21TM).
4040), the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). Accordingly, the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode is terminated, that is, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied). Specific operation while being controlled to the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680)
The setting change mode can be terminated based on the fact that the setting has been changed to FF).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when the setting change mode is controlled (sets a setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (step S21TM4720 in which the control of the setting change mode ends).
The setting change flag is cleared at the timing of),
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the shift operation has been performed Control is performed to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not. The setting change mode is automatically controlled) and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680). Make
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the condition for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
A set value storage unit (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) can be executed;
The setting value stored in the setting value storage unit is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled to the setting change mode (in step S21TM4680, the lock switch 2
The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that 1TM051 has been turned OFF),
The setting value storage unit is configured to change the setting value in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode. The set value after the setting is continuously stored (the set value storage area is RA
It is formed in the backup area of M102, and the setting change switch (
When the (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area is changed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the change after the change operation is performed. Setting value is retained)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since the control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
A set value storage unit (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) can be executed;
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting change mode (clear switch) 21TM052 when the setting change mode is controlled in the setting change mode. Only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area), and changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area). To set as a valid set value and exit the setting change mode),
The setting value storage unit is configured to execute the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when the setting change mode is being controlled. (The lock switch 21TM051 is turned off even if the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode.)
If the setting is not switched to the FF, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area is not changed. Therefore, if the power is cut off during the set change mode, the set value before being controlled to the set change mode is retained. )
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 044IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 044IW will be described. First, a gaming state in the present feature part 044IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the present characteristic portion 044IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In the characteristic portion 044IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). The case where it is controlled, the case where it is controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and the case where it is controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (the high probability / the first KT state). , High probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state of the KT states, as described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and Is very rare (for example, about one ball every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the state is controlled so that small hits are likely to occur, and the state is controlled to be in the high base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state among the KT states, as described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, the second K
In the T state, the state is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to be short.

The KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in the characteristic part 044IW, the variable winning prize ball device 6
The probability that B is in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio determined to be a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the ratio determined to be a small hit increases. For this reason, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to fluctuate, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

Note that the configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which the KT state is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning prize ball device 6B will be in the open state as a normal figure is the same as the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol fluctuates. By configuring the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of times of change to a certain time in the KT state is higher than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

In the present characteristic portion 044IW, the time required from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to reach the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and by a group of nails forming a flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the variable winning prize ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing the passing gate 41. When the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be opened when one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required until the variable prize ball is opened. Of game balls can be directly won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the present feature unit 044IW. As shown in FIG. 10A, the special variable prize ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 044IW108 formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which a game ball flows down. Bottom member 0 from the closed state moved forward
By moving the 44IW 108 backward, the large winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this feature part 044IW, as shown in FIG.
Further, it is guided to a guidance route 044IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7.
The guidance route 044IW100 is further branched into two routes 044IW102 and 103, and the game ball guided to the guidance route 044IW100 is guided to the left route 0444IW102 or the right route 044IW103. When guided to the left side route 044IW102, the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 0444IW106. When guided to the right route 044IW103, the game ball is discharged to the discharge area 044IW1.
05, and is detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10A, a V-region opening / closing plate 0
44IW101 is provided, and when the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in an open state, the game ball guided to the guidance route 044IW100 enters the left route 044IW102, and
It is possible to enter the area 044IW104. When the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guidance route 044IW100 moves the right-side route 044IW10.
3 and is discharged from the discharge area 044IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 044IW109.

In addition, in the present feature portion 044IW, when the big hit game is controlled, a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, and after the big hit game ends, on condition that the game ball is detected by the V region switch 044IW106. It is controlled to a probable state.

Note that the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 044IW106 and the game balls detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107 during one round matches the game ball number detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 044IW106 and the game balls detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107 during one round is equal to the first count switch 23.
If the number does not match the number of game balls detected by the game, it may be determined that there is a special winning opening entrance discharge mismatch error and an error is notified. In this case, it takes some time for the winning game ball to reach the V region 044IW104 or the discharge region 044IW105 immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed. If the number of game balls does not match before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after this time, it may be configured to determine that there is a special winning opening entrance discharge mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10B is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards and the like in the present feature unit 044IW.
In the present characteristic part 044IW, as shown in FIG.
), Count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24))
In addition to the detection signal from
The detection signal from the 4IW 107 is taken and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the present characteristic part 044IW, as shown in FIG.
In addition to the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100, the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory, the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, the solenoid for the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is added. 044IW109.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. FIG. 10-4 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. FIG. 10-3
As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. In addition, not only when the setting can be changed in six steps,
For example, the configuration may be configured to be changeable in two to five stages, or may be configured to be changeable in seven or more stages.

First, the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest with the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the big hit probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the big hit probability “
247/65536 ", which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times higher in the probability-change state (high-probability state) than in the non-probability-change state (low-probability state). In the case of “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for small hits, as shown in FIGS.
Regardless of which of “6” and whether of the non-probable state (low probability state) or the probable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is “6298/65536”. It is constant. That is, in this example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probable change state and the probable change state. As described above, even in the case where the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is made constant, FIG.
As shown in (B), a configuration may be adopted in which the number of determination values for each set value matches by making the outlier probability different for the set values “1” to “6”.

Next, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the change display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example illustrated in FIG. 10A, in the non-probability state (low-probability state), the case of the setting value “1” is the lowest with the jackpot probability of “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the big hit probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the big hit probability “
247/65536 ", which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times as large as the probability change state (high probability state) as compared with the non-probability change state (low probability state). In the case of “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for small hits, as shown in FIGS.
Regardless of which of “6” and whether of the non-probable state (low probability state) or the probable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is “62986/65536”. It is constant. That is, in this example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value,
The non-probable state and the probable state are common. However, in the present example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3), the small hit is achieved. The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the second special symbol change display is the small hit when performing the first special symbol change display). More than the number of judgment values for judgment). As described above, even in the case where the big hit probability is made different depending on the set value while the small hit probability is made constant, FIG.
As shown in FIGS. -4 (A) and (B), the configuration may be such that the number of judgment values for each set value is matched by making the loss probability different between the set values "1" to "6".

In the present example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination value corresponding to the loss is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 10). -3 and FIG.
As shown in -4, there is no set value at which the outlier probability becomes 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the loss differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” is present). , The outlier probability is different).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, when the outlier probability is 0 (that is,
The configuration may be such that there is a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the outlier. For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (the highest jackpot probability), the miss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the miss may not be included.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in the present example, and for example, when the small hit probability becomes 0 (that is,
It may be configured such that there is a determination value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the small hit). For example, in the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10C), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the determination value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10 (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10 (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probable state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of a miss is different, the probability of a large hit in the probable state (high-probability state) is higher than that in the non-probability state (low-probability state). It may be reduced and the outlier probabilities may be matched. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values, for example, “1” and “2”, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. Thereby, in a gaming machine having substantially less than six settable stages or a gaming machine having no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a gaming machine of a type having a six-stage setting change function and a hardware / software configuration Can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 10-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The big hit type determination table indicates that the type of the big hit is “2R normal big hit”, “2R probable big hit”, “ "6R normal big hit", "6R probable big hit", or "1
It is a table that is referred to to determine any one of “0R probability change big hit”.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in the characteristic portion 044IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as “10R probable jackpot” with a probability of 9%, and is determined as “6R probable jackpot” with a probability of 56%.
% Is determined as "6R ordinary big hit". Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in the characteristic portion 044IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Is determined to be "10R probable jackpot" with a probability of 10%,
With a probability of 50%, it is determined as "6R probability variable jackpot", with a probability of 5%, determined as "2R probability variable jackpot", and with a probability of 35%, it is determined as "2R probability variable jackpot".

The “10R probability changing big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. Also, "6R probable big hit"
This is a big hit in which the state is controlled to the big hit game state of six rounds and the state is shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. The “2R probability changing big hit” is a big hit in which the state is controlled to a two-round big hit game state and the state is shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends.

The “6R normal big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of six rounds and the state is shifted to the low probability state after the big hit game state ends. The “2R normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the big hit gaming state ends.

In the feature part 044IW, “10R probability variable hit”, “6R probability variable hit”, and “6R probability variable hit”
In the case of "R normal big hit", a big prize is won until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls is won in each round of the big hit game. The mouth is controlled to be in an open state, and a maximum of 10 big winning holes can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probable big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings in the large winning opening that can be won every round is about two to three.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when the big hit game is ended, the game is controlled to one of the first KT state, the second KT state, and the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The manner of transition of the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams illustrating a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The small hit type determination table displays the small hit type as “small hit A” based on the random number for hit type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a small hit symbol.
, "Small hit B", or "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in the characteristic portion 044IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as “small hit A” with a probability of 100%. In addition, as shown in FIG.
In the 4IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, “small hit B” is determined with a probability of 70%, and 30 % Is determined as "small hit C".

In this example, as described later, in the case of “small hit A”, the special winning opening is opened for only a very short 0.2 second during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12), and the small hit game is performed. It is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning opening. In the case of the "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hitting game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball is won to the special winning opening during the small hitting game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hitting game (see FIG. 10-14), and the game ball is won to the special winning opening during the small hitting game. You can expect the most.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 10-7 to FIG. 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decoration symbol used in the characteristic portion 044IW. EX shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9
T is the second byte of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and the decoration symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decoration symbol 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, a variation pattern #n (n
= 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the non-KT first first symbol shown in FIG. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, any one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06 is determined.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability /
In the case of the first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. Figure 1
As shown in 0-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the KT state, the variation is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in the non-KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined to be a loss, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also,
Even when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, even when the non-KT state is in effect, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, a situation arises in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning game balls to the special winning opening. Would. Therefore, in the characteristic part 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is increased. Is reduced to reduce the frequency of occurrence of small hits, thereby preventing a situation in which a small hit is aimed at acquiring a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 044IW, the “frequency of occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute). In the KT state, for example,
The occurrence rate of small hits per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is changed even if a big hit occurs. 5
By making the length relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming for a prize ball by unreasonably winning a special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, since the digestion of the first hold memory does not need to be longer than in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the case of a small hit. I have.

In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if the low probability / first KT state is set, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended. The change pattern table is selected in accordance with the number of times of change after the change. in this case,
If the first variation display is executed, the low probability / first KT shown in FIG.
At this time, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the change display of the second special symbol is executed as the first change of the low probability / first KT state, any of the second change patterns # 04 to # 06 is performed. Is determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is a loss, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds. It is determined. If the first change of the low probability / first KT state is determined to be a small hit, the second change pattern # 05 (second start winning opening opening) which is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. Fluctuation pattern for preparation). In the characteristic portion 044IW, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B is lengthened to actually increase the special variable prize. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately formed. If the device 17 is controlled to the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic part 044IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize winning ball device 17 are changed before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, it is possible to win a special winning opening. This prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. When it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for two minutes.

FIG. 10 shows a case where the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed.
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT shown at -8 (E) and the 2nd to 49th variation is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10E, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation patterns # 07 to # 13 are displayed. Determined to be one. Further, as shown in FIG. 10E, when it is determined to be out of the low probability / first KT state as the 2nd to 49th variation,
There is a case where the second variation pattern # 07 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern # 08 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, low probability / 1K
When it is determined to be out of the range from the 2nd to 49th variation of the T state, the second variation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. When the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 10 of the shortened change having a short change time of 5 seconds, and the change time is even shorter as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state,
There is a case where the second variation pattern # 12 with reach is determined. Second variation pattern # 07
, # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored,
The second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 are variation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reserved storages are stored. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. When it is determined to be a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which has triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended, the fluctuation display of the 50th fluctuation (that is, the final fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), as the 50th change of the low probability / first KT state,
When the special symbol change display is executed, it is determined to be one of the second change patterns # 14 to # 16.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, a character display such as “during a chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5, for example. Fig. 10-
As shown in FIG. 8 (F), when it is determined to be a loss or a small hit as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the image display device 5 ends displaying characters such as “CHANCE TIME END !!”. It is determined to be the second variation pattern # 14 or the second variation pattern # 15 accompanying the display. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10F, when it is determined that the big hit is the 50th change of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as “CHANCE TIME END !!” is displayed on the image display device 5. After the end display to be performed, the second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined resurrection display is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-7, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when a large hit occurs in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case in which a big hit has occurred immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the fluctuation of the second special symbol executed during the fluctuation of the big hit of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly released, the forcible release frequently occurs even in the second KT state, and the player loses the small hit. You will not receive any profits.
Therefore, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a short change time, so that the game mode shifts to the big hit game state based on the change of the first special symbol before the forced loss frequently occurs. It is configured.

It should be noted that, unlike the feature part 044IW, even when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol is not forcibly released (for example, the first special symbol is not changed). When the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol big hit symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly removed. In the case of the gaming machine, the change time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. If the change time of the big hit is set to the same short change time as the loss, the player will You will not be able to receive any profits from small hits. Therefore, if the change time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is set to a long change time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is a sufficient time that the small hit can be generated at least a plurality of times. (For example, one minute).

When executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, when the high probability / first KT state is set, the fluctuation after ending the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit which triggered the high probability / first KT state. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. Fig. 10-
As shown in FIG. 9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. You.

In addition, similarly to the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), even when it is determined to be out of the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation time is determined. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 17 having a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds is determined. On the other hand, high probability / first KT
Even if it is determined that the state is out of the first variation, the second variation pattern # 18 with the reach is also obtained.
May be determined. In addition, even when the small change is determined as the first change of the high probability / first KT state, the change pattern (second change pattern # 19) for preparing the second starting winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small fluctuation is the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. FIG.
As shown in -9 (G), when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

In addition, if the variation display after the second variation is performed after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation big hit which has triggered the high probability / first KT state, the variation display shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is performed. The probability / first KT and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the second variation and thereafter are selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), the high probability / second KT state 2
When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed after the fluctuation eye, the second fluctuation pattern # 2
2 to # 28.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), similarly to the low-probability / first KT state in the second to forty-fourth fluctuations, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the second variation pattern # 22 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern # 23 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, 2 of high probability / first KT state
When it is determined to be out of position after the variation, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. If it is determined that the small hit is the second or higher variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation having a variation time as short as 5 seconds or the variation time of 1 second is determined.
In some cases, the second variation pattern # 26 having a shortened variation as short as seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the small hit is determined as the second or higher change of the high probability / first KT state, the second
In some cases, the variation pattern # 27 is determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second change patterns # 23 and # 26 are one or more second hold storages. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the user is present. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. Also,
If it is determined to be a big hit as the second or higher variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

In the case of executing the change display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, FIG.
The fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in 0-9 (I) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 29 to #
34.

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be out of place in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 29 of a shortened variation as short as 1.5 seconds. Or the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 30 of the normal variation of 5 seconds.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of place in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 31 with reach may be determined. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 of the shortened variation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second variation pattern # 33 of the variation may be determined. Further, when it is determined to be a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

More specifically, when the change pattern is determined, it is determined according to which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol the variable display is to be performed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using a variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for variation pattern determination,
It is determined which variation pattern to use. FIG. 10-10 is a diagram for determining a variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for high probability / second KT at the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variable display of small hitting is executed, , Irrespective of any of the set values “1” to “6”, the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in the present example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of the 1.5 second shortening variation is selected.

FIG. 10-10 shows, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, in the case of the first KT state, the shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed, and in the case of the second KT state, the shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds has a high probability. Is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a short variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the low probability state, and a short variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the high probability state.

Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, FIG.
The opening pattern of the special variable prize ball device 7 when the game is controlled to the big hit game based on the 10R probability big hit, the 6R probability big hit, and the 2R probability big hit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “the probability big hit”) using 1) will be described. I do. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning port door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning port) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when a game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, the first count switch 23 detects it.

In addition, in the big hit game based on the probability change big hit, as shown in FIG.
Upon detecting the second game ball winning the big winning opening in the round, the solenoid 044I
W109 is driven, and the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to open, and the V region 044
A game ball can enter the IW 104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes has been detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. When the variable winning prize ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

A game ball enters the V region 044 IW 104 and the V region switch 0 within a predetermined detection valid period.
When the game is detected by the 44IW 106, the gaming state is controlled to the certain state after the big hit game is completed. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the predetermined detection valid period is started at a timing when the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to open, and the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is turned on. This is a period until a predetermined period (in this example, 500 ms) elapses after the closed state is controlled again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), opening of the special variable prize ball device 7 in the case of being controlled to the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal big hit”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when a game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, the first count switch 23 detects it.

In the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG.
Upon detecting the first game ball winning the big winning opening in the round, the solenoid 044I
W109 is driven, and the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in a very short period (in this example, 0.
It is controlled to the open state (for 02 seconds). Then, in the first round, a predetermined period (for example, 29
Seconds) or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the winning prize holes is detected.
11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again,
The special winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the predetermined detection effective period is an extremely short opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 (0.02 in this example).
(Seconds), and a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. Therefore, during the predetermined detection valid period, the V region 044
A game ball easily enters the IW 104, and is easily controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the V region 044IW104 substantially during a predetermined detection validity period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to be in a positively changed state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 at a higher rate during the big hit game than the big hit game based on the normal big hit.

Next, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable winning prize ball device 17 in the KT state. 10-12 show the opening patterns of the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. FIG. 10-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable winning prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit B. Also,
FIG. 10-14 shows the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize winning ball device 1 in the case of the small hit C.
7 illustrates an opening pattern. FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 10-12 (2). 10 to 14 (2) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). FIG.
As shown in -12 (1) to FIG. 10-14 (1), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and a game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed, and when it is determined that the hit is the ordinary symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when the loss is determined, the shifted symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. . In the characteristic part 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying a hit symbol or a missing symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG.
As shown in (1) to FIG. 10-14 (1), after the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds elapse, the second start winning opening pre-opening time 0.1 seconds elapses, and then the variable winning prize ball The device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second start winning opening.

When a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined that a small hit is made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , The small hit B, FIG.
As shown in (1), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and the small hit C, as shown in FIG. Device 17 is 1
. It is opened for 8 seconds, and the game ball can enter the special winning opening. (However, in the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens for only a very short 0.2 second, You can hardly expect a prize). However, in the first KT state, FIG.
), The opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is opened. The time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins a special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning prize ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning prize ball device 6B can be opened. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time 0.2 seconds of the next ordinary symbol, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, is there. Therefore, this feature 04
In the 4IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 second is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Also, in the present characteristic portion 044IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After a total of 0.5 seconds, which is a total of 0.2 seconds of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, 0.2 seconds of the symbol fixing time, and 0.1 seconds of the pre-opening process of opening the second winning opening, the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to arriving at the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Normally, since the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to the time when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the symbol is not changed is changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened. When controlled to the state, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed are more likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). FIG.
As shown in -12 (2) to FIG. 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game switch is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed, and when it is determined that the hit is the ordinary symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20, and when the loss is determined, the shifted symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20. . In the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missing symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG.
As shown in (2) to FIG. 10-14 (2), after the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, and after the time 2.6 seconds before the second starting winning opening opening process has elapsed, the variable winning ball is obtained. The device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

When a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined that a small hit is made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , In the case of the small hit B, FIG.
As shown in (2), when the special variable prize ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and the small hit C, as shown in FIG. Device 17 is 1
. The open state is maintained for 8 seconds, and the game ball can enter the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short, 0.2 seconds. In the characteristic portion 044IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6
At least 3.8 seconds as an interval period (closed period) after the opening of B (ordinary symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds + second start winning opening opening process time 2.6 seconds) ) Is secured for a relatively long period. Therefore, in the second KT state, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), since the opening time of the variable winning prize ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, the special variable winning prize on the downstream side as compared with the first KT state. A game ball easily enters the ball device 17 and a game ball easily enters a special winning opening. However,
In the case of the small hit A, the special variable prize ball device 17 opens for only a very short period of 0.2 seconds, so that even in the second KT state, it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special prize hole.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in a special winning opening, and a prize ball is easily obtained. In this example, this is also referred to as “small hit RUSH”.
USH "is displayed.

Further, in this example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 (special winning opening) is made different depending on which of the small hit types is the small hits A to C has been described. It is not limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be made different depending on which of the small hit types is the small hits A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of the small hit B or the small hit C, the special variable prize ball device 17 is opened during the small hit game. The special variable prize ball device 17 may be configured to be opened two to eleven times. Also, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable prize ball device 17 is somewhat short, by opening the special variable prize ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable prize ball device 17 (special prize opening) is executed. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a certain amount, and various modes are conceivable. In this example, the small hit type is small hit A to
Although the case of three types of C has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, four or more small hit types may be provided.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 044IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 second, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is played. The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Normally, the variable prize ball device 6B is in an open state because the time required for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 and reach the variable prize ball device 6B is longer than the time when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before the control is performed. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed to be won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, the normal symbol variation display is executed, and the variable winning ball device 6 is used.
The processing of opening control of B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically,
This is performed by executing the normal symbol process process (see step S26) by the CPU 103). In addition, in the ordinary symbol process process of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is the probable change state (high probability state), and determines whether the game state is the non-KT state, the first KT state, or the second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not to make a regular hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In the characteristic portion 044IW, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same in 0.2 seconds each in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is equal to the second time. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and increasing it to 2.6 second in the second KT state has been described. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different by making the fluctuating time and the symbol fixing time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Thus, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the above methods, winning in the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. .

In the characteristic unit 044IW, as will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting a high base flag indicating that the state is the high base state. As shown in 10-14 (1), the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state, by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the variable winning prize ball device 6B is opened. The time is controlled to be shorter.

For example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the special flag shown in FIG.
) To 10-14 (1), the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled by a first opening pattern (long opening) for long-time opening, and if the special flag is not set, FIG. 10-12 (2)
10-14 (2), the variable winning prize ball device 6B may be controlled in a second opening pattern (short opening) for short-time opening. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the control may be performed such that the special flag is not set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when the low probability / last change display in the first KT state is performed, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, low probability / first KT
The special flag described above may be deleted in accordance with the 49th special symbol change stop of the 50 special symbol shortening change periods in the state. With such a configuration, low probability /
When performing the left-hitting notification after the end of the first KT state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the variable winning ball device 6B is long opened.

As described above, when the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable prize ball device 6B, a flag for shortening and varying the variable display of the special symbol is further used. In this case, a special symbol and a flag for shortened variation may be separately managed and controlled.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case where the opening probability of the variable winning sphere device 6B is increased in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. In the variable winning prize ball device 6B, it is possible to prevent the prize from winning in a low probability / non-KT
It is possible to prevent a right-handing operation from being performed during the state.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable symbol is a variable winning prize ball in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the status of the ordinary symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the movement of the second special symbol at the timing of stopping the change. The variable prize ball device 6B does not open until the game ball that has passed through the variable prize ball device 6B or the special variable prize ball device 17 allows the special prize port to win. On the other hand, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the normal symbol fluctuating time is shortened, so that the variable prize ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes the pass gate 41 and reaches the variable prize ball device 6B. Is set to be started, so that in the first KT state, it is possible to eliminate a capture element by a firing operation aiming at a small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

FIG. 10-15 and FIG. 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS.
00 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are effect control commands for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of a special symbol. (Fluctuation pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of the variation. Therefore, the effect control CPU
Reference numeral 120 denotes commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H).
Is received, the image display device 5 is controlled to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be out. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variation big hit. . The command 9003 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command as 6
This is an effect control command (display result 3 specifying command (6R certain variable big hit specifying command)) for designating an R probability variable big hit. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 specifying command (6R normal big hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R normal big hit. . Command 9005 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command by 2
This is an effect control command (a display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating an R probability change big hit. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R regular big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R normal big hit. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In addition, in this characteristic part 044IW, the microcomputer 1 for game control
00 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result designation command immediately before the first variation pattern command.
Since the display result specifying command for the special symbol can be determined and the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specifying command for the second special symbol, the display result specifying command can be determined. Can be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result specifying command for the first special symbol and the display result specifying command for the second special symbol may be different.

Also, instead of transmitting the display result designation command, the game control microcomputer 100 responds to each of the 10R probability change big hit / 6R probability change big hit / 6R normal big hit / 2R certain change big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / out. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is finished. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has been started.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying stoppage of variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol determination designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command transmitted from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. B000 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the start of a big hit game (big hit start specifying command: fanfare specifying command). B001 (H) is an effect control command (
Jackpot end designation command: ending designation command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) for specifying the start of the small hit game. B005
(H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of a special winning opening) for designating a display during a round during a big hit game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) for specifying a display after the round during the big hit game (display of an interval between rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening in a state where the first number of retained memories has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening in a state where the second number of stored memories has not reached four. Note that a command indicating the first number of reserved storages may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second number of retained storages may be transmitted as the second effective start winning designation command. In the example, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is in the first customer waiting state (the first special symbol has not been changed,
This is an effect control command (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command) for designating that the first hold storage is not stored. Command D001 (H) is in the second customer waiting state (second
This is an effect control command (second customer waiting demonstration display designation command) for designating that the special symbol has not been changed and the second hold storage has not been stored. The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (
H) is an effect control command (low-precision / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (highly accurate / first) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state.
KT background designation command). The command E003 (H) indicates that the gaming state is a high probability / second K
This is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display in the T state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command () for designating the currently set value.
Setting value command). The set value is set to “XX”. For example, setting value "1"
Is set, the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the setting value is set to “6”, the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 is a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11.
When the above-mentioned effect control command is received, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16, and the display state of the lamp is changed. To output tone number data. 10-15 and FIG.
Effect control commands other than the effect control command indicated by −16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command relating to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal processing is executed is as follows.
This is a case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A is as follows.
This is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 044 IWS50A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first reserved storage number (
Step 044IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked. If the first reserved storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is sent to the effect control C
This is transmitted to the PU 120 (step 044 IWS 52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100
02, the respective random number values stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer are read out and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 044IWS53A), and the first reserved storage is performed. The value of the number is reduced by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is reduced by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 044IW).
S54A). That is, in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is converted into the first reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the first reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, and 4 in order. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 0441).
WS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the process of step 044 IWS55A. Is executed, the set value command is also transmitted.

The timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to the timing shown in the present example. Or it may be configured to perform

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variable flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is the low probability / non-KT state, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variable flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background designation command is issued.
When the probable variable flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is the high probability / first KT state, and when the probable / first KT background designation command is issued, the probable variable flag is on and the high base flag is off. , A high probability / second KT background designation command is determined and the high probability / second KT background designation command is transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating (step 044IWS57A). Specifically, if the second big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 044I without performing the processing of step 044IWS58A and thereafter.
Move to WS69A. With this, when the change of the first special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly lose regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57A, a process of setting an outlier random number value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and step 044IWS59A is executed.
By moving to, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of the start winning.

Also, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57A, the process of steps 044IWS58A to S63A is not performed, and a random number value (fixed value) of a loss is set as the hit determination random number. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads out the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 044IWS58A).
), And executes the big hit determination module (step 044IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step 044IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the change display of the first special symbol (step 044IWS61A). . Then, it is determined based on the hit type determination random number whether the big hit type is a 10R certain variable big hit, a 6R certain variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit (step 044IWS62A), the big hit type is stored (step 0444IWS63A), and step 044IWS69A. Move to.

If it is determined in step 044IWS60A that no big hit has occurred, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 044IWS6).
4A). The small hit determination module uses a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination)
This is a program for determining a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 044IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is made based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ( Step 044IWS66A). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for hit type determination (step 0444WS), and stores the small hit type (step 0444W).
S68A). In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, Step 044 IWS
Move to 69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is “0” (step 044IWS69A).
, “0”, the flow proceeds to step 044 IWS75A. If the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 044I).
WS70A), and determines whether it has become “0” (step 044IWS71A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the flow shifts to step 044 IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 1
00 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 044)
Along with the IWS 72A), the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the shortening control of the change display of the special symbol is being performed is reset (step 044 IWS 73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of the fluctuation (step 044IWS74A). Then, control goes to a step 044IWS75A.

In the characteristic part 044IW, as described later, the high base flag is set and the number of times of performing the variable display in the high base state is managed because the low probability is set at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / first KT state) and the variable display is executed 50 times. Low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT
State), when the 50th variation display is started, step 044 IWS7
1A, S71B, Y is determined and the high base flag is reset in steps 044IWS72A, S72B, and the special figure time saving flag is reset in steps 044IWS73A, S73B, and the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state) ).

Note that the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is to continue the right-handed notification and to continue the right-handed state. This flag is used to set the state as a common effect background with the first KT state.

Then, in step 044IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 044IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 044IWS75A is determined.

In addition, in step 044IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit using one of the non-probable change big hit determination table and the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the game state.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not a special figure time reduction flag indicating that the special symbol variation display is being shortened is being controlled. Is confirmed (step 044 IWS1700A). In this example, by setting the special figure time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol, it is more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (FIG. 10-7). 10-9), a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 10
0 selects the variation pattern table for the first non-KT special symbol shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 044IW).
S1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state)
The game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 044 IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 044 IWS 1701A,
Which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is to be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Is determined (step 044 IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, a variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (
Step 044 IWS 1704A).

Also, in step 044 IWS1703A, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol
Is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and starts measuring the variation time (step 044IWS1705A), and the first special symbol display device The variable display of the first special symbol in 4A is started (step 044IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing (step 044IWS1707A).

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol change process, the CPU 10
No. 3 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120) (step 044IWS1120A). Note that the case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is a gate passage waiting process (step S121)
This is the case where the value does not indicate the small hitting end processing (step S128), and during the small hitting game (special variable winning prize ball device 17) even during the big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times).
Open).

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a jackpot if not transmitted yet,
And any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) based on the jackpot type determination result Control for transmission to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 044 IWS 1121 A).

Next, the CPU 103 decrements the first variable time timer by 1 (step 044 IWS11).
22A) When the first variable time timer times out (step 044 IWS1123A)
), The control for transmitting the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 044IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 044).
IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044I).
WS1125A). Whether the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, The second showing that a big hit will be made based on the change display of the second special symbol
The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the big hit flag is set.

If the large special symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044IWS1126A). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.
If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is terminated.

If the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 0).
44IWS1127A). Note that whether or not the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated.

If the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit type is a 10R certain change big hit or a 6R certain change big hit (step 044IWS1128A). It is to be noted that whether or not it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 6R probability variable hit can be determined, for example, by checking the type of the big hit stored in step 044IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 6R probability variable hit, the process is terminated.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044IWS
1125A), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 044IWS112).
(Y of 6A), and the variation display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, becomes the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed (step 0).
In the case of Y of 44IWS1127A and N of step 044IWS1128A, the CPU 103
Performs control to transmit the first forced symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 044IWS113).
0A).

By executing the processes of steps 044IWS1125A to S1129A, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the variation display of the second special symbol has a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol which is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example) is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is changed. A big hit and a small hit are prevented from occurring at the same time between the second special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is determined to be forcible, the variation of the decoration symbol is determined based on the second compulsory symbol determination designation command transmitted in step 044 IWS1129A. Control is performed so as to forcibly display the missing symbol as a display result.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation is a big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit). If the first special symbol variation display is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y of step 044 IWS1128A). In this case, the second special symbol variation process is executed.
Based on the fact that the change display of the special symbol is a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, N is determined in step 044IWS1120A, and the processing of steps 044IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 044IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol that is a certain variation big hit is being executed, the first variation time timer is set during the small hit game. Is interrupted and the first special symbol change display is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a loss or a small hit. Even in the case where there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (refer to N of step 044 IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss or a small hit, is being executed, the first variation during the small hit game is also performed. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hitting game is ended, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 044IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
The PU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 044 IWS).
2011A). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (
Along with step 044IWS2012A), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting termination designation command to effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (the second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the right-hand operation is performed. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the low probability / first K
During the T state, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.
By executing the processing of 74A, S69B to S74B, the low probability / first KT state is ended and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered when the 50th variation display is started, and the steps 044IWS2010A to S2013A are performed. , S2010B to S2013B are executed, so that the right-handed indicator 26 is turned off when the 50th variation display ends.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the first special symbol display device 4A to derive and display a stop symbol of the first special symbol (step 044IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol determination designation command has been transmitted at step 044 IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, the first special symbol is forcibly set as the stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. The out-of-design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 044IWS2015A). If the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 1
03 sets a big hit start flag indicating that a big hit is started (step 044I)
WS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first big hit flag (step 0).
44IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 0).
Along with the 44IWS2018A), control is performed to transmit a right-turn-on lighting start command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0444IWS2019A). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 044IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the lighting of the right-hand display 26 is started when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided to the right of the game area, so that it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, so that the right hit is performed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The lighting of the display 26 may be started.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 044IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 044IWS2020A). If the first small hit flag is set, the effect control C
Control for transmitting the small hit start designation command to the PU 120 is performed (step 044IW).
S2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 04).
4IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (step 044IWS2026A). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally advantageous for the player to perform a right-handing operation during the small hitting game. But,
As described above, in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only the small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning opening. For this reason, in the present example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is not turned on, and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 044IWS2027A).

In the present example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right strike notification that prompts the player to fire a game ball to the right of the game area. I have. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification for prompting the player to fire the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 as the right strike notification can be executed. It may be.

In addition, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right hit notification and the launch promotion notification are not executed, and in the state where the game ball has won the first start winning opening, the right strike notification and the launch promotion notification are performed. (In this case, since the game is in the gate passage waiting state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not immediately started even if a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening, and the first holding symbol is stored). May be configured.

Conversely, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, a sound output of a small volume or a small screen display). Thus, a left-handed notification that prompts the player to perform a shooting operation of a game ball to the left of the game area may be performed. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a sound output of a large volume, Left-handed notification may be performed by a large-screen display). With such a configuration, the launch notification can be accurately performed. In particular, with the above-described configuration, for a player who accidentally fires a game ball to the right of the game area, a slight left-handed notification is made in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is low. , For players who intentionally perform a right-hand operation,
A left-handed notification may be performed in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high.
With such a configuration, it is possible to urge a player who intentionally performs a right-hand operation to return to a left-hand operation from a store clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, a left-handed notification may be made when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. Passing gate 4
In 1, when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-hitting notification is performed, and a specific number smaller than the predetermined number in the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is performed. A left strike notification may be made when more than one (for example, one) game ball is detected.

In this characteristic part 044IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 044 IWS50B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second reserved storage number (
Step 044IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second reserved storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is sent to the effect control C
This is transmitted to the PU 120 (step 044 IWS 52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100
02, the respective random number values stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer are read out and stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 044IWS53B), and the second reserved storage is performed. The value of the number is reduced by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is reduced by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 044IW).
S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is represented by the second reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the second reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, and 4 in order. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 0441).
WS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 044 IWS55B. Is executed, the set value command is also transmitted.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS56B). Note that the specific way of transmitting the background designation command is determined in step 044 IWS of the first special symbol normal process.
This is the same as the processing indicated by 56A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating (step 044IWS57B). Specifically, if the first big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 044I without performing the processing of step 044IWS58B and thereafter.
Move to WS69B. With this, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly be out regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a hit as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 044IWS59B, so that at any time during the start winning, May be forcibly removed regardless of whether the hit determination random number has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57B, the process of steps 044IWS58B to S63B is not performed, and a random number value (fixed value) of a loss is set as the hit determination random number. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number has been obtained at the time of the start winning.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 044IWS58B
), And executes the big hit determination module (step 044IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step 044IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step 044IWS61B). . Then, it is determined based on the hit type determination random number whether the big hit type is 10R certain big hit, 6R certain big hit, 2R certain big hit, or 2R normal big hit (step 044IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 044IWS6).
3B), and proceed to step 044 IWS 69B.

If it is determined in step 044IWS60B that it is not a big hit, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 044IWS6).
4B). The small hit determination module uses a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination)
This is a program for determining a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 044IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step 044IWS65B). Step 044IWS66B). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for hit type determination (step 044IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 044IW).
S68B). In the present example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the flow shifts to step 044IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the high base number counter to “0”.
Is determined (step 044IWS69B), and if it is “0”, the flow proceeds to step 044IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 044IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become “0” (step 044IWS71B). The value of the high base counter is "0"
If not, the flow shifts to step 044 IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 044IWS72B) and shortens the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that the control is being performed is reset (step 044IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 044IWS74B). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS75B.

Then, in step 044IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 044IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 044IWS75B is determined.

In addition, in step 044IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit using one of the non-probable change big hit determination table and the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the game state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) illustrated in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process has been described. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first executes step 0
The same processing as that of the 44IWS1700A is performed, and it is confirmed whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, it is not in the KT state)
The microcomputer 100 for game control selects the variation pattern table for the second non-KT special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability change flag and the high base flag are set or not, and As a variation pattern table for determining a pattern, any of the second KT-time second patterns shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I) is used.
Select the special pattern variation pattern table. For example, if the probable change flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first change is shown in FIG.
) Is selected, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, the variation pattern table shown in FIG.
The variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in -8 (E) is selected, and if it is the 50th variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected. Also, for example,
If both the probable variable flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (G). If it is the second variation or later, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the ordinary accessory control process (step S120) (step 044IWS1120B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a jackpot if not transmitted yet,
And any of the display result specifying commands (display result 1 specifying command, display result 2 specifying command, display result 3 specifying command, display result 5 specifying command, display result 6 specifying command, display result 7 designation command) for effect control CPU 120
Is transmitted (step 044 IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 decrements the second variable time timer by 1 (step 044 IWS11).
22B) When the second variable time timer times out (step 044 IWS1123B)
), The control for transmitting the second symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 044IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 044IWS1130B).

When the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044I).
WS1125B). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined, for example, by setting the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, The first showing that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol
The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the big hit flag is set.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044IWS1126B). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined, for example, by setting the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a first small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.
If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is terminated.

If the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the changing display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 0).
44IWS1127B). Note that whether or not the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the change display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit type is a 10R certain big hit, a 6R certain big hit, or a 2R certain big hit (step 044IWS1128B). . Whether it is a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, or a 2R probability variable hit can be determined, for example, by checking the type of the jackpot stored in step 044IWS63B. 10R probable jackpot, 6R probable jackpot,
Alternatively, if it is a 2R probability change jackpot, the process is terminated.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044IWS)
1125B, Y) or when a small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 044 IWS112).
(Y of 6B), and the variation display of the second special symbol which is not any of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, and the 2R probability variable jackpot (that is, becomes the 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 044IWS1127B). , Step 044 IWS1128B N)
First, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second forced symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 044IWS1130B)
).

By executing the processes of steps 044IWS1125B to S1129B, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the variation display of the first special symbol has a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the change display of the second special symbol which is a normal big hit (in this example, 2R normal big hit) is being executed, the change display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is changed. A big hit and a small hit are prevented from occurring at the same time between the second special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, in the effect control CPU 120, when the variation display of the second special symbol is determined to be forcible, the variation of the decoration symbol is determined based on the second compulsory symbol determination designation command transmitted in step 044IWS1129B. Control is performed so as to forcibly display the missing symbol as a display result.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation is a large hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, Alternatively, if the display of the change of the second special symbol, which is a 2R probability change big hit, is being executed, the second special symbol change processing is terminated as it is (refer to Y of step 044IWS1128B). Based on the fact that the symbol variation display has become a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126),
It shifts to a small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 044 IWS1
At 120B, it is determined to be N, and the processing of steps 044IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the update of the second variable time timer of step 044IWS1122B is not performed.
Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol that is a certain variation big hit is being executed, the second variation time timer is set during the small hit game. Update is interrupted, and the display of the change of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is again changed to the accessory control normal processing (step S12).
0), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit is performed. Even in the case where there is, the second special symbol change processing is terminated as it is (see N of step 044IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and the change display of the second special symbol, which is a loss or a small hit, is being executed, the second change during the small hit game is also performed. When the updating of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hitting game is ended, the updating of the second variation time timer is restarted.

With the above configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time-saving state), the remaining second holding memory can be consumed, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol (to the right of the game area). A second winning state (small hit RUSH) is provided so as to provide a starting winning opening which is not a variable winning ball apparatus.
In a gaming machine configured to shift to the normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end, the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed as described above may be applied. In this case, as the variation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol increases. However, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed. The occurrence frequency of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state can be suppressed, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent can be further suppressed. Can be.

FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 044IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
The PU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 044 IWS).
2011B). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (
Along with step 044IWS2012B), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stop symbol of the second special symbol (step 044IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designating command has been transmitted in step 044 IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, the second special symbol is forcibly set as the stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. The out-of-design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 044IWS2015B). If the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 1
03 sets a big hit start flag (step 044IWS2016B). Also, C
The PU 103 clears the second big hit flag (Step 044IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 0).
Along with the 44IWS2018B), control is performed to transmit a right-turn-on lighting start command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0444IWS2019B). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 044IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the lighting of the right-hand display 26 is started when a big hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided to the right of the game area, so that it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 044IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether the second small hit flag is set (step 044IWS2020B). If the second small hit flag is set, the effect control C
Control for transmitting the small hit start designation command to the PU 120 is performed (step 044IW).
S2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 04).
4IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 044IWS2023B). If the special map time reduction flag is not set (that is,
If it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 044IWS2024B), and also performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 404). 044IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-small-hit release processing (step 044IWS2026B). Then, Step 044 IWS20
Move to 27B.

By executing the processing of steps 044IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening)
Is provided to the right of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hitting game, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, K
If it is in the T state, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be on. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 044 IWS2023B, the second process is performed during the KT state.
In the case of a small hit in the special symbol change display, the process of starting the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 or transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command in duplicate is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 044IWS2027B).

FIG. 10-24 is a normal accessory control process in the accessory control process (step S120).
FIG. In the accessory control normal processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 044IWS2101).
. If the jackpot start flag has not been set, the process ends.

If the big hit start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit start flag (step 044 IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-open timer (step 044IWS2103), sets round 1 opening pattern data corresponding to the type of big hit (step 044IWS2104), and sets "1" in the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the big hit. Is set (step 044 IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 044IWS2106).

FIG. 10-25 shows a gate passage waiting process (step S12) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 1). In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step 044IWS25).
01). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal is input from the gate switch 21, the CPU 103, if set, resets the probability variable flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 044 IWS2502). Next, the CPU 10
No. 3 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 044IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 044IWS2).
504).

In the characteristic portion 044IW, the gate passing waiting process is executed, so that the jackpot game is not immediately started when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol, but the passing gate 41 is played. On condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21, it is configured to shift to a big hit game.

FIG. 10-26 is a process during the big hit opening process in the accessory control process process (step S123).
FIG. In the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 044 IWS24).
01). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has won the special winning opening has been detected, the CPU 103 determines the number of winning balls for counting the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (step 044 IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the V-region switch 044IW106 is in an on state (step 0444IWS2404). If V-region switch 044IW106 is on, that is, if a game ball that has entered V-region 0444IW104 is detected, CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered V-region 044IW104. (Step 044IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 044 IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the flow shifts to step 044IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening by 1 (step 044IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step 044IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 044 IWS2406)
Or when the release time timer times out (Y in step 044 IWS2408)
First, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, and controls the special winning opening to be closed (step 044IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting a display command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0).
44 IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the round number counter by one (
Step 044 IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-big hit opening processing (step 044IWS2412).

FIG. 10-27 is a big hit end process in the accessory control process process (step S125).
It is a flowchart which shows. In the big hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a big hit end display timer is set (step 044IWS2200). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 shifts to step 044IWS2202. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit end display timer to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time).
Is set (step 044 IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 044IWS2202, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 044IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 0).
44 IWS2203). If not, the process ends.

If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 044 IWS2203), the CPU
103 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 044 IWS2)
204). If the V winning flag has been set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 044IWS2205), sets the probable change flag, and shifts to the probable change state (high probability state) (step 044IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 10R certain-change big hit or the 2R certain-change big hit (step 044IWS2207). It is possible to determine whether or not it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 044IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 044IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is a 10R probability change hit or a 2R probability change hit, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 04).
4IWS2208). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2215. In addition, 10R
If the jackpot is a probable jackpot or a 2R probable jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if the game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / low base state (high probability / 2KT state).

If it is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot (step 044IWS).
2209). It is to be noted that whether or not it is the 6R probability-change big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step 044IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process and step 0444IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If 6R probability change big hit, CPU10
3 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 044 IWS221).
0), the special figure time saving flag is set, and the state shifts to the KT state (step 044 IWS2).
211). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability change big hit, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of the 6R probability change big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (step 044 IWS25 of the gate passage waiting process).
02), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the big hit game based on the 6R probability change big hit, the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Step 044IWSA of the first special symbol normal process and Step 0444I of the second special symbol normal process
If WS69B determines Y, step 044IWS70A and step 044IWS70B
No subtraction processing of the high base number counter is performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variable hit (that is, if it is a 6R normal hit or a 2R normal hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 044IWS2212), and sets the special figure time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 044 IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter.
Is set (step 044 IWS2214). Then, Step 044 IWS22
Move to 15. Therefore, in the case of a 6R ordinary jackpot or a 2R ordinary jackpot, the state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 044IWS2215).

FIG. 10-28 is a small hit end process in the accessory control process process (step S128).
It is a flowchart which shows. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 044IWS2300). If the small hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 shifts to step 044IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time).
Is set (step 044IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 044IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 044IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 0).
44 IWS 2303). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 044 IWS 2303), the CPU
103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 044 IWS)
2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is on (step 04).
4IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is on, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 044IWS2306) and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. The control is performed (step 044 IWS2307).

In this example, if the change display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 starts to be turned on at the start of the small hit game (step 044IWS2).
023B to S2025B), and the processing of steps 044IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the lighting of the right-hand indicator 26 ends at the end of the small hitting game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 044IWS2308).

Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic portion 044IW will be described. Fig. 10-2
FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a manner of transition of the gaming state in the characteristic portion 044IW. First, in the characteristic part 044IW, a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)
In), the player performs a shooting operation (left hit) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning prize mainly occurs in the first start winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, a 10R certain variable big hit, a 6R certain variable big hit, or a 6R normal large hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / The state transitions to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 044IWS2204 to S2).
208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. 6R in low probability / low base state
If a probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends, and The high probability / high base state is maintained until a jackpot occurs (step 0441)
WS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the jackpot game V
If the game ball does not enter the area 044IW104, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. If a 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the fluctuating display of 50 times is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

After shifting to the KT state (high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state, high-probability / low-base state), in this feature portion 044IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. To launch the game ball (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning prize occurs mainly in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the change display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R certain change big hit, a 6R certain change big hit, a 2R certain change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the V region 04 during the big hit game.
If the game ball enters the 4IW 104, the high probability / low base state (after the big hit game is completed)
The state transitions to the high probability / second KT state, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability is obtained after the big hit game ends. / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 044 IWS2204)
To S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the big hit game,
If the game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 6R probability variation big hit is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), and therefore, once high probability / high probability In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, high probability /
When the 2R normal big hit occurs in the high base state (high probability / first KT state), the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit is performed. The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the occurrence or the change display of 50 times is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the V area 04 during the big hit game.
If the game ball enters the 4IW 104, the high probability / low base state (after the big hit game is completed)
The state transitions to the high probability / second KT state, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 044 IWS2204)
To S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the big hit game,
If the game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. When a 2R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuating display of 50 times ends (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, this characteristic part 044I
In W, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 2R normal big hit is 3
Since it is 5% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit has occurred and the low probability / high base state has been established, if the 50-time variable display is completed without the occurrence of the next big hit, FIG. As shown, the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (steps 044IWS69A to S73).
A, S69B-S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability change big hit or a 2R probability change big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the V region 04 during the big hit game.
If the game ball enters the 4IW 104, the high probability / low base state (after the big hit game is completed)
The state transitions to the high probability / second KT state, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit is 15%. % (See FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. Also,
If a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / high The state shifts to the base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 044IWS2204 to S2206).
, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuating display of 50 times ends (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

In FIG. 10-29, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the first
Although the case where the special symbol variable display is executed has been described, there is a possibility that the special special symbol variable display is executed at a low rate. In this case, if a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game,
It will transition to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Also, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, 2R
Normally, when a big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. Will be maintained.

In FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability change jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (
(High probability / second KT state). Also, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability change jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (
(High probability / second KT state). Also, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

In FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability change jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (
(High probability / second KT state). Also, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

Next, the ordinary symbol processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of the ordinary symbol process process. In the ordinary symbol processing, the game control microcomputer 10
0 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 044IWS5111), and issues a gate passing designation command to the production control CPU 120. (Step 044)
IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passage processing (step 044).
IWS5113).

In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the processing of steps 044IWS5111 to S5113 is executed, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the gate passage designation command is transmitted. In the characteristic portion 044IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operation area, but is the gate passing waiting state before the big hit game is started after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed? Regardless of whether the command is passed or not, a gate passage designation command is transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 044 IWS according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag.
One of the processes shown in 5100 to S5104 is executed.

In this characteristic part 044IW, regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 044IWS5111, the gate switch passage processing of step 044IWS5113 is executed. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the normal symbol change display is executed. May not be executed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the passing gate 41 is used as a common gate for the normal starting area and the operating area. Symbol processing (see step S26)
Since the process is executed earlier than the above, the process of detecting the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operation region is performed, and then the process of detecting the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal start region is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 044IWS5113): The CPU 103 stores a gate passage memory counter (a counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the passage gate 41).
It is determined whether or not the count value (the number of stored gate passages) has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one.
In addition, the LED of the general-purpose reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination and storing the value in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gate passages.

Ordinary symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100): The CPU 103 is ready to start changing the ordinary symbol (for example, if the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is set to step 0444IWS5100).
When the value indicates WS5100, specifically, the normal symbol display 20 does not display the variable display of the normal symbol, and the variable based on the fact that the symbol hits the normal symbol display 20 and the symbol is derived and displayed. If it is not during the opening and closing operation of the winning ball device 6B), the value of the number of stored gate passages is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage storage number counter is confirmed.
If the number of stored gate passages is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not a stop symbol of a normal symbol is a hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set in the ordinary symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation process (step 044 IWS5101).

Ordinary symbol variation process (step 044 IWS 5101): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary symbol stopped symbol display time to the ordinary symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the ordinary symbol stop processing (step 044 IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 044 IWS5102): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether or not the stopped symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is set to the ordinary symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100).
(Specifically, “0”). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the ordinary symbol process timer is set to the time before the opening of the ordinary electric accessory, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step 044).
IWS5103) (specifically, “3”).

Normal electric accessory opening pre-process (step 044IWS5103): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out. To start the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “4”) indicating the ordinary electric auditors product activation process (step 044IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory actuation process (step 044IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures a normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the ordinary symbol normal processing (step 044 IWS5100).

FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the number of stored gate passages is 0 by checking the count value of the number of stored gate passage counters (step 044IWS5121). If the number of stored gate passages is 0 (step 044 IWS)
5121, Y), the process ends as it is. If the number of stored gate passages is not 0 (N of step 044IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the random number value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = 1 (step 044IWS512).
2). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage number counter by one and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 044IWS5123). That is, the random number for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for normal symbol determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective numbers of gate pass storage numbers are always the same as the order of the gate pass storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4 They match.

Next, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number (ordinary symbol hit determination random number value) by using a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol, and determines whether or not to hit the normal symbol. Is determined (step 044 IWS5127). Note that this feature 0
In 44IW, in step 044IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly determines whether the state is the probable change state, the KT state, or the high base state.
It is determined that a normal symbol is hit with a probability of / 100.

If the read normal symbol hit determination random number is within the hit range (if it is a hit) in step 044IWS5127, the CPU 103 sets a hit symbol as a display result (step 044IWS5128), and proceeds to step 044IWS5130. If the read normal symbol hit determination random number is not within the hit range (if it is a loss) in step 044IWS5127, the CPU 103 sets a loss symbol as a display result (step 044IWS5129), and proceeds to step 044IWS5130.

In step 044IWS5130, if the high base flag has been set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the ordinary symbol process timer (
Step 044: IWS5130 Y, S5131). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if the normal state or the second KT state, the normal symbol variation time is set to 1.0 seconds in the ordinary symbol process timer (N, N04 in step 044 IWS5130).
S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation process (step 044IWS5101) (step 044IWS5133).

FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol stop processing (step 044 IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by one (step 044IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step 044IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 044 IWS3702), the process is terminated as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (step 0444IWS5127). Is confirmed) (step 044 IWS3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is determined by, for example, setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined as a hit in step 044IWS5127, and confirming whether or not the flag is set. Can be.

When it is determined that the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol is not a hit symbol but a lost symbol (N in step 044IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to the value indicating the ordinary symbol normal process (step 044IWS5100) (step 044IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to “0” (step 044 IWS3708).

In step 044IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 0444IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 044IWS3704). That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 044IWS3706). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory pre-opening time (step 044IWS3705). .

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step 044 IWS5103) (step 0).
44IWS3707)

FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step 044 IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory pre-opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by one (step 044IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step 044IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 044 IWS3802),
The process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before the opening of the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag has been set (step 044IWS3803). , When it is set, that is, in the first KT state, the normal electric accessory opening time is set to 5.
5 seconds is set in the ordinary symbol process timer (step 044 IWS3805). Also,
If the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 044IWS3804).

As described above, in the characteristic portion 044IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which the second prize opening is easier to start and win than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls are less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the method of controlling the second start winning opening so as to facilitate the start winning when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to the method shown by the characteristic portion 044IW. For example, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened more times in the first KT state than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened). The number of times of opening the variable prize ball device 6B may be set to two times in the first KT state while the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is set to one. In this case, in the first KT state, the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened can be increased to make it easier for the second starting winning opening to start.

In addition, for example, in the first KT state, compared to the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B described above and the variable prize ball device 6B May be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step 044).
IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product operation process (step 044 IWS5104) (step 04).
4IWS3807).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIGS. 10-34 to 10-36 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step 044IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CP
U120 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (Step 044IWS)
612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 044 IWS).
613). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 044 IWS614)
The effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the RAM 1
It is stored in the set value storage area formed in the storage 22 (step 044 IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a fluctuation pattern command (step 044 IWS6
16), effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 044IWS617).
). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 044 IWS61).
8).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 044 IWS6)
19), The effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 044IWS620).
).

If the received effect control command is any one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (the first symbol confirmation designation command, the second symbol confirmation designation command, the first forced symbol confirmation designation command, the second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 044IWS621) ), Effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 0).
44 IWS622). For example, when a first symbol confirmation designation command is received, a first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. In addition, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 044 IWS)
623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 044 IWS 624). In addition, effect control CPU1
20 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 044 IWS625)
).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 044 IWS)
626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 044IWS627). In addition, effect control CPU1
20 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 044 IWS628)
).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 044 IWS 624 and S 627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 044 IWS)
629), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 044IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 044 IWS)
631), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 044IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a right-turn lighting start designation command (step 044I)
WS633), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start turning on the right-turn notification LED 37 (step 044IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 044I
WS635), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the lighting of the right strike notification LED 37 (step 044IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a low-probability / non-KT background designation command (step 044)
IWS 637), effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a background image on image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a blue background image) according to the low probability / non-KT state (step 044 IWS 638). If set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 044IWS).
639).

If the received effect control command is a low-precision / first KT background designation command (step 04)
4IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a background image on the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a green background image) according to the low probability / first KT state (for example, a green background image).
Step 044 IWS641). The effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 044IWS642), and if it is set, the high probability state flag indicating the high probability state and the second KT state indicating the second KT state. The 2KT state flag is reset (step 044 IWS643).

If the received effect control command is a high accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 04)
4IWS 644), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a background image on the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a yellow background image) according to the high probability / first KT state (for example, yellow background image).
Step 044 IWS645). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 044IWS646), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 044IWS647).

If the received effect control command is a high accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 04)
4IWS648), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display the background image on the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a red background image) according to the high probability / second KT state (for example, red background image).
Step 044 IWS 649). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 044IWS650), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 044IWS651).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 044IW)
S652), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the small hit continuous prize ball number counter for counting the prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state (S652). Step 044 IWS653). Then, the effect control CPU 120 generates the small hit in the second KT state in the second KT state during the continuous hit based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition. Small win continuous prize ball number display 1 showing the number of prize balls
Is displayed, control is performed to update the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 (step 044).
IWS 654).

In this example, the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is started when a 10R certain-variable big hit or a 2R certain-variable big hit occurs during the normal state or the first KT state. When the big hit occurs (that is, when the second KT state is ended), the display is ended.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than any threshold value (step 044 IWS655). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than one of the threshold values, the effect control C
The PU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 according to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition (step 044IWS656).
For example, if the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball counter after the addition is 1000 or 1005, 1010, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 in the prize at the current big winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “1000OVER” as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 044I)
WS657), effect control CPU 120 increments the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter by 10 (step 044IWS658). Next, based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition, if the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 determines that The control for updating the middle prize ball number display 1 is performed (step 044IWS659).

Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or greater than any threshold value (step 044IWS660). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than one of the threshold values, the effect control C
The PU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition (step 044IWS661).
For example, if the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1,000 in the current prize winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and a small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “1000OVER” as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

In this example, the case where the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is updated or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 is displayed based on winning in the special winning opening or the special winning opening is shown. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even when a winning in the general winning opening 10 occurs during the consecutive small winnings in the second KT state, a value corresponding to the number of awarding balls for winning in the general winning opening 10 is set to the number of consecutive small winning awards. The value may be added to the counter to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 may be displayed.

If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 120
A process for storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command is executed (step 044IWS662). And step 04
The process proceeds to 4IWS611.

FIG. 10-37 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (step 044IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined, for example, by setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). Step 044 IWS811
Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command has been received, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag has been set (step 044I).
WS 812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if the state is not the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 044 IWS813). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. Can be determined by confirming whether If it is not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, to execute the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated. If the variation display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 12
0 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 044IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (ie,
In the case of the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (step 044IWS814). Whether or not to execute the variation display of the second special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. Can be determined by confirming whether Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is,
If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 044IWS816).

By executing the process of steps 044IWS812 to S815, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when the non-KT state is set, the display of the decoration symbol on the image display device 5 is changed corresponding to the display of the first special symbol. When the display is in the KT state, the decorative display is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state,
Even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed in the non-KT state.

FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 044IWS920). Note that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area designating the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a small hit (step 044IWS921). Note that whether or not the current fluctuation display is a small hit is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. Can be determined. If it is a small hit change, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach out-of-reach symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 044IWS922).

As described above, in the present example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, only the small hit A can be obtained. Can hardly be expected to win. Therefore, in the present example, when the process of Steps 044IWS920 to S922 is executed and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs,
By forcibly stopping and displaying the non-reach out-of-reach symbol, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations.

In the case of performing the variation display of the second special symbol (N in step 044IWS920) or in the case of not a small hit variation (N in step 044IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. Is determined (step 044 IWS923).
. At step 044 IWS 923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of position), only the out-of-left design or the right-and-left decoration design in which the left-middle-right decorative design does not completely match is displayed. The combination of the matched reach-losing symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are arranged at the symbol “7” among the odd symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R probability big hit), a combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left middle right are arranged in odd numbers other than “7” is determined. When the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability change is a big hit), a combination of the symbols including the special symbol (in this example, symbol “R”) is determined. . When a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are arranged in even-numbered symbols. To determine. When the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of decorative symbols of a small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of order (step 044IWS924). It should be noted that whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of order is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by If it is not a deviation change, the process directly proceeds to step 044IWS928. If it is a deviation change (Y in step 044IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the setting value suggestion effect indicating the currently set value. (Step 044 IWS925).

In step 044 IWS 925, effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 044 IWS 615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggesting effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the setting value suggesting effect, and Determine the presence and type of value suggestion effect.

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-39, the setting value suggestion effect determination table has no setting value suggestion effect,
The determination values are assigned to the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value suggestion effect B, the setting value suggestion effect C, the setting value suggestion effect D, the setting value suggestion effect E, and the setting value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The setting value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. The setting value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. 10-39, the setting value “2” Is the highest execution ratio.
The setting value suggestion effect C is an effect that is executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. 10-39, the setting value “3”. Is the highest execution ratio. The setting value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. The setting value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. The set value suggestion effect F is, for example,
This is an effect performed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-39, the execution ratio is the highest when the set value is “6”. .

Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag has been set (step 044 IWS 926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the flow directly proceeds to step 044IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 044 IWS926),
That is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second KT state (small hit R
A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect indicating that the USH is to be continued is executed (step 044IWS92).
7).

FIG. 10-40 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-40, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table includes no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and a small hit R.
A determination value is assigned to each of the USH continuation suggestion effects B. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-40, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is “2”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is performed. Is the next highest, and when the set value is “3”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the set value is “4”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion execution ratio is Is the next highest, and when the set value is “5”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is further next highest, and when the set value is “6”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It is lower.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 40, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest, and when the set value is “6”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is performed.
Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot probability is the lowest, and when the set value is “6”, the jackpot probability is the highest. Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value “1” is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the degree of continuous expectation is high), and the setting value “6”. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of expected continuation is low).
Therefore, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is “6”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Since the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, the second
Expectation that the KT state (small hit RUSH) continues can be increased.

As described above, the continuation expectation degree of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is an expectation degree that a control period to the second KT state becomes longer without occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues can be further increased.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, and the execution of the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. Has set value suggestion effects and small hit RUSH
A process table corresponding to the continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 044IWS928).

Next, effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of process data 1 in the process table selected in step 044IWS928 as the process timer and starts the process timer (step 044IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speaker 8L) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1).
, 8R) (step 044IWS930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Also, the speaker 8L,
A control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 to output the audio from the 8R.

When the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined, the decoration is performed by executing the step 044 IWS 930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) in accordance with the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 044 IWS 928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the loss fluctuation).

If it is determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step 044 IWS.
By executing the step 044 IWS 930 and the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in accordance with the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in 928, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable display (during the second KT state, during a change in the loss). ), A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decoration symbol variation time timer and starts the decoration symbol variation time timer (step 044IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 044IWS932).

FIG. 10-41 shows the effect processing during variable display in the effect control process (step S17).
It is a flowchart which shows 2). In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 12
In the case of 0, first, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1 (step 044 IWS8101).
), The value of the decorative symbol variation time timer is decremented by 1 (step 044IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 044 IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 044 IWS8104). Further, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data which are set next (step 044IWS8105).

Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag has been set (step 044IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, (1) Whether the confirmation command reception flag is set or not is confirmed (step 044 IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control C
The PU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S173) (step 044IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 044 IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 044IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a lost symbol (step 044IWS8109). And effect control CPU120,
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the waiting process per special figure (step S173) (step 044IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 044 IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, 2) is confirmed (step 044 IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 044IWS8114).
).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 044 IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 044IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a lost symbol (step 044IWS8113). And effect control CPU120,
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the wait process per special figure (step S173) (step 044IWS8114).

If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 044IWS8108, or if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 044IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 sets the decoration symbol variation time timer. It is determined whether or not has timed out (step 044 IWS8115). If the decoration symbol variation time timer has timed out, effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 044IWS8116). Then, effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 044IWS8117).

In this example, as described above, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, and a certain variation big hit, is being executed. During the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and when the change display of the second special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, and a probability change big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game, Then, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decoration symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 044 IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command means that
Thus, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in the present example, the processing is switched to the standby effect by executing the processing of steps 044IWS8116 and S8117, and thereafter, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally, the special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol ends. The “stand-by effect” is, for example, an effect in which the decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right of the image display device 5 swings or slightly fluctuates to temporarily stop.

For example, when the image display device 5 also executes a variable display of a system small symbol, a fourth symbol, or the like, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special time timer is interrupted. When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously performed, the variable display of the system small symbol and the fourth symbol is also continuously performed. When the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

FIG. 10-42 and FIG. 10-43 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit wait processing (step S173) in the effect control process processing. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 044IWS).
9701). If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 044 IWS970.
Move to 6. In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 044IWS9705.
Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the big hit effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed, but the big hit effect has not been executed yet, so that the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 044 IWS9703 is performed. Without executing, the flow shifts to step 044IWS9706.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 044 IWS9702). Stop symbol display flag 2
If is set, the flow shifts to step 044 IWS9716. This feature 044I
In the case of W, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, step 044IW
In S9715, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit effect is executed. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, it means that the small hit symbol is definitely displayed, but the small hit effect has not yet been executed, so that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 044IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 044 IWS9716 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to stop the left-middle-right decorative symbol that is being stopped and displayed (losing symbol, big hit symbol). , A small hit symbol) is determined (step 044 IWS9703). In the case where the first forced symbol confirmation designation command and the second forced symbol confirmation designation command are received and the process of replacing with a shifted symbol is performed in steps 044IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CP is executed in step 044IWS9703.
U120 performs control to confirm and display the missing symbol.

When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (Y in step 044IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 044IWS9705).

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 044IWS9706). If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 044).
IWS 9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the type of the big hit that has occurred this time is the 10R certain-variable big hit or the 2R certain-big hit (step 044IWS9708).
It should be noted that whether the jackpot type is the 10R probability variable hit or the 2R probability variable hit is determined by, for example, confirming whether the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command or the display result 5 designation command. it can. If it is a 10R probability change jackpot or a 2R probability change hit, the process directly proceeds to step 044 IWS9710.

If neither the 10R-probable jackpot nor the 2R-probable jackpot, the second KT state is ended after the current big hit game ends if the second KT state is in progress. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits occurring in the second KT state and the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter to 0.
It is cleared (step 044 IWS 9709).

Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 044IWS9710). Next, effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 044 IWS 9711), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) According to the data 1), a rendering device (image display device 5 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and speakers 8L and 8R as rendering components)
) Is executed (step 044 IWS9712).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the big hit effect process (step S176) (step 044IWS9713).

If the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (N in step 044IWS9704), if the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (Y in step 044IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 044 IWS9715).

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command has been received (step 044IWS9716). If the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 044).
IWS 9717).

Next, effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step 044IWS9718). Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state on the image display device 5 based on the value of the updated small hit continuous number counter. Then, control is performed to update the small hit continuous number display 1 (step 044IWS9719).

In this example, the small hit continuous number display 1 is started when a 10R certain variable big hit or a 2R certain variable big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and a big hit other than the 10R certain variable big hit or the 2R certain variable big hit is displayed. The display is terminated when the occurrence has occurred (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the small hit consecutive number counter after the addition is any of the threshold values (step 044 IWS9720). If the value of the small hit continuous number counter after the addition is any of the thresholds, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to execute the small hit continuous number corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous number counter on the image display device 5. Control for displaying the display 2 is performed (step 044 IWS9721). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous number counter after the addition is 10, it means that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 in the current small hit occurrence, and the threshold “10” is reached. It is determined that the number of small hits has been reached, and the small hit continuous number display 2 indicating that the number of small hits has reached 10 times is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "10COMBO" is displayed as the small hit continuous number display 2.

Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit effect (step 044IWS9722). Next, effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 044 IWS 9723), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) According to the data 1), a rendering device (image display device 5 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and speakers 8L and 8R as rendering components)
) Is executed (step 044 IWS9724).

Then, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the small hit effect effect processing (step S174) (step 044IWS9725).

If a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (that is, if a lost symbol is displayed) (N of step 044IWS9704 and N of step 044IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 044IWS9726).

Next, a description will be given of an effect mode of the effect executed in the present feature unit 044IW. First, the effect of the setting value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-44 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of a set value suggestion effect. In the present example, a setting value suggestion effect can be executed in a variable display of a decorative symbol that is a loss. As shown in FIG. 10-44 (A), the image display device 5
When the display timing of the set value suggestion effect is reached while the variable display of the middle left and right decoration symbols is being executed, as shown in FIGS. 10-44 (B1) to (B3), the variation of the decoration symbols is displayed. A set value suggestion effect is executed.

In the present example, as shown in FIGS. 10-44 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which predetermined image images 044IW001, 044IW002, and 044IW003 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B1), the setting is performed by displaying the predetermined character image 044IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5. A value suggestion effect is performed. For example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B2), the predetermined character image 044IW00 is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5.
A setting value suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which 2 is displayed. Also, for example, a set value suggestion effect E
Is performed, a setting value suggestion effect is executed in a manner in which the predetermined character image 044IW003 is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B3).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-44, the case where the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value suggestion effect C, and the setting value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, for example, when the setting value suggestion effect B is executed. Indicates a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color when a set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when a set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern to be lost and the setting value suggestion effect is executed. Can be expected.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production will be described. FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, the second K
The small hit RU in the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern that is lost during the T state (during the small hit RUSH)
The H continuation suggestion effect can be executed.

In this example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), for example, a character display 044IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed so that it can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), when the variation display of the left-middle-right decoration symbol is performed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is performed. Then, FIG. 10-4
As shown in FIGS. 5 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-45 (B1) and (B2), the small hitting RUSH is performed in such a manner that predetermined effect images 0444IW005 and 044IW006 are displayed on the image display device 5.
A continuation suggestion effect is executed. In this example, the predetermined effect image 444IW005,044
As IW006, a case where an image of a racing car is displayed is shown. in this case,
For example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B1), the small effect is displayed by displaying the predetermined effect image 044IW005 in a blue display color on the image display device 5. A RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Also, for example, a small hit RU
When the SH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is performed by displaying the predetermined effect image 044IW005 in a red display color on the image display device 5. Is executed.

In the present example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is performed by performing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variation display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or an effect image of any display color is displayed. Depending on whether the effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues.

Next, the display mode of the right strike notification will be described. FIG. 10-46 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display mode of right-handed notification. In the present example, regardless of whether the first special symbol has a big hit in the variable display or the second special symbol has been changed and the variable display has been executed, a big hit is played. As shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 044IWS2018A and S2018B). Also, based on the reception of the right-turn-on lighting designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the right-turn notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS).
2019A, S2019B, and S634). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the right control display 04 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is performed by the effect control CPU 120.
4IW007 is displayed (see step 044IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variation display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the CPU 103 (step 044 IWS2).
024B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-turn lighting start command, FIG.
0-46 (2), the right control LED 3
7 is turned on (see steps 044IWS2025B and S634). However, unlike during the big hit game, the right-handed display 044IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (2).

On the other hand, in the present example, if a small hit has been made in the variable display of the first special symbol, FIG.
As shown in 3), during the small hitting game, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on and the right-handed notification LED is provided.
37 is not turned on, and right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is performed.
Is not displayed.

Next, a description will be given of the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed. FIG. 10-47 is an explanatory diagram for describing the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is changed to a certain variable big hit (in this example, 10R).
In the case of a jackpot change that results in a probability change jackpot or a 6R probability change jackpot, FIG.
As shown in A), the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step 044 IWS1128A Y).

On the other hand, if the change display of the first special symbol is a big hit change that is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-47 (B). When this is done, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (step 0).
N of 44IWS1128A, see step 044IWS1129A).

In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (C), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step N44 IWS1127A N).

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is changed to a certain variable big hit (in this example, 10R).
In the case of a jackpot change which is a probability change jackpot, a 6R probability change jackpot, or a 2R probability change hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (D), the fluctuation of the second special symbol even when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The display continues. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1).
120B, see step Y44 IWS1128B Y).

On the other hand, if the change display of the second special symbol is a big hit change that is a normal big hit (2R normal big hit in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. When this is done, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (step 0).
N of 44IWS1128B, see step 044IWS1129B).

In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (F), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, Step N44IWS1127B N).

The control method in a case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a modified example of the control method in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being performed.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-48 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (Step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 10-48, steps 044IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1127A is the same as those shown in FIGS. 10-19, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 044IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist.

In the first modification, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
103 shifts to the process of step S1129A as it is, and performs control to transmit the first forced symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A).
. In FIG. 10-48, the process of step 044IWS1130A is the same as that of FIG.
This is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-49 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the first modification. In FIG. 10-49, the processes of steps 044IWS1120B to S1127B are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 10-22. However, in the first modification, the determination process of step 044IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. .

In the first modification, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
103 shifts to the processing of step S1129B as it is, and performs control to transmit the second forced symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129B).
. Note that in FIG. 10-49, the process of step 044 IWS1130B is the same as that of FIG.
This is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the one special symbol in the first modification.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the first special symbol a big hit variation that becomes a probable variable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the change display of the first special symbol is forcibly changed to a lost symbol. Stop display is performed (N of step 044IWS1127A, step 044IWS112
9A).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the change display of the second special symbol during the change display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step N44 IWS1127A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the second special symbol a big hit variation that results in a probable variable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the change display of the second special symbol is also forcibly changed to a lost symbol. Stop display is performed (N of step 044IWS1127B, step 044IWS112
9B).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (D), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, Step N44IWS1127B N).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-51 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. In FIG. 10-51, steps 044IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1126A is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 10-19, but in the second modification, the processing of step 044IWS1127C is included in place of the determination processing of steps 044IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19. .

In the second modification, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-51, the process of step 044IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-52 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the second modification. In FIG. 10-52, the processing of steps 044IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in Modification 2, the determination processing of steps 044IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. Alternatively, step 044I
WS1127D processing is included.

In the second modification, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-52, the process of step 044IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram for describing the control of the variable display when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the one special symbol in the second modification.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the first special symbol a big hit variation that becomes a probable variable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (A), the change display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In particular,
During the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step 044 IWS1
127C, Y).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol (see N of Step 044IWS1127C, Step 044IWS1129A).
.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the second special symbol a big hit variation that results in a probable variable big hit? Irrespective of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (C), the change display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In particular,
During the small hitting game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, Step 044 IWS1
127D, Y).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (D), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol (see N of Step 044IWS1127D and Step 044IWS1129B).
.

In addition, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of the one special symbol is being executed, for example, in addition to the method shown in the first and second modifications, for example, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the forcible release is stopped, while the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be configured to be continued.

Also, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes the 10R probability variable hit, the forcible stop is stopped, while the 2R probability variation hit becomes the second special symbol. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is lost, It may be configured to stop the forcible disconnection regardless of the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation. With such a configuration, in this example, if the fluctuating display is completed 50 times in the low probability / high base state, the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (see FIG. 10-29).
When the change display of 0 times is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability / low base state, the second hold storage is set to 1 to 4
When there is a second pool of stored pieces that have a big hit in them, by forcibly stopping the miss, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. Particularly, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, the normal state (low probability /
By performing a right-handing operation in the low base state), the second start winning opening which is easy to start winning is made a winning start, and the first special winning opening is made a winning display while the second special symbol is changed and displayed. (1) A capture method in which a special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner is also possible, but is effective as a measure for preventing such a capture method.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being performed.

(Modification 3)
In the characteristic portion 044IW, a control for forcibly stopping and displaying a missing symbol is performed by the same control in a case where the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and a case where the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Although the case (see FIG. 10-47) has been described, different control may be performed. Fig. 10-
54 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the third modification. In the third modification, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-54, the process of steps 044IWS1120B to S1125B is the same as that of FIG.
−22, but the modification 3 does not include the determination processing of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22. Therefore, Modification 3
Then, if the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 0).
N of 44IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the processing as it is.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the one special symbol in the third modification.

As shown in FIGS. 10-55 (A) and (C), in the third modification, during the variation display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, a small hit, and a large variation, the small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-47 (A) and (C). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (D) and (F), during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss, a small hit, and a large variation, the small hit symbol stops in the variation display of the first special symbol. If displayed, FIG. 10-47 (D), (F)
Similarly to the above, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B), in the third modification, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which usually becomes a big hit. As in FIG. 10-47 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (E), in the third modification, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In FIG. 10C, unlike FIG. 10-47 (E), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-55, in the third modification, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly performed with the missing symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. The control for stop display is different.

In the third modification, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the forcible stop is performed while the normal large hit is stopped. In the case where the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display is continued, but only in such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which usually becomes a large hit, the variation display is continued, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured so as to forcibly stop. For example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a big hit (regardless of whether the jackpot is a large jackpot or a normal jackpot), the forced off is performed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol change display during the execution of the change display of the second special symbol which becomes a big hit (regardless of whether the jackpot is a big hit or a normal big hit) The display may be configured to be continued. In such a manner, the control for forcibly stopping the stop may be different between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-56 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (Step S112A) in the fourth modification. In FIG. 10-56, steps 044IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1128A is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 10-19.

In the modified example 4, when the variation display of the first special symbol which is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 044IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag to “0”. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 044IWS1131A). If the probable change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probable change state), the process ends. If the probable change flag is set (that is, if the probable change state is set), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). Note that the processing of step 044 IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the modified example 4, by executing the determination process of step 044 IWS 1131A, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which usually becomes a big hit, The variation display of the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol when the certain variation state is being performed. On the other hand, even if the variable display of the first special symbol, which usually becomes a big hit, is not in the probable change state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-57 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the fourth modification. In FIG. 10-57, the processing of steps 044IWS1120B to S1128B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the modified example 4, in step 044 IWS1128B, the first jackpot is not any of the 10R jackpot, the 6R jackpot, and the 2R jackpot (ie, the 2R regular jackpot).
If the special symbol change display is being executed, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the probable change flag is set (step 044IWS1131B). If the probable change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probable change state), the process ends. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 sets the effect control C
Control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the PU 120 is performed (step 044IW).
S1129B). Note that the process of step 044 IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the fourth modification, the determination process of step 044IWS1131B is executed, and when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which usually becomes a big hit, The variation display of the second special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol when the certain variation state is being performed. On the other hand, even during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that normally becomes a big hit, if the small change symbol is not in the probable change state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

In the fourth modification, whether or not the probable change flag is set (whether or not the probable change state is set)
However, the present invention is not limited to such a case in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display in a missing symbol. For example, it may be configured to perform control for forcibly stopping and displaying a missing symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Also, for example, a high probability /
Only when the low base state is set (the high probability flag is on and the high base flag is off), the control for forcibly stopping the display with the off symbol may be performed. So in some form,
Any configuration may be used as long as it is configured to perform control for forcibly displaying a stop symbol at a missing symbol according to the current game state.

In addition, as described above, when the control is performed such that the stop display is forcibly performed in the off symbol only in the high probability / low base state, the change display of one of the identification information prevents a normal big hit, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous to the player. When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of (1), it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and it is preferable that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The advantage for the player is higher than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to be in a probable change state after the end of the big hit game). In addition, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not displayed). (2) The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed. Further, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a lost symbol). Will be forcibly stopped). Therefore, control in consideration of the advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

Specifically, in the case where a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information despite the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the positive change state, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probable change state ends immediately, and there is a possibility that interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, if the variable design corresponding to the remaining hold of the one piece of identification information is forcibly uniformly displayed and stopped (forced disconnection) uniformly, even if the variable display is a variable change that will result in a certain big change, it is determined to be a compulsory disconnection. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) decreases, which is not preferable. Therefore, in the present characteristic part 044IW, while the variable display which becomes a normal big hit (non-probable variable hit) is forcibly removed, the variable display which becomes a positive variable big hit is changed by extending the change (interrupting the measurement of the change time). In this way, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing a decrease in the game value given to the player.

In this example, as an aspect of “do not stop the variable display of one identification information”, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example,
The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been interrupted after the small hit game, may be resumed. Good. It is only necessary that the variable display is not completely stopped in such a form.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) in a special state is easily provided. Therefore, by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the state is different from the advantageous state, and the non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than to a low probability state. Further, based on the fact that the first specific display result has been derived and displayed, control is performed in a specific state (for example, control is performed after a big hit game based on a probable variable hit is completed), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, the state is controlled to the non-specific state (for example, the state is not controlled to the stable state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). Therefore, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the state is different from the advantageous state, and the non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than to a low probability state. In addition, when controlled in an advantageous state, the specific area (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state based on a game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through the V region 044IW104). Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See FIGS. 10-11). Therefore, control can be realized in consideration of whether the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Also, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, a special display result can be derived and displayed in any of the case where the variable display of the first identification information is performed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is performed ( 10-3 and 10-4). In addition, during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the first display is derived and displayed based on the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-55 (B)). In the case where the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, Of the variable display of the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIG. 10-55 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the state is different from the advantageous state, and the non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than to a low probability state. Also, the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the specific state, and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During the execution of the above, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result based on the derived special display result in the variable display of the other identification information (FIGS. 10-56 and 10-56). 57). Further, when being controlled to the non-specific state, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57). ). Therefore, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

Also, according to the present characteristic portion 044IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is entered based on the entry of the game medium (for example, the game ball) into the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening). ) Can be executed, and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is executed based on the game medium entering the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can change between a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter. Ball device 17). Further, after any one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variably displayed, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player.
And a special state having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a small hitting game state). When the state is controlled to the special state, the variable means is controlled to the first state. Also,
The first start area is provided so that a game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, a left area of the game area) among the movement paths on which the game medium can move, is provided, and the variable means is configured to select a specific path from the movement paths. (For example, a game medium moving in a right area of the game area) is provided so as to be able to enter. Also, a specific notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to a specific route (for example, FIG. 10-46 (1)
) And (2) can be executed, and when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the specific notification is not executed (for example, FIG. 10-46 ( 3
)reference). Therefore, it is possible to provide appropriate notification about the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the feature section 044IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be changed. Is configured such that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than that of the small hit type on the second special symbol side, and the second special symbol is displayed when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. In the case where the variation display of the symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, if the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol having a low winning ratio (advantage), substantially, Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player will uselessly hit the game ball, and rather, will give an unfavorable firing promotion notification, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, while the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, the right hit notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantage due to the player's useless hit, and to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, the first holding storage means (for example, the first holding storage buffer) capable of storing the information relating to the variable display of the first identification information as the holding storage, and the variable display of the second identification information. And second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information on the hold as a hold storage. The display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second
When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the identification information, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) and the variable display of the first identification information is displayed. As a result or a variable display of the second identification information, a special display result (
For example, when a small hit symbol is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result at a high frequency. In addition, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, based on the special display result being derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the hold storage can be smoothly consumed.

According to the characteristic portion 044IW, a predetermined value can be given when controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening), and When controlled to be in an advantageous state, a value higher than a predetermined value can be given (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-46 (1) and (2)) and a visual recognition more than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute highly specific second specific notification (for example, right-handed display 044IW007 shown in FIG. 10-46 (1)). When controlled to be in the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (
If the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 10-46 (1)). (2)
reference). Therefore, the notification corresponding to the value that can be given can be realized.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, when the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed, it is more advantageous than when the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). When the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-46 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the advantage of the player.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. Further, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode between when the special state is controlled and when the special state is not controlled (
For example, when the change display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a restriction piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means on the specific route.
Is provided. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a target from being hit at the timing when the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is performed in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the measures for capturing the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a configuration is provided in which a passage member is provided on the upstream side of the variable prize ball device 6B or the special variable prize ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area as a delay means for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right. May be.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and an effect based on information from the game control means. Effect control means for controlling (for example, effect control CPU 120
). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) for performing the predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load on the effect control unit.

In the present example, the right strike notification is executed during the big hit game regardless of whether the first special symbol change display is executed or the second special symbol change display is executed. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device (right large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning prize ball device (right large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the gaming area. If the big change is displayed on the symbol display, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. If the big special change is displayed on the big display, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as described above, if a large hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case of a big hit, a right hit notification may not be executed during the big hit game. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, if a large hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left strike notification may be executed during the big hit game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right large winning opening) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, in the event that a large hit has occurred in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hit notification is executed during the big hit game, thereby suppressing the player from erroneously performing the right hit operation. And the disadvantage of the player can be suppressed.

Further, in the present example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (the second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where the right strike notification is executed even during the KT state has been described. The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to a gaming machine provided to the left of the gaming area, a right strike notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, and the time saving state. Is also good.

Further, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during a small hit RUSH), in order to execute the first fluctuation display after the big hit game is completed, in addition to the lighting of the right-hand indicator 26 and the right-hand notification LED 37, The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the big hit game, the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LE
Right-handed display 044IW0 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to lighting of D37.
07 may be displayed to execute right-handed notification.

In this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the right-handed display 044IW007 of a relatively large size as shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), a display of a sign indicating right-handedness (for example, a rightward triangle display) is displayed on the image display device 5. , The right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, the small hit control method is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning prize ball devices are provided, and a special variable winning prize ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is different depending on the type of the small hit, and the small special winning symbol is displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol. The selection rate of the small hit type may be different between the case where the small hit type is selected and the case where the small hit is displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select a small hit type (or a small hit type in an open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls (or the small hit type in an open mode having a high winning rate) is easily selected. May be configured.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right strike notification is performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-46 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit has occurred, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-46 (3)), but a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, in the case where a small hit occurs due to the change display of the second special symbol being performed in a situation where the left hitting operation is to be performed in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hitting game. May be.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. It is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, control can be performed to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. Also, by using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for a big hit determination, a determination value for a small hit determination),
Determine the display result of the variable display. Further, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state.
The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and a special display result as a display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. In addition, a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting value “1”
"To" 6 "). In addition, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common between the case of being controlled to the non-specific state and the case of being controlled to the specific state (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10). -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability or the classification distribution other than the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling property may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value from becoming excessively large. And prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display state of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state, appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, as the special state, the first special state (for example, the first K
(T state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

In addition, according to the feature portion 044IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-45) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

Also, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, the small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute a setting value suggestion effect indicating the setting value (for example, the setting value suggestion effect illustrated in FIGS. 10-44). Therefore, by executing the set value suggestion effect, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the setting value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the range is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or a setting value suggestion effect may be executed during a big hit game or a small hit game, and various modes may be considered.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. The number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

Specifically, in the characteristic part 044IW, the number of special type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the small hit type is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessive. This prevents the gambling from becoming too large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the assignment of the small hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown, The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the determination rate of the small hit type may be made different depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, a 6R normal variable hit, a 2R probability variable hit, and a 2R normal variable hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the big hit type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Further, the number of the advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

Specifically, in the present characteristic part 044IW, the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value by setting the number of advantageous type determination values to be common regardless of the set value (commonly assigning the jackpot type). And prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the assignment of the big hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown, It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be made different depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

More specifically, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value becomes excessive. This prevents the gambling from becoming too large and prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control changes, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in elements other than the big hit lottery. Although the degree (difference in ball performance) greatly differs, which is not preferable, the characteristic portion 044IW uses a common selection ratio of the variation pattern regardless of the set value.
We are trying to avoid such problems.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, a case is shown in which the assignment of the variation pattern is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, by changing the determination ratio of the variation pattern depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency is varied depending on the set value. The configuration may be such that the degree of advantage differs depending on the value.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. It is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, control can be performed to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. Also, by using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for a big hit determination, a determination value for a small hit determination),
Determine the display result of the variable display. The determination value includes a specific determination value for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for a big hit determination).
And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining that a special display result is to be derived and displayed as a variable display display result, and a specific display result and a special display result as variable display results And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for out-of-position determination) for determining that a predetermined display result is different from the predetermined display result. In addition, a plurality of setting values (the
For example, it can be set to any one of the set values “1” to “6”). The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination values are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs according to the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable state) and a specific state (for example, a probable state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state.
Further, the predetermined determination values are included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (FIG. 10C).
And FIG. 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol). This can be performed in parallel with the variable display.) Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

In addition, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result. In addition, when a variable display in which a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) is derived and displayed is executed while being controlled to the special state, a setting value suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-44). Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the set value suggestion effect, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Also, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state is displayed.
Can be controlled. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and a special display result as a display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Also, a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting value “1”)
To “6”). The number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate monotonousness of the game while realizing appropriate game characteristics.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forcible stoppage), the display result of the variable display is advantageous. Control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, this feature part 04
In order to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing control considering the degree of advantage of the variable display result, the 4IW also has the following characteristic features of the gaming machine shown in (means A1) to (means A6). It has been disclosed.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, CPU
103) and a special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result. Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which can be controlled to the state (state).
部分 S128), and the variable display execution unit performs special display in the variable display of the other identification information while performing the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. On the basis of the derived display of the display result, the first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, The second control (for example, the out-of-position) in which the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed) and the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, the out-of-position symbol) And stopping the display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missing symbol). Which of the first control and the second control is executed differs depending on the display result displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines the result of the determination in steps 044IWS1128A and S1128B). Steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed, for example, in Modification Example 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps 044IWS1127A, S1130A, and S1129B based on the determination results of Steps 044IWS1127A and S1127B. , S1130B, for example, in Modification Example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Step 044 IWS1130. , Step by the determination result of S1130D 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, executes S1130B.) It is characterized. According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In the means A1, special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, step 044 in the CPU 103)
(A part that executes the IWS 2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or A2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (
For example, there is a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). Specific state control means (for example, microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling to a specific state that is easily controlled (for example, a high probability state (probable change state))
In which step 044 IWS2206 is executed), and the specific state control means includes:
When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the specific state (for example, after the big hit game based on the probability changing big hit is completed), the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured so as to be controlled to a non-specified state based on the above (for example, the state is not controlled to a certain change state after a big hit game based on a normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed in a specific state.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to A3, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probability variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), which is different from the advantageous state and compared with the non-specific state (for example, low probability state). State control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically,
The CPU 103) includes a portion for executing step 044IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls the specific region (for example, the V region 044IW1) when controlled to the advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)).
Executes steps 044 IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
In the case where the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific region at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. In the big hit game, the opening period of the V-region open / close plate 044IW101 is extremely short.) According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probable change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The variable display execution means performs the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. In any case of performing the display, the special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS64A and S64B. -3, refer to FIG. 10-4.), The variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. Based on the derived display of the result, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) When N is determined in the step I441WS1128A, steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A are executed.
)reference. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is performed, the second identification information is displayed. (For example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B. 10-54, FIG. 10-5
See 5 (E). ). According to such a configuration, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means A6) In any one of the means A1 to A5, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probable change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The advantage for the player is higher than the above (for example, the state is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game), the state is different from the advantageous state, and compared with the non-specific state (for example, the low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, C
PU104), the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the specific state is controlled. During execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, the CPU 103) determines in step 044I
When Y is determined in WS1131A, S1131B, step 044 IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ), While being controlled to the non-specific state, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed. Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103) returns N in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B.
In this case, the process does not shift to steps 044IWS1129A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forcible stoppage), the display result of the variable display is advantageous. Control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, this feature part 04
In order to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the variable display result, the 4IW also has the following characteristic features of the gaming machine shown in (Means B1) to (Means B6). It has been disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing variable display of symbols (design) in parallel, and display of variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, CPU
103) and a special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result. Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which can be controlled to the state (state).
可 変 S128), and the variable display execution unit performs the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is performed or the variable display of the second identification information is performed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Steps 044IWS64A and S64B. FIG.
See FIG. 10-4. ), Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed. First control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example,
The update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed.) Second control derived and displayed based on the result (for example, a missing symbol) (for example, displaying and stopping the missing symbol (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the missing symbol). The first control and the second control are different depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, the CPU 103) proceeds to step 044
According to the determination results of IWS1128A and S1128B, step 044 IWS1129A,
Steps S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)
According to the determination results of IWS1127A and S1127B, step 044
Steps S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes step 044.
According to the determination results of IWS1130C and S1130D, step 044 IWS1129A,
Steps S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. ). According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In the means B1, a special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, step 044 in the CPU 103)
(A part that executes the IWS 2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (
For example, there is a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). Specific state control means (for example, microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling to a specific state that is easily controlled (for example, a high probability state (probable change state))
In which step 044 IWS2206 is executed), and the specific state control means includes:
When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the specific state (for example, after the big hit game based on the probability changing big hit is completed), the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured so as to be controlled to a non-specified state based on the above (for example, the state is not controlled to a certain change state after a big hit game based on a normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed in a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of the means B1 to B3, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probability variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), which is different from the advantageous state and compared with the non-specific state (for example, low probability state). State control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically,
The CPU 103) includes a portion for executing step 044IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls the specific region (for example, the V region 044IW1) when controlled to the advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)).
Executes steps 044 IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
In the case where the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific region at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. In the big hit game, the opening period of the V-region open / close plate 044IW101 is extremely short.) According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to B4, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probable change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display execution means is a variable display of the first identification information and corresponds to the second specific display result. During the execution of the variable display, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in Modification 3, Game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)
Is N in step 044IWS1128A, when step N441WS1129A, S1
Execute 130A. See FIG. 10-55 (B). If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is performed, the second identification information is displayed. The control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (
Specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-54 and 10-55 (E). ).
According to such a configuration, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means B6) In any one of the means B1 to B5, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probable change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The advantage for the player is higher than the above (for example, the state is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game), the state is different from the advantageous state, and compared with the non-specific state (for example, the low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, C
PU104), the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the specific state is controlled. During execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, the CPU 103) determines in step 044I
When Y is determined in WS1131A, S1131B, step 044 IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ), While being controlled to the non-specific state, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed. Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103) returns N in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B.
In this case, the process does not shift to steps 044IWS1129A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forcible stoppage), the display result of the variable display is advantageous. Control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, this feature part 04
For the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control considering the degree of advantage of the variable display result, the 4IW also has the following characteristic features of the gaming machine shown in (Means C1) to (Means C6). It has been disclosed.

(Means C1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, CPU
103) and a special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result. Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which can be controlled to the state (state).
To S128), and the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example,
There is a probability change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed for the player rather than the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Is high (for example, it is controlled to be in a probable change state after the end of the big hit game), and the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and During execution of the variable display corresponding to the specific display result, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 10
3) is a step 044IW when Y in steps 044IWS1128A and S1128B.
By not shifting to S1129A and S1129B, the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed.) Deriving and displaying a special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result while the variable display of one of the information and the second identification information is being performed. Based on this, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps 044IWS1128A and S112).
When 8B is N, steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, S11
By executing 30B, a lost symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the lost symbol). According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means C2) In the means C1, special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, step 044 in the CPU 103)
(A part that executes the IWS 2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or the means C2, a specific state (for example, a state different from the advantageous state, which is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state))
Step 044 IWS220 in specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) controllable to a high probability state (probable change state).
6), the specific state control means controls to a specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed (for example, to control to a certain state after a big hit game based on a certain big hit). Yes), and may be configured to control to a non-specific state based on the second specific display result being derived and displayed (for example, not to control to a positive change state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed in a specific state.

(Means C4) In any one of the means C1 to C3, the state is different from the advantageous state, and is a specific state (e.g., a state that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., a low probability state)). , A specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which can be controlled to a high probability state (probable change state) (step 04).
4IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls the specific area (for example, the V area 044IW104) to be a game medium (for example, a game ball) when being controlled to the advantageous state.
Can be controlled to a specific state based on the fact that the game has passed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)
S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), a higher ratio when the first specific display result is displayed in the advantageous state than when the second specific display result is displayed in the derived state (See FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. As shown in the figure, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, V
The open period of the area opening / closing plate 044IW101 is extremely short. ).
According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means C5) In any one of the means C1 to C4, the variable display execution means may execute either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. Also, the special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS64A and S64B; see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). During the execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information based on the first identification information. Is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C
The PU 103) executes the processing at step 044IWS11 when N is obtained at step 044IWS1128A.
29A and S1130A are executed. See FIG. 10-55 (B). If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is performed, the second identification information is displayed. (For example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps 044IWS1126B to S11).
28B is not performed. See FIGS. 10-54 and 10-55 (E). ). According to such a configuration, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, the first
The control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means C6) In any one of the means C1 to C5, a specific state (for example, a state different from the advantageous state, which is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state)) , A specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which can be controlled to a high probability state (probable change state) (step 04).
4IWS2206), and the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the specific state, and the second display During execution of the variable display corresponding to the display result, based on the derived display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, In the modified example 4, the game control microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103) determines in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B that Y
At this time, steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A are executed. FIG. 10-56, FIG.
See 0-57. ), While being controlled to the non-specific state, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed. The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)
When the answer is N in Steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B, Step 044IWS112
9A and S1129B do not proceed. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

Note that the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 044IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the present feature unit 044IW, so that a set value suggestion effect can be executed, or a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. Alternatively, right-handed notification may be configured to be executable. Also, for example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the characteristic portion 21TM can be changed is applied to the present characteristic portion 044IW, and a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of the other special symbol is being performed. In such a case, the variation display of one of the special symbols may be out of position, and the variation display may be forcibly stopped or displayed continuously with the symbol.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 11 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the gaming board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 11, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
A variable display of a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, “
The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" (for example, scrolling display in a vertical direction or updating display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended is provided. In this example, a first hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and a second hold display for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure An area 5B is provided. Note that a display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold display 25 including a plurality of LEDs is provided.
A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number by the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays by the number of LEDs lit. The second reserved storage number is displayed.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back of the game board 2 and the first starting switch 2
Detected by 2A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting winning opening, so that game balls flowing down from the right side of the gaming area do not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Have been.
As described above, the row 19 of nails for preventing the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the operation of firing the game balls aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). Only when the player has operated the game ball, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning port.

Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the gaming balls are configured to be able to win in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails. It is not limited. For example, the first starting winning opening may be provided on the left side of the game area so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when a left hit operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be provided. A mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area and a row of nails 19 may also be provided so that a game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when a left hit operation is performed.

On the right side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down, in the front-rear direction,
An open state (also referred to as an open state) in which game balls can be won at a large winning opening located below the bottom member is changed to a closed state in which game balls cannot be won (also referred to as a closed state). Special variable winning ball device 7
Moves the bottom member forward in the big hit game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Open control is performed to move the bottom member backward from the closed state so as to open the large winning opening that is a winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7 are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 for forming a special winning port for small hits, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port. As shown in the figure, a special variable winning ball device 17 is disposed on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. These special variable winning ball devices 17 and variable winning ball devices 6
B is located below the bottom member by extending and retracting a plate-like bottom member formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which the game balls flow, extending in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state in the front-rear direction. The special prize port or the second start prize port is changed to an open state in which game balls can be won (also called an open state) and a closed state in which game balls cannot be won (also called a closed state). The special variable prize ball device 17 moves the bottom member in the small hitting game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. From the closed state, which is moved forward, the bottom member is moved backward, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening which is a winning area. In addition, the variable winning prize ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward and from the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward when the symbol hits the normal symbol display 20 and the symbol is derived and displayed, Opening control for opening the second start winning opening, which is a winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6
B is formed to have a similar structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed such that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game balls dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable prize ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable prize ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable prize ball device 6B thereunder.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Also, as shown in FIG. 11, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from upper right to lower left, so that the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are variable. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the special variable prize ball device 17 and the variable prize ball device 6B are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. When the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening,
The game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls as it is toward the out opening.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulating pieces for reducing the flowing speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom member. I have. In this example, the special variable prize ball device 7, the special variable prize ball device 17, and the variable prize ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow to flow is delayed more than when there is no regulating piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11, the special variable prize ball device 17 is disposed on the left side and the variable prize ball device 6B is disposed on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not receded and is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device is changed from the variable winning ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable prize ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable prize ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side in this sense because the game ball is configured to flow toward the 17th. It can be said that.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened,
This is an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the gaming ball into the special winning opening and obtain a prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

In the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, although the number of prize balls is smaller than when the gaming ball has won the large winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) another prize port, such as the first start prize port 1 or the second start prize port. Therefore, if the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning port is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the game ball to the special winning port to obtain the prize ball, and therefore, for the player, You will be at a disadvantage.

In the second start winning opening, a second starting switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball winning in the second start winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, and during a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area by a firing operation (a so-called right-hit operation). )I do.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 11, four lower right and left sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, five) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 11, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the normal symbols is changed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, and thus the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game state shifts to the big hit game state based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, so that the passing gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays both roles of the normal starting area and the operating area.

On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.
Are provided, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 11) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). )
A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 12).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 12).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous that the player performs a firing operation (a so-called left-hand operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. Pachinko machine 1
When the player performs a left-handing operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the game ball into the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display device 4A causes the game ball to enter. One special map game is started.

Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ", the actual design differs depending on the type of jackpot described below. ) Is displayed as "big hit". If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained. Note that, even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be "small hit".

After the display result in the first special map game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes a timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing of the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaching a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, the opening mode of the special winning opening (
A number of rounds and open upper limit period) and a number of game states (normal state, probable change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state are prepared, and the big hit type is set accordingly. Have been. As a big hit type, a big hit type that can get many prize balls,
A jackpot type with few or almost no prize balls may be provided.

After the big hitting game state ends, the state may be controlled to a certain change state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

In the KT state, KT control is performed, which is more likely to cause a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, so that less prize balls can be obtained than in the big hitting game state, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, a control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure change time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is executed (hour saving state), and the general figure game is described as "per-figure hit". For example, by increasing the probability that the game ball becomes higher than the normal state, a control (high opening control, high base control) that allows the game ball to easily enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The high base state is a special design (especially
This is an advantageous state for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol) is improved.

The probable change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. I do. A condition in which the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games is an end condition is also referred to as a frequency cut (such as a frequency cut probability change).

The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probable change state, a KT state, a high base state, and the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when a predetermined reset process is not performed after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). It is in a state where it is done.

When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, KT state, or high base state,
It is advantageous that the player performs a firing operation (right-hand operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handing operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol display device 20 starts the ordinary figure game. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”.
Becomes When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ", the actual design differs depending on the type of jackpot described below. ) Is displayed as "big hit" when the stop display is performed, and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "small hit" is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

After the display result in the second special map game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special map game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed).

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to excite the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. In addition,
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and / or It may be performed by, for example, turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol )
Is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, “7”) are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C,
A decorative symbol forming a chance eye is stopped and displayed on a predetermined activated line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
Etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A).
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10
4 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, the ROM 10
The RAM 102 is used as a main memory using various data (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, and data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later) stored in the RAM 1. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). Control (drive) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like.
And an output port for transmitting a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B)) for game ball detection, and count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (For example, a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on), and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, and the solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory and a door for a special winning opening door. The signal is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The production control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). ))
And a command for designating the state of the game (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening state of the special winning opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of stored memories, the game state), the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in the memory 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a controller sensor unit 35A and a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute an effect based on a detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character G
an effect ROM, a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and execute an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be performed, based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5.
To be displayed. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lamp on / off state)
Is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 includes various random number values (random numbers for production) used to execute various productions.
Numerical data indicating is counted updatable. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (
Step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3).
). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), an initialization process (Step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, C
The PU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102 by RA
M clear processing is performed, and an initial value is set in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), the RAM
It is determined whether or not backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, and the like).
In addition, the status of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in No. 02 (Step S4; No), an initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the RAM 10
It is determined that the data of No. 2 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CP
U103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 includes:
An appropriate screen display may be performed based on the effect control command.

After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after finishing the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (
Step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) to the CPU 10.
3 and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.
Reference numeral 103 denotes a gate switch 21, a first starting port switch 22 A, a second starting port switch 22 B, a first count switch 23, and a second count switch 24 via a switch circuit 110 by executing a predetermined switch process. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hits) and start information (start information) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). C
The PU 103 executes the first special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management and execution of the first special figure game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like. (Details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes a second special symbol process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the second special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like. You. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel.

Subsequent to the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Then, C
The PU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 14 as the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination processing, occurrence of a start winning in the first start winning opening is detected, and the RAM 10
A process for storing the hold information in the second predetermined area and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a winning start occurs in the first winning opening, a random number for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored in a first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information. Is done. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first number of stored memories, a transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start winning prize, the first number of stored memories, and a determination result such as a pre-reading determination to the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus set is, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed, as shown in FIG.
Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special map process flag provided in the RAM 102. Each processing of the first special symbol processing (step S
In 110A to S121A), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the first special symbol normal process of step S110A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0”.
Executed when (initial value). In the first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the first special symbol normal process, the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” or “big hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. . Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the first variation pattern setting process in step S111A, the value of the first special map process flag is “
1 ". In this first variation pattern setting process, the random number value for determining the variation pattern is determined based on a result of a prior determination as to whether the display result is" big hit "or" small hit ". And a process of determining the variation pattern to be one of a plurality of types using the above. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is a reach), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

In the first special symbol variation process in step S112A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”.
Executed when In the first special symbol variation process, a process for setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is measured. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the first special symbol change processing ends. I do.

In the present example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (Step S112A) and the first special symbol is changed.
When the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the small special fluctuating display may be controlled to be a small hitting game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hitting game is being performed (specifically, the value of the second special map process flag is set to the second small hitting value). It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the second small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the first special symbol change processing. The value is not changed, and the value of the first special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing unless the small hitting game is being performed. By performing such control, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the small hit game ends. It is controlled to be. It should be noted that, in addition to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (the timer is stopped). The update may be interrupted.

In the first special symbol stop process in step S113A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”.
Executed when In the first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the change of the first special symbol, and stops and displays the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol (
Derivation) is performed. If the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “9”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the control is set to the probable change state, the KT state, or the high base state, and the end of the rounding is established. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

In the first gate passage waiting process in step S114A, the value of the fourth special figure process flag is set to “4”.
In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passing of a game ball to the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the first special figure is executed. The value of the process flag is updated to “5”.

In the first big hit opening pre-processing of step S115A, the value of the first special map process flag is “5”.
Executed when The first big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting execution of a round in the big hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “big hit” or the like. It is included. When opening the big winning opening,
A process for supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set in accordance with, for example, the type of the big hit. Once these settings are complete,
The value of the first special map process flag is updated to “6”, and the first big hit opening pre-processing ends.

In the processing during opening of the first big hit in step S116A, the value of the first special map process flag is “6”.
Executed when The processing during the opening of the first big hit is based on the processing of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and the number of gaming balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the first count switch 23, and the like. And a process of determining whether it is time to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “7”. Then, the processing during the opening of the first big hit is ended.

In the post-first-big-hit opening processing in step S117A, the value of the first special map process flag is “7”.
Executed when The post-first-big-hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the special winning opening has reached a set upper-limit number of executions, and a process of determining whether or not the upper-limit execution number has been reached. It includes a process for making settings for terminating the gaming state.
When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “6”, and when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit execution number, the first special figure process flag is updated. The value of the diagram process flag is updated to “8”. When the value of the first special map process flag is updated, the first big hit opening process ends.

The first big hit end processing in step S118A is executed when the value of the first special map process flag is “8”. The first big hit end process corresponds to a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, or an end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting the probable change control, the KT control, and the high base control. When such setting is performed, the value of the first special map process flag is updated to “0”, and the first big hit end processing ends.

In the first small hit opening pre-processing of step S119A, the value of the first special map process flag is “9”.
Executed when The first small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to the open state in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. . At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hit opening pre-processing ends.

In the processing during the opening of the first small hit in step S120A, the value of the first special map process flag is “10”.
The first small hit opening processing is executed when the special winning opening is opened and the special winning opening is determined based on the measured elapsed time. The processing includes determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state, etc. When the special winning port is returned to the closed state and the small hitting game state ends, the first special figure process is performed. The value of the flag is updated to “11”, and the first small hit opening processing ends.

In the first small hit end processing in step S121A, the value of the first special map process flag is “11”.
Executed when The first small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the first small hit end processing ends.

Note that the small hit ending period corresponding to the small hit end period may be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the difference between the execution period of the effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol increases. It is assumed that During the suspension period, the display for stopping the swinging of the decorative design is performed, but if the period is long, there is a possibility that the effect may give an uncomfortable feeling to the player. Therefore, in the normal state, the small hit ending period is set to the KT state (
It is preferable that the length be shorter than the first KT state and the second KT state described later. For example, in the normal state, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds, and in the KT state, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds. In the present example, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the game ball to win the special winning opening in the small hitting game state (details will be described later). Do not execute. Therefore, in the first KT state, the second
The small hit ending period may be made shorter than in the KT state. On the other hand, the second
In the KT state, in the small hitting game state, a game ball is likely to win a special winning opening (details will be described later), and therefore, an effect that emphasizes that the small hitting game state is controlled is executed (
For example, an image indicating that a small hit game is being played is displayed). Therefore, in the second KT state, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. For example, in the first KT state, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds. Further, in addition to or instead of the small hit ending period corresponding to the small hit ending process, the small hit fanfare period corresponding to the first small hit opening pre-processing period also has a game similar to the small hit ending period. The length of the period may be different depending on the state.

The processing executed in the second special symbol processing (step S25B) is the same as the processing executed in the first special symbol processing (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 15, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process will be described. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored as the hold information in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102.

In this example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol change process to change the change of the second special symbol. During display, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol and the small hit game may be controlled. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103
) Determines whether or not a small hit game is being played (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the first small hit opening pre-processing to the first small hit end processing). If it is during the small hit game, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing, and if it is not the small hit game, the second special figure process flag is not changed. The value of the second special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to be.
Not only in such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (the timer is stopped). The update may be interrupted.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 16 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set to a predetermined time (for example, 2
(Milliseconds). At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, when a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibition state is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt inhibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s) The timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. Is For example, the effect control command that has been read out may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1 may be stored so that which effect control command has been received or the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like.
For example, it turns on a reception flag provided in the CPU 22. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the CPU executes the effect control process process (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative luminous body such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the camera, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a control effect command at the time of a start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

In this embodiment, when an effective start winning at the first starting winning opening A occurs, an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition specifying command) designating that the first reserved memory number has increased by one is transmitted. When an effective start winning in the second starting winning opening occurs, an effect control command (second holding stored number addition specifying command) designating that the second held storage number has been increased by one is transmitted. Further, when an effective start winning is generated in any of the starting winning openings (in this example, only the first starting winning opening), a pre-read determination of a display result, a variation pattern, and the like in the special figure game is performed, and the determination result is designated. Control command (winning-time judgment result designation command) is transmitted. Note that when the first special figure game is started, an effect control command (first subtraction storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first reserved memory number has decreased by 1 is transmitted, and the second special figure game is started. At the time of starting, the effect control command (the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second reserved memory number has decreased by 1 is transmitted. It is possible to know the number of second reserved storages. In step S161, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a prefetch notice effect are performed based on the winning determination result command.
Processing for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the hold storage number addition designation command and the second reservation storage number addition designation command. Also, when the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command and the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command are received, processing for displaying the suspension display is executed based on the reserved storage number specified from those commands. Is done. Note that, in this embodiment, only the prefetch notice effect for the first special figure game can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the prefetch notice effect for the second special figure game may also be executable.

After executing the processing of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control
Steps S170 to S1 according to the value of the rendering process flag provided in
One of the processes of 77 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. Image display device 5
If it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in, the value of the effect process flag is set to “
1 ", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 is driven, the voice control board 13 8L, 8 by the output of a command (sound effect signal) for
During the variable display of the decorative design, such as outputting a voice or sound effect from the R, or turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 or the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Performs various effect controls. After performing such production control,
For example, in response to reading of an end code indicating the end of variable display of a decorative symbol from the effect control pattern, or receiving a command to stop and display the final decorative symbol from the main board 11, The fixed decorative symbol which is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “3”,
The variable display effect processing ends.

The wait process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect process. Also, when the reception waiting time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure ends.

The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In this small hit production process, the production control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed based on the set contents. In addition, in the small hit effect production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. is there"
5 ”, and the small hit production process ends.

The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hitting game state, and executes various effect control based on the set contents at the end of the small hitting game state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and executes various effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-").
The variable display may be performed only by repeating the display of the symbol and the extinguishing of the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).
.

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form distributed by installing it in a storage device included in it. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (“high”, “high”
Expressions such as "low" and "differentiate") may include that one is a "0%" ratio. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Description of the feature part 014IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 014IW will be described. First, a gaming state in the present feature part 014IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the characteristic portion 014IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In the present feature 014IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). Control, low probability and first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and high probability and first KT state (high probability / first KT state). , High probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state of the KT states, as described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and Is very rare (for example, about one ball every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the state is controlled so that small hits are likely to occur, and the state is controlled to be in the high base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state among the KT states, as described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, the second K
In the T state, the state is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to be short.

The KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in the characteristic portion 014IW, the variable winning prize ball device 6B
Is the same in the KT state and the normal state (for example, 100%, that is, 100% per figure regardless of the state), but is determined to be a small hit when the first special symbol fluctuates. When the second special symbol fluctuates, a small hit may be determined (except in the case of a forced loss described later). It is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to fluctuate, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

Note that the configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which the KT state is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable prize ball device 6B will be in the open state due to the ordinary figure is the same as the normal state (for example, 100%), but the fluctuation selected when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time than the normal state, and the KT state is smaller than the normal state. It may be a game state that is likely to hit. In addition, in the present feature part 014IW, the general-figure game is configured to always hit the general-figure. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. It may be so arranged that the ratio of the loss of the normal figure is lower in the normal state than in the normal state.

Further, the characteristic portion 014IW is configured so that the time required from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to reach the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and by a group of nails forming a flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, in the characteristic portion 014IW, the variable winning prize ball device 6B can be controlled to be opened based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing the passing gate 41. When the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be opened when one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required until the variable prize ball is opened. Of game balls can be directly won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram illustrating the big hit determination table 138IW130a. The big hit determination table 138IW130a is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with a hit determination random number is set. The jackpot determination table 138IW130a includes a non-probable change state (low probability state (low probability / non-K
T state, low probability / first KT state)), a non-probable variable big hit determination table used in
There is a probability-change large hit determination table used in the probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state)). FIG. 18-
Each numerical value described in the left column of 1 (A) is set, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 18-1 (A) is set in the probability-change big hit determination table. The numerical value described in FIG. 18A is the big hit determination value.

FIGS. 18-1 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit determination tables 138IW130b and 130c. Among them, FIG. 18-1 (B) shows the small hit determination table 138IW130b for the first special symbol used when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 18-1 (C) shows the small hit determination table 138IW130c for the second special symbol used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol. Small hit judgment table is RO
It is a collection of data stored in M101, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with a hit determination random number is set. Small hit determination table 138IW130b, 13
0c is a non-probability state (low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT
State)), and a non-probabilistic small hit determination table used in the probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state)) used in the probability change state. The numerical values described in the left column of FIGS. 18-1 (B) and (C) are set in the non-probability change small hit determination table. ),
Each numerical value described in the right column of (C) is set. Also, FIGS. 18-1 (B) and (C)
The numerical value described in parentheses) is the small hit determination value.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 18-1 (B), the small hit determination table 13 for the first special symbol
The small hit determination value is not assigned to the 8IW 130b, and if the big hit is not determined, the small hit does not occur. In other words, if it is not determined that the big hit, it is all off, the small hit probability is 0%. As shown in FIG. 18-1 (C), the small hit determination table 138IW130c for the second special symbol includes the determination values (32767 to 65535) for both the non-probability change small hit determination table and the probable change small hit determination table. ) Is assigned as the small hit determination value, and the small hit probability is 50%. The present invention is not limited to the configuration of the present example, and in the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is not determined that a big hit is made, a small hit is always made and the small hit probability may be set to 100%. Only the small hit probability may be set to 100%.

Without being limited to the configuration of the present example, the small hit determination value may be set so that a small hit occurs even in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. In this case, it is desirable that the small hit probability of the variable display of the first special symbol is equal to or lower than the small hit probability of the variable display of the second special symbol. Also, in the case where the big hit type of the last big hit is the probable big hit E or the probable big hit F (see FIG. 18-22), when the small hitting game state is controlled based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it will be described later. Alternatively, the value of the small hit counter may be added. Also, during the simultaneous variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in response to the small hit symbol being derived and displayed as the variation display result of one special symbol, the other variation display is lost. It may be forcibly stopped.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and sets the extracted value as the value of the hit determination random number. If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is determined that a special symbol is to be made a jackpot. FIG.
The “probability” shown in 8-1 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit, and in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it becomes a big hit compared to the non-probable state (low probability state). The probability has increased 10 times. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 18-1 (B) and (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit game state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. To determine whether or not to make a small hit means to determine whether or not to shift to the small hitting game state, and to determine whether or not the stop symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is a small hit symbol. It is also to decide whether or not.

FIGS. 18-1 (D) and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 138IW131a and 131b stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Big hit type judgment table 138IW
When it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol, 131a and 131b change the big hit type to “probable variable big hit A”, “probable variable big hit B”,
Refer to to determine “probable jackpot C”, “probable jackpot D”, “probable jackpot E”, “probable jackpot F”, “ordinary jackpot A”, “ordinary jackpot B”, or “ordinary jackpot C” It is a table to be performed. Hereinafter, the probability variable jackpot A, the variable probability jackpot B, the variable probability jackpot C, and the variable probability jackpot D
, The probable jackpot E and the probable jackpot F are collectively referred to simply as the probable jackpot. Also, the normal jackpot A, the normal jackpot B and the normal jackpot C are collectively referred to simply as a normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 18-1 (D), in the characteristic portion 014IW, when performing the variation display of the first special symbol, the probability is determined to be “probable variation big hit A” with a probability of 15% and a probability of 15% Is determined to be “probably big hit B”, and 15% of the time is determined to be “probable big hit C”, and 15% of the time is “
Is determined to be "probable jackpot D", "probable jackpot E" is determined with a probability of 3%, and "probable jackpot E" is determined with a probability of 2%.
It is determined as "probable variable big hit F", 15% probability is determined as "normal big hit A", 15% probability is determined as "normal big hit B", and 5% probability is determined as "normal big hit C". .

As shown in FIG. 18-1 (E), in the present feature part 014IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, “probable variation big hit A” is determined with a probability of 15%, and 15% Is determined as "probably big hit B", 15% of the time is determined as "probably big hit C", 15% of the probability is determined as "probable big hit D", and 3% of the probability is "probable big hit E". Is determined as “probable variable jackpot F” with a probability of 2% and “normal jackpot A” with a probability of 35%.

As shown in FIGS. 18-1 (D) and (E), in the characteristic portion 014IW, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the “normal jackpot A” and the “ordinary jackpot B” of the ordinary jackpot are performed. And "Normal jackpot C", but when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the "ordinary jackpot B" and "ordinary jackpot C" of the ordinary jackpot are It is configured not to be determined, but to be determined only for “normal jackpot A”, which is more advantageous than “normal jackpot B” and “normal jackpot C”. The difference in the degree of advantage for each big hit type will be described later.

In this characteristic portion 014IW, the condition for shifting to the gaming state controlled after the big hit game or the second KT state is different depending on the big hit type, but the degree of advantage in the big hit gaming state is common. In other words, the characteristic portion 014IW is configured to control the game mode to the five-round jackpot game state for any jackpot type. It should be noted that the degree of advantage (for example, the number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state may be different for each big hit type, without being limited to the configuration of the present feature part 014IW.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, a predetermined period (30 in this example) in each round of the jackpot game.
The special winning opening is controlled to be in an open state until a predetermined number (in this example, 10) of game balls have been won or a predetermined number (in this example, 10) of game balls have been won, and a maximum of 10 winning winnings can be won in each round. is there. In addition,
In addition to the jackpot type indicated by the feature portion 014IW, for example, a “2R probable big hit” or “2R normal big hit” is provided, and when “2R probable big hit” and “2R normal big hit” are used, each of the big hit games The large winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in the round, and the number of winnings in the large winning opening that can be won every round is about two to three. Good.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, when the big hit game is ended, the game is controlled to one of the high probability state and the low probability state according to the big hit type. Specifically, when a probability change big hit occurs, it is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit game state ends. When a big hit occurs, the game is controlled to a low probability state after the big hit game state ends.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, when the big hit game is ended, the game is controlled to one of the first KT state and the second KT state according to the big hit type. Specifically, when the probability change big hit A occurs, the state is controlled to the second KT state after the big hit game state ends. In addition, probability variation big hit BF
When any of the big hits A to C occurs and the big hit game state ends, the state is controlled to the first KT state.

In addition, in the present feature part 014IW, if any of the probable big hits B to F and the normal big hits A to C occurs, the state is controlled to the first KT state after the end of the big hitting game state. When it is established, it is configured to shift from the first KT state to the second KT state or the non-KT state.

Specifically, when any of the probability change big hit B, the probability change big hit C and the probability change big hit D occurs, the game shifts to the first KT state after the end of the big hit game state, and the next big hit occurs or the number of times corresponding to the big hit type. The first KT state is maintained until the first transition condition of executing the variable display is satisfied, and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state.

The feature part 014IW is configured so that any one of a plurality of types of first transition conditions is set according to the type of big hit (for example, realized by the processing of step 014IWS104A described later). If there is, the execution of the change display 90 times is the first shift condition (
Hereinafter, also referred to as a first transition condition A), and if it is a probability change big hit C, the execution of the fluctuation display 65 times is set as a first transition condition (hereinafter also referred to as a first change condition B), In the case of D, the execution of the variable display 40 times is set as a first transition condition (hereinafter, also referred to as a first transition condition C).

Therefore, when the probability change big hit B occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, the first change condition (the first change condition A) is performed by executing the variable display count 90 times without generating the next big hit. When the condition is satisfied, the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state. Further, when the probability change big hit C occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, the fluctuation display is executed 65 times without generating the next big hit and the first shift condition (first shift condition B) is satisfied. Then, the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state. Further, when the probability change big hit C occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, the first change condition (the first change condition C) is satisfied by performing the change display 40 times without generating the next big hit. Then, the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state. These controls are performed, for example, in Steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS008B and Step 014IWS104 described later.
A is realized by the processing of A.

Also, when one of the probability change big hit E and the probability change big hit F occurs, the state shifts to the first KT state after the end of the big hit game state, and the next big hit occurs or the variation display of the number of times corresponding to the big hit type is executed. The first KT state is maintained until one of the first transition condition and the second transition condition of the occurrence of the small hitting game state corresponding to the type of the big hit is satisfied,
When either one of the first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied, the state transitions from the first KT state to the second KT state. Hereinafter, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are collectively referred to simply as a transition condition.

The characteristic portion 014IW is configured so that any one of a plurality of types of second transition conditions is set according to the type of big hit (for example, realized by the process of step 014IWS107A described later). If so, the occurrence of 30 small hitting game states is set as a second transition condition (hereinafter, also referred to as a second transition condition A). The second transition condition (hereinafter, also referred to as a second transition condition B) is set. In addition, in the probability variable big hit E and the probability variable big hit F, the execution of the variable display 90 times is set as the first transition condition.

Therefore, when the probability change big hit E occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, the first change condition (the first change condition A) of executing the change display 90 times without generating the next big hit and the three
When either one of the second transition condition (the second transition condition A) that the zero small hitting game state occurs, the transition is made from the first KT state to the second KT state. In addition, probability change big hit F
In the case of occurrence and transition to the first KT state, the first transition condition (the first transition condition A) of executing the variable display 90 times without occurrence of the next big hit and the small hitting game state of 70 times If either one of the second transition condition (the second transition condition B) that the occurrence of
The state transitions from the KT state to the second KT state. These controls are performed, for example, in step 01 described later.
4IWS001B to 014IWS008B, step 014IWS009B to 014IW
This is realized by the processing of S015B, step 014IWS104A, and step 014IWS107A. The first transition condition may be set differently for the probable jackpot E and the probable jackpot F without being limited to the configuration of the characteristic portion 014IW.

When any of the normal big hit A, the normal big hit B and the normal big hit C occurs, the game shifts to the first KT state after the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the number of times corresponding to the big hit type is executed. The first KT state is maintained until the first transition condition is satisfied. When the first transition condition is satisfied, the state transitions from the first KT state to the non-KT state.

The feature portion 014IW is configured so that any one of a plurality of types of first transition conditions is set according to the type of big hit (for example, realized by the process of step 014IWS110A). The execution of the variable display 90 times is set as the first transition condition (first transition condition A), and the execution of the variable display 65 times is set as the first transition condition (first transition condition B) in the case of the normal big hit B. In the case of the normal big hit C, the execution of the variable display 40 times is set as the first shift condition (first shift condition C).

Therefore, when the normal big hit A occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, if the next big hit occurs and the first shift condition (the first shift condition A) of executing the variable display 90 times is satisfied. Transition from the first KT state to the non-KT state. Also, the big hit B usually occurs and the first K
In the case of transition to the T state, if the first transition condition (first transition condition B) of performing the variable display 65 times without the occurrence of the next big hit, the transition is made from the first KT state to the non-KT state. I do. When the normal big hit C occurs and the state shifts to the first KT state, if the first shift condition (the first shift condition C) of performing the variable display 40 times without the occurrence of the next big hit is satisfied, The state transitions from the 1KT state to the non-KT state. These controls are realized by, for example, the processing of Steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS007B and Step 014IWS110A described later.

Hereinafter, in the first KT state, the first KT state in which the probability change big hits B to D occur and the game is shifted after the big hit game is also referred to as the first KT state A, where the probability change big hits E and F occur and shift after the big hit game. The first KT state to be performed is also referred to as a first KT state B, and large hits A to C usually occur,
The first KT state shifted after the big hit game is also referred to as a first KT state C. That is, the first KT state A is a state in which the state shifts to the second KT state when the first shift condition is satisfied.
The T state B is a state in which a transition is made to the second KT state when one of the first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied, and the first KT state C is a transition to the non-KT state when the first transition condition is satisfied. State.

When the probability change big hit A occurs, the game shifts to the second KT state after the big hit game, and the second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. That is, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) loops until a big hit occurs.

In the present characteristic portion 014IW, based on the satisfaction of the first transition condition, the first KT state (
For example, it is possible to shift from the first KT state A, B) to the second KT state, and based on one of the first shift condition and the second shift condition being satisfied, the first KT state is determined.
The state (for example, the first KT state B) can be changed to the second KT state. With such a configuration, the conditions for shifting to the second KT state can be given a variety of conditions, and the gaming interest can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 014IW, as a transition condition for transition from the first KT state to the second KT state, a first transition condition of executing a predetermined number of times of change display and a second transition condition of occurrence of a predetermined number of small hitting game states are set. It is configured so that a transition condition can be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of fluctuations and the number of occurrences of the small hitting game state (that is, the number of times the small hitting symbol is derived and displayed), and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 014IW, when the first KT state is controlled to one of the states A and B, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the second KT state, while when the state is controlled to the first KT state C, It is configured to shift to the non-KT state when the first shift condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, attention can be paid to which of the first KT states A to C is being controlled, and the gaming interest can be improved.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 014IW, when the state is controlled to any one of the first KT states A and B by the occurrence of any of the probable big hits B to F, the state is controlled to the high probability state at the same time. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the 2KT state, the state is controlled to the low probability state at the same time when the state is controlled to the first KT state C by the occurrence of one of the big hits A to C, and the state shifts to the non-KT state when the first shift condition is satisfied. Is configured. For this reason, it is possible to pay attention to whether the state is controlled to the high probability state or the low probability state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the characteristic portion 014IW, a plurality of types of first transition conditions are provided, and each of the first transition conditions is configured to be different in ease of establishment. That is, according to the type of the first transition condition, the second K
Since the transition to the T state or the non-KT state is different, the degree of advantage is configured to be different. For example, in the first KT state A that shifts to the second KT state when the shift condition is satisfied, the degree of advantage increases in the order in which the shift is likely to be satisfied (that is, the order in which the shift to the second KT state is easy). Specifically, the degree of advantage increases in the order of first transition condition C (40 times)> first transition condition B (65 times)> first transition condition A (90 times). On the other hand, in the first KT state C which shifts to the non-KT state when the shift condition is satisfied, the degree of advantage increases in the order in which the shift is difficult to be satisfied (that is, the order in which the shift to the non-KT state is difficult). Specifically, the degree of advantage increases in the order of the first transition condition A (90 times)> the first transition condition B (65 times)> the first transition condition C (40 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of the game and to pay attention to which of the first KT states A to C is controlled and the type of the first transition condition that is set,
Amusement in entertainment can be improved.

In addition, the characteristic portion 014IW is configured such that a plurality of types of second transition conditions are provided, and each of the second transition conditions has a different ease of being satisfied. That is, according to the type of the second shift condition, the second K
Since the transition to the T state is different, the degree of advantage is different. With such a configuration, the variety of games can be increased, and the type of the second shift condition can be noticed, so that the interest in the games can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 014IW, a plurality of big hit types are provided, and a shift condition for shifting from the first KT state to the second KT state or the non-KT state is different depending on the big hit type. With such a configuration, the diversity of the game can be increased, and the type of the big hit can be noticed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, the degree of advantage is higher in the order of the second KT state> the first KT state> the non-KT state. For this reason, among the probability-variable jackpots A to F and the normal jackpots A to C, the probability-variable jackpot A controlled to the second KT state when the jackpot gaming state ends is the type of the jackpot having the highest degree of advantage. In addition, in the probability change jackpots B to D, the degree of advantage increases in the order in which the first transition condition that is likely to be satisfied is set (that is, the order in which the transition to the second KT state is easy). Specifically, the degree of advantage increases in the order of the probability variable hit D> the probability variable hit C> the probability variable hit B. In addition, probability change big hit E, F
Since the first transition condition is the same, the degree of advantage increases in the order in which the second transition condition that is likely to be satisfied is set (that is, the order in which transition to the second KT state is easy). Specifically, the degree of advantage increases in the order of the probability variable hit E> the probability variable hit F. In addition, in the case of the normal jackpots A to C, the degree of advantage increases in the order in which the first transition condition that is difficult to be satisfied is set (that is, the order in which transition to the non-KT state is difficult). Specifically, the degree of advantage increases in the order of normal jackpot A> normal jackpot B> normal jackpot C.

FIG. 18-1 (F) shows the small hit type determination table 138I stored in the ROM 101.
It is explanatory drawing which shows W131c. The small hit type determination table 138IW131c sets the small hit type to "small hit A", "small hit B""And" small hit C ".

As shown in FIG. 18-1 (F), in the present feature part 014IW, when performing the variation display of the second special symbol, “small hit A” is determined with a probability of 33%, and a probability of 33% "Small hit B
Is determined, and "small hit C" is determined with a probability of 34%.

"Small hit A" is a small hit in which the special variable prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened for 0.5 second three times in the small hit game state, and "small hit B" is a small hit. In the gaming state, the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened twice for 0.5 second, which is a small hit. The “small hit C” is the special variable winning prize ball device 17 in the small hitting gaming state. This is a small hit in which the control to be in the open state is performed once for 0.5 second. When the special variable prize ball device 17 is opened a plurality of times in the small hitting game state, 1.8 seconds are set as an interval period (close period between opening) after the special variable prize ball device 17 is opened. There is a period during which the state is closed. Since the characteristic portion 014IW is configured such that the degree of advantage is different depending on the type of the small hit, the opening effect during the small hit game (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state) for each small hit type. It is also possible to change the effect mode of the effect of notifying that the effect is performed (or to change the selection ratio of the effect mode). For example, in the case of the small hit A that is opened three times (that is, the degree of advantage is high), the production mode B
In the case of the small hit C in which the opening effect of the effect mode A is executed only once (ie, the degree of advantage is low), the effect is higher than the opening effect of the effect mode A. The rate at which the opening effect of the mode B is executed may be increased. With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the effect of the open effect, and it is possible to enhance interest.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, three types of small hits, small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C, are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and only one type or two types are provided. Or four or more types. Further, for example, in a case where the opening effect is executed during the small hitting game only in the second KT state, in the second KT state, any one of the small hitting A, the small hitting B, and the small hitting C is performed. In the first KT state in which the small hit type is determined and the opening effect is not executed, the small hit type may be determined (or the determined ratio is high) for the small hit C. With such a configuration, the first KT in which the opening effect is not performed
In the state, it is possible to prevent a period in which the small hitting game state is controlled (that is, a fluctuation stop period of the second special symbol) from being lengthened, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

FIG. 18-2 to FIG. 18-4 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol used in the present feature portion 014IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 18-2 to 18-4
Is the second byte of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 18-2 to 18-4, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the decoration symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decoration symbol 32 types of # 01 to # 32 are used. Hereinafter, for example, a variation pattern #n (n
= 01 to 07 or 01 to 32) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first non-KT special special symbol shown in FIG. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 18-2 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the first variation pattern is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability /
In the case of the first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT-use first special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 18B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. FIG.
As shown in -2 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, the variation is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for the non-KT time shown in FIG. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 18C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in the non-KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined to be a loss, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 10 minutes. Also,
Even when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 10 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, even when the non-KT state is in effect, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning game balls to the special winning opening. Would. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 014IW, as shown in FIG. 18C, even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely increased and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is increased. Is reduced to reduce the frequency of occurrence of small hits, thereby preventing a situation in which a small hit is aimed at acquiring a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic portion 014IW, the “frequency of occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, the small hits per unit time Is higher than the normal state.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the characteristic portion 014IW, the second
When the special symbol change display is executed, the change time is set relatively long at 5 minutes even in the case of a big hit, so that the prize ball due to unreasonable winning in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. Try to prevent the act of targeting. However, in the case of a big hit, since the digestion of the first hold memory does not need to be longer than in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the case of a small hit. I have.

When the second special symbol is fluctuated and displayed, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on one of the normal big hits A to C that triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended. Then, the variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times of the variation after that. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 18D, when the second special symbol change display is executed as the first change of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second change patterns # 04 to # 06 is performed. Is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18D, when it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is the first variation, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds. It is determined. If the first change of the low probability / first KT state is determined to be a small hit, the second change pattern # 05 (second start winning opening opening) which is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. Fluctuation pattern for preparation). In the characteristic portion 014IW, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of small hits increases, the variable winning ball device 6
By setting the opening time of B to be long, the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is set so that it rarely wins. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately formed. If the device 17 is controlled to the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 014IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, before the transition to the first KT state, the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 are changed. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, it is possible to win a special winning opening. This prevents a situation where a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. When it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for two minutes.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 39th fluctuation is performed after the big hit game based on any of the normal big hits A to C which has triggered the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of the 41st to 64th fluctuation is performed. If the display is executed, or if the change display of the 66th to 89th change is executed,
Low probability shown in FIG. 18-3 (E) / first KT and 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 to 89
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the variation eyes is selected, and the variation pattern is determined.
As shown in FIG. 18-3 (E), after the big hit game based on any of the normal big hits A to C is finished, the low probability / first KT state changes from 2 to 39, 41 to 64, or 66 to 89 as the fluctuations. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 07 to # 13. Also, as shown in FIG. 18-3 (E), after the big hit game based on any of the normal big hits A to C is finished, the low probability / the first KT state changes from 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 to 89 When it is determined to be an out-of-sight, the second variation pattern # 07 having a shortened variation of as short as 5 seconds and the second variation pattern # 7 of a shortened variation having a shorter variation time of 1 second.
08 may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be out of the range of the low probability / first KT state from 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 to 89 after reaching the big hit game based on any of the normal big hits A to C, the reach is performed. May be determined as the second variation pattern # 09 accompanied by If the small hit is determined as the low probability / first KT state change of 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 to 89 after the big hit game based on any of the normal big hits A to C is completed, The second variation pattern # 10 of a shortened variation having a short time of 5 seconds or a variation time of 1
In some cases, the second variation pattern # 11 having a shortened variation as short as seconds is determined. On the other hand, when the big hit game based on any of the normal big hits A to C is finished and the small hit is determined as the low probability / the first KT state 2-39, 41-64 or 66-89 variation, There is a case where the second variation pattern # 12 with reach is determined. Second variation pattern # 07, # 1
0 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second reserved storage is not stored, and second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 are variation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reserved storages are stored. It is. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. In addition, after the big hit game based on any of the big hits A to C is finished, if the big hit is determined as the low probability / the first KT state 2-39, 41-64 or 66-89 variation, the reach is set. It is determined in the accompanying second variation pattern # 13.

Also, the case where the variation display of the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation is executed after the big hit game based on any one of the normal big hits A to C that has triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, the low probability shown in FIG. 18-3 (F) / at the first KT and 40, 65 or 90
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the variation eyes is selected, and the variation pattern is determined.
As shown in FIG. 18-3 (F), after the big hit game based on any of the normal big hits A to C is finished, the second special symbol changes as the 40th, 65th or 90th change of the low probability / first KT state. When the display is executed, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16.

In the feature part 014IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, 40, 6
At the 5th and 90th fluctuations, a battle effect (which will be described later in detail) indicating whether or not the high base state (first KT state) is continued and whether or not to shift to the second KT state is executed. Therefore, at the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations of the low probability / first KT state, FIG.
By using the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in F), it is possible to secure a sufficient period for executing the battle effect without selecting the shortened variation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18-2, in the present characteristic portion 014IW, when a large hit is made in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case in which a big hit has occurred immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the fluctuation of the second special symbol executed during the fluctuation of the big hit of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly released, the forcible release frequently occurs even in the second KT state, and the player loses the small hit. You will not receive any profits. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 014IW, the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to be a short change time, so that the game mode shifts to the big hit game state based on the change of the first special symbol before forcible loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

Note that, unlike the feature part 014IW, even when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol is not forced out (for example, the first special symbol). When the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol big hit symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly removed. In the case of the gaming machine, the change time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. If the change time of the big hit is set to the same short change time as the loss, the player will You will not be able to receive any profits from small hits. Therefore, if the change time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is set to a long change time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is a sufficient time that the small hit can be generated at least a plurality of times. (For example, one minute).

When the second special symbol change display is executed, in the case of the high probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on any of the high probability big hit BF which triggered the high probability / first KT state is ended. Then, the variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times of the variation after that. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 18-4 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21 is performed. Is determined.

Similarly to the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 17 having a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds is determined. On the other hand, high probability / first KT
Even if it is determined that the state is out of the first variation, the second variation pattern # 18 with the reach is also obtained.
May be determined. In addition, even when the small change is determined as the first change of the high probability / first KT state, the change pattern (second change pattern # 19) for preparing the second starting winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small fluctuation is the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. FIG.
As shown in -4 (G), when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 39th fluctuation is executed after the big hit game based on any of the probable fluctuation big hits B to F which triggered the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation of the 41st to 64th fluctuation is performed. If the display is executed, or if the change display of the 66th to 89th change is executed,
High probability shown in FIG. 18-4 (H) / at the first KT and 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 to 89
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the variation eyes is selected, and the variation pattern is determined.
As shown in FIG. 18-4 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation of the high probability / first KT state or later, any of the second variation patterns # 22 to # 28 is performed. Is determined.

In addition, similarly to the low probability / first KT state 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 to 89 variation, as shown in FIG. 18-4 (H), the high probability / first KT state 2 to 39, 41 When it is determined to be an outlier as a variation of ~ 64 or 66-89, a second variation pattern # 22 of a shortened variation with a variation time as short as 5 seconds or a second variation pattern of a shortened variation with a variation time as short as 1 second # 2
3 may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the high probability / first KT state is out of the range of 2 to 39, 41 to 64 or 66 to 89, the second variation pattern with reach #
24 may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the 2nd to 39th, 41st to 64th or 66th to 89th variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds, The second variation pattern of a shortened variation with a variation time as short as 1 second #
26 may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a small hit as the 2nd to 39th, 41st to 64th, or 66th to 89th variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 2.
Reference numeral 6 denotes a variation pattern that can be selected only when one or more second hold storages are stored.
Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. Also, high probability / first
When it is determined to be a big hit as the second or later variation of the KT state, the second variation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

Further, this is a case of executing a case in which a change display of the 40th, 65th, or 90th change is executed after the big hit game based on any of the probable change big hits B to F that triggered the high / low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, the high probability shown in FIG. 18-4 (I) / at the first KT and 40, 65 or 9
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the zeroth variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 18-4 (I), after the big hit game based on any of the probable big hits B to F ends, the second special symbol changes as the 40th, 65th or 90th change of the high probability / first KT state. When the display is executed, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 31.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, when the high probability / first KT state is controlled, 40, 6
At the 5th and 90th fluctuations, a battle effect (which will be described later in detail) indicating whether or not the high base state (first KT state) is continued and whether or not to shift to the second KT state is executed. Therefore, at the 40th, 65th and 90th fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, FIG.
By using the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in I), it is possible to secure a sufficient period for executing the battle effect without selecting the shortened variation.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 014, when the state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state or the high probability / first KT state, at the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations, the second characteristic shown in FIG. The second variation pattern # 14 to # 16 or the second variation pattern # 2 using the special symbol variation pattern table or the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG.
Although it is configured to determine any of the fluctuation patterns 9 to # 31, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and a dedicated fluctuation pattern used in the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations may be provided. . In this case, dedicated fluctuation patterns used at the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations are provided when the previous big hit is a big hit according to the first special figure game and when the last big hit is a big hit according to the second special figure game. Alternatively, a dedicated variation pattern used at the 40th, 65th, and 90th variation corresponding to the jackpot type of the previous jackpot may be provided.

In addition, the present feature unit 014IW is configured to use the second special symbol variation pattern table corresponding to the number of times of variation in the low probability / first KT state and the high probability / first KT state. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a common second special symbol variation pattern table may be used regardless of the number of variations.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the state is the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. Is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 18-4 (j), high probability / second KT
When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the state, the second variation pattern # 29-
It is determined to be one of # 32.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18-4 (j), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of place in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 30 with reach may be determined. When it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 31 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1.5 seconds is determined. When it is determined to be a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 32 with reach is determined.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 18-3 and 18-4, in the first KT state, 5 seconds or 1
A case is shown in which the second KT state is configured to execute the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds, and the second KT state is configured to execute the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a short variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the low probability state, and a short variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the high probability state.

Next, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 18-5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Among them, FIG.
5 (1) shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 18-5 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning device in the second KT state. 3 shows an opening pattern of the ball device 17.

First, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18-5 (1), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and a game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display device 20 performs a variable display of the normal symbol, When it is determined to be a regular symbol hit, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20, and when it is determined that the symbol is lost, the lost symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20. In the present feature part 014IW, since the ordinary symbol game is 100% per game regardless of the playing state, the ordinary symbol display device 20 executes the variation display of the ordinary symbol, and the winning symbol is derived and displayed. Also, in this feature part 014IW,
As shown in FIG. 18-5 (1), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 18-5 (1), after the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

When a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined that a small hit is made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 18-5 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning port. It becomes possible. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 18-5 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is zero.
. While the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is 5.5 seconds, which is as short as 5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins a special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 18-5 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the opening of the next variable winning ball device 6B can be performed in the next ordinary symbol. Fluctuation time 0
. This is after a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is a total of 2 seconds, the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 014IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

In the first KT state, in the first KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After a total of 0.5 seconds, which is a total of 0.2 seconds of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, 0.2 seconds of the symbol fixing time, and 0.1 seconds of the pre-opening process of opening the second winning opening, the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Normally, since the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to the time when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the symbol is not changed is changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened. When controlled to the state, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed are more likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18-5 (2), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and a game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display unit 20 performs a variable display of the normal symbol, When it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20, and when it is determined that the symbol is lost, the lost symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20. In the present feature part 014IW, since the ordinary symbol game is 100% per game regardless of the playing state, the ordinary symbol display device 20 executes the variation display of the ordinary symbol, and the winning symbol is derived and displayed. Also, in this feature part 014IW,
As shown in FIG. 18-5 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol is set to 0.2 second. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 18-5 (2), after the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning opening opening process time 2.6 seconds has elapsed. Thereafter, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

When a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined that a small hit is made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 18-5 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.5 second, and the game ball is won in the special winning hole. It becomes possible.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short, 0.2 seconds. In the characteristic portion 014IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B
At least 3.8 seconds as an interval period (closed period) after the opening of the symbol (ordinary symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds + second starting winning opening time before opening process 2.6 seconds) A relatively long period of time. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 18-5 (2), the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that compared to the first KT state. The game balls easily enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game balls easily enter the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in a special winning opening, and a prize ball is easily obtained. In this example, this is also referred to as “small hit RUSH”.
USH "is displayed.

In this example, a small hit occurs only when the change display of the second special symbol is executed.
In the state, a small hit is easily generated by increasing the frequency of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and a first KT state in which a prize ball is hard to be obtained and a second KT state in which a prize ball is easily obtained are provided. In particular, a small hit RUSH in which a prize ball can be expected due to a small hit (in this example, the second hit RUSH)
(KT state) is realized, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the first
In either of the case of executing the change display of the special symbol and the case of executing the change display of the second special symbol, if it is not a big hit, it is configured to be a 100% small hit and a change of the first special symbol. It is difficult to obtain a prize ball when a small hit occurs in the display, and it is easy to obtain a prize ball when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. A possible small hit RUSH (a gaming state in which the small win in the variable display of the second special symbol easily increases the game value) may be realized. In this way, it is only necessary that, in some form, a state in which a prize ball cannot be expected even in the same KT state, but a small hit RUSH state in which a prize ball can be expected is realized.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 second, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, a game ball is played. The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Normally, the variable prize ball device 6B is in an open state because the time required for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 and reach the variable prize ball device 6B is longer than the time when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before the control is performed. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed to be won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, a variable display of a normal symbol is executed, and the variable winning ball device 6B is used.
Is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C
This is performed by executing the normal symbol process process (see step S26) by the PU 103). In addition, in the normal symbol process process of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probable change state (high probability state),
Regardless of whether the state is the T state, the first KT state, the second KT state, or the big hitting game state, it is determined whether or not to make the regular drawing hit with the same probability (for example, 100%).
In other words, in the present characteristic part 014IW, it is determined that 100% per figure is applied regardless of the state.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same in each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the same as the second symbol. By shortening it to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and increasing it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state,
Although the case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning prize ball device 6B is changed has been described, the embodiment is not limited to such a case. For example, by making the fluctuation time and the symbol confirmation time different between the first KT state and the second KT state, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is set.
May be configured to be different. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Thus, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the above methods, winning in the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. .

As will be described later, in the characteristic portion 014IW, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting a high base flag indicating that the state is the high base state. In this way, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state, by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be shortened as shown in FIG. 18-5 (2). ing.

Note that, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIG.
The variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 18B is controlled by a first opening pattern (long opening) in which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time.
May be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) for short opening.
That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the control may be performed such that the special flag is not set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when the low probability / last change display in the first KT state is performed, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, low probability / first KT
The special flag described above may be erased in response to the 39th special symbol change stop of the 40 special symbol shortening change periods in the state. With such a configuration, low probability /
When performing the left-hitting notification after the end of the first KT state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the variable winning ball device 6B is long opened.

As described above, when the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable prize ball device 6B, a flag for shortening and varying the variable display of the special symbol is further used. In this case, a special symbol and a flag for shortened variation may be separately managed and controlled.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case where the opening probability of the variable winning sphere device 6B is increased in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. In the variable winning prize ball device 6B, it is possible to prevent the prize from winning in a low probability / non-KT
It is possible to prevent a right-handing operation from being performed during the state.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, as shown in FIG.
The time is set as short as 2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable symbol is a variable winning prize ball in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the status of the ordinary symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the movement of the second special symbol at the timing of stopping the change. The variable prize ball device 6B does not open until the game ball that has passed through the variable prize ball device 6B or the special variable prize ball device 17 allows the special prize port to win. On the other hand, in the present feature part 014IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B before the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate a capture element by a shooting operation aiming at a small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

18-6 and FIG. 18-7 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 18-6, the command 8000 (
H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8030 (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of the variation. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120
Receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8030 (H), and controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be out. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (probably variable big hit A designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is the probability big hit A. . Command 9003
(H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (probable variation big hit B designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is to be the probability variation big hit B. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (probably variable big hit C designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is the probability big hit C. . The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 specifying command (probably variable big hit D specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the changing pattern command is set to the variable big hit D. . The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (probably variable big hit E designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is the probability variation big hit E. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (probably variable big hit F designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is to be the probability variation big hit F. . The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (normal jackpot A designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot A. . The command 9009 (H) is an effect control command (display result 9 designation command (ordinary jackpot B designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot B. . The command 9010 (H) is an effect control command (display result 10 designation command (normal jackpot C designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot C. . The command 9011 (H) is an effect control command (display result 11 specifying command (small hitting A specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is small hit A. . Command 9012
(H) is an effect control command (display result 12 designation command (small hit B designation command)) for designating the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command as the small hit B. The command 9013 (H) is an effect control command (display result 13 designation command (small hit C designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit C. .

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 13 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this characteristic part 014IW, the microcomputer 1 for game control is used.
00 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result designation command immediately before the first variation pattern command.
Since the display result specifying command for the special symbol can be determined and the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specifying command for the second special symbol, the display result specifying command can be determined. Can be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result specifying command for the first special symbol and the display result specifying command for the second special symbol may be different.

In addition, instead of the game control microcomputer 100 transmitting the display result designation command, the probability change big hit A / the probability change big hit B / the probability change big hit D / the probability change big hit E / the probability change big hit F / the normal big hit A / the normal big hit B / ordinary big hit C / small hit A / small hit B / small hit C / outside, a variation pattern command is determined corresponding to each of
0 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying stoppage of variable display of the second special symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command transmitted from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. B000 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of the first big hit game (first big hit start specifying command: first fanfare specifying command). B001 (H) is an effect control command for designating the end of the first big hit game (first big hit end specifying command: first ending specifying command). B002 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the start of the second big hit game (second big hit start specifying command: second fanfare specifying command). B003 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the end of the second big hit game (second big hit end specifying command: second ending specifying command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) for specifying the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of a special winning opening) for designating a display during a round during a big hit game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) for specifying a display after the round during the big hit game (display of an interval between rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening in a state where the first number of retained memories has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening in a state where the second number of stored memories has not reached four. Note that a command indicating the first number of retained storages may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second number of retained storages may be transmitted as the second effective start winning designation command. In the example, the first effective start winning designation command and the second effective start winning designation command are commands indicating that there is a start winning.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is in the first customer waiting state (the first special symbol has not been changed,
This is an effect control command (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command) for designating that the first hold storage is not stored. Command D001 (H) is in the second customer waiting state (second
This is an effect control command (second customer waiting demonstration display designation command) for designating that the special symbol has not been changed and the second hold storage has not been stored. The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (
H) is an effect control command (low-precision / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (highly accurate / first) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state.
KT background designation command). The command E003 (H) indicates that the gaming state is a high probability / second K
This is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display in the T state.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 is a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11.
When the above-described effect control command is received from the audio control board 13, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 18-6 and 18-7, and the display state of the lamp is changed. To output tone number data. Note that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 18-6 and 18-7 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command relating to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

FIGS. 18-8 and 18-9 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. It should be noted that the case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol, and This is the case where the game is not during the first big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks the value of the first reserved storage number (step 138IWS51).
A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is sent to the effect control CPU1.
20 (step 138 IWS 52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100
02 is read out and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (Step 138IWS53A), and the first reserved memory is stored. The value of the number is reduced by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is reduced by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 138IW).
S54A). That is, in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is converted into the first reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the first reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, and 4 in order. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS55A). Specifically, when the probability variable flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is the low probability / non-KT state, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variable flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background designation command is issued.
When the probable variable flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is the high probability / first KT state, and when the probable / first KT background designation command is issued, the probable variable flag is on and the high base flag is off. , A high probability / second KT background designation command is determined and the high probability / second KT background designation command is transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step 138IWS56A). Specifically, if the second big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 138I without performing the processing after step 138IWS57A.
Shift to WS001A. With this, when the change of the first special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly lose regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 138IWS56A, a process of setting an outlier random number value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by proceeding to step 138IWS58A, any of the starting prizes can be obtained. May be forcibly removed regardless of whether the hit determination random number has been acquired.

Also, apart from the big hit determination, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make the small hit, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 138IWS56A,
Steps 138IWS57A to 138IWS62A are not performed, and the hit determination random number (
By setting a random number value (fixed value) of the outlier as the hit determination random number used for the big hit determination or a completely different random number, and performing the small hit determination,
Regardless of which random number for collision determination has been acquired at the time of the start winning, the game may be forcibly removed.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads out the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 138IWS57A).
), And executes the big hit determination module (step 138IWS58A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In addition, in step 138IWS58A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit using one of the non-probability change big hit determination table and the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the game state. If you decide to win a jackpot (
(Step 138IWS59A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating a big hit based on the change display of the first special symbol (step 138IWS60A). Then, it is determined whether the big hit type is the probable big hits A to F or the normal big hits A to C based on the hit type determining random number (step 138IWS).
61A), and stores the jackpot type (step 138IWS62A), and step 014IWS.
001A.

If it is determined in step 138IWS59A that no big hit has occurred, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 138IWS6).
3A). The small hit determination module uses a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination)
This is a program for determining a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 138IWS64A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is made based on the change display of the first special symbol (step 138IWS64A). Step 138IWS65A). Also,
The small hit type is any of the small hit A, the small hit B, and the small hit C based on the hit type determining random number (which may be a small hit type determining random number different from the big hit type determining random number). Is determined (step 138IWS66A), and the small hit type is stored (step 138IWS).
S67A), and proceeds to step 014IWS001A.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 18-1 (B), since the small hit determination value is not assigned to the small hit determination table 138IW130b for the first special symbol, step 138 is performed.
In the IWS 63A, the game control microcomputer 100 decides not to make a small hit with a probability of 100%.

In addition, without being limited to the processing mode shown in the present example, for example, when it is determined not to make a big hit, the lottery process of whether or not to make a small hit is not performed and step 014 is unconditionally performed as it is.
By shifting to IWS001A, a shift may be made at a probability of 100%. With such a configuration, the processing of steps 138IWS63A to S67A becomes unnecessary. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which, when it is determined that a small hit is not to be made, a small hit is determined with a low probability.

In step 014IWS001A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is “0”. Transition. If the value of the high base counter is not “0”, ie, low probability / first KT state or high probability / first
When controlled to the KT state and the first transition condition is set, the CPU 103 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 014IWS002A) and determines whether or not the value has become “0”. (Step 014IWS003A). If the value of the high base counter is "0"
If not, the process proceeds to step 014IWS009A, and if the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the CPU 103 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 014IWS004A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets an extension flag indicating that the same control as in the high base state is extended for the ordinary electric accessory (step 014IWS005A).

Next, the CPU 103 switches from the first KT state to the second
It is confirmed whether or not a second KT transition flag indicating transition to the KT state is set (step 014IWS006A). If the second KT shift flag has not been set, the CPU 103 resets a special figure time reduction flag indicating that the shortening control of the special symbol variable display is being performed (step 014IWS007A). Then, Step 014IWS009
Move to A. On the other hand, when the second KT shift flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second KT shift flag (step 014IWS008A). Then, control goes to a step 014IWS009A.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, the high base flag is set and the number of times of performing the variable display in the high base state is managed because the low probability / high base state is normally used at the end of the big hit game based on any of the big hits A to C. (Low probability / first KT state) and 40, 65 or 90 times of fluctuation display are executed, and a high probability / high base at the end of the big hit game based on any of the probable big hits BF. Controlled to state (high probability / first KT state) 40 times, 6
This is the case where the variable display is executed 5 times or 90 times.

When the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled after the big hit game based on the normal big hit A, the 90th variation display is executed, and the big hit game based on the normal big hit B is executed. Is controlled to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the game, the 65th variation display is executed, and after the big hit game based on the normal big hit C ends, the low probability / high base state (Low probability / first KT state), the 40th variation display is executed, and in steps 014IWS003A and S003B, Y
And the high base flag is reset in steps 014IWS004A and S004B, and the special figure time saving flag is reset in steps 014IWS007A and S007B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)). become.

In addition, if the high-probability / high-base state (high-probability / first KT state) is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on any of the probable changing big hits B, E, and F, the 90th change display is executed. High probability / high base state (high probability /
When the 65th variation display is executed in the case of being controlled to the (first KT state), the control is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit D. In such a case, when the 40th variation display is executed, step 014IWS003A
, S003B, Y is determined and the high base flag is reset in steps 014IWS004A and S004B, while the special figure time saving flag is not reset, and the high probability / low base state (
(High probability / second KT state).

In step 014IWS009A, when the first small hit flag is set (Y in step 014IWS009A), the CPU 103 sets the small hit count indicating the number of occurrences of the small hitting game state required to satisfy the second shift condition. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is “0” (step 014IWS010A).
If the transition condition has not been set, the process proceeds to step 138IWS68A. If the value of the small hit counter is not “0”, that is, after the big hit game based on either the large hit E or F, the control is controlled to the high probability / first KT state (first KT state B), and the second shift is performed. If the condition is set, the CPU 103 subtracts “1” from the value of the small hit counter (step 014IWS011A), and determines whether or not the value has become “0” (step 0).
14 IWS012A). If the value of the small hit counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 138IWS68A, and if it becomes "0", the CPU 103 resets the high base flag (step 014IWS013A) and sets the extension flag. (Step 0
14IWS014A), and resets the second KT shift flag (step 014IWS01).
5A). Then, control goes to a step 138IWS68A.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, the number of occurrences of the small hitting game state in the high base state by setting the high base flag is controlled by the high probability / high at the end of the big hit game based on either the probable variable big hit E or F. This is a case where the state is controlled to the base state (high probability / first KT state).

Then, if the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game based on any of the jackpot jackpots E, the 30 If the game is controlled in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit F, when the 70th small hit game state occurs,
In steps 014IWS01A and S012B, it is determined as Y and step 014IWS01 is performed.
While the high base flag is reset in 3A and S013B, the special figure time saving flag is not reset, and the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

Then, in step 138IWS68A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 138IWS68A). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 138IWS68A is determined.

In this characteristic part 014IW, step 014IWS001 in the first special symbol normal processing is performed.
A to 014 IWS015A, the number of times corresponding to the set first transition condition (4
When starting the variable display of the 0th, 65th, or 90th time), or when starting the variable display of the small hit of the 30th or 70th time corresponding to the set second transition condition, The high base flag is reset so that the high base state is shifted to the low base state. On the other hand, in the feature portion 014IW, 40, 65 in the high base state.
During the 90th fluctuation display, a battle effect (which will be described later in detail) indicating whether or not the high base state is continued and whether or not to shift to the small hit RUSH is executed. ing. Therefore, for example, when the high base flag is reset at the start of the 40th, 65th, and 90th fluctuations, and the operation mode (specifically, the pre-opening time and the opening time) of the normal electric accessory changes, the battle effect is terminated. In addition, there is a possibility that the player will know that the high base state ends. Therefore, in the present feature part 014IW, step 014IWS004
A, In S013A, the high base flag is reset, and at step 014IWS
If the extension flag is set in 005A and S014A, and if the extension flag is set, in step 138IWS3704 to S3706 of the ordinary symbol stop processing to be described later and in steps 138IWS3803 to S3705 of the normal electric accessory pre-opening processing, the ordinary electric It is configured such that the same control as in the high base state is performed for opening of the accessory. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that the high base state has ended. Note that the extension flag is set in step 138IW201 of the first special symbol stop processing.
Reset at 4A.

The present invention is not limited to the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 014IW. When the variable display corresponding to the set first transition condition (the 40th, 65th, or 90th) is finished, or when the second display is set. When the fluctuation display (or the small hitting game state), which is the small hit of the number of times (the 30th or 70th hit) corresponding to the shift condition, is ended, the high base flag is reset, and the high base state is shifted to the low base state. May be configured.

FIG. 18-10 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not a special figure time reduction flag indicating that the special symbol variation display is being shortened is being controlled. (Step 138 IWS 1700 A). In this example, by setting the special figure time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the special symbol change display, it is more advantageous to execute the change display of the second special symbol (FIG. 18-2). To FIG. 18-4), a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 10
0 selects the non-KT first special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 18-2 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 138IW).
S1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state)
The microcomputer 100 for game control selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 18B as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 138IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 138IWS1701A,
Which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 18-2 is to be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Is determined (step 138 IWS 1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, a variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (
Step 138 IWS 1704A).

Also, in step 138 IWS 1703 A, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol
Is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and starts measuring the variation time (step 138IWS1705A), and the first special symbol display device The variable display of the first special symbol in 4A is started (step 138IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing (step 138IWS1707A).

FIG. 18-11 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol change process, the CPU 10
First, if not yet transmitted, one of the display result designation commands is sent to the effect control CPU 120 based on the result of determining whether or not to make a big hit and the result of determining the big hit type.
(Step 138 IWS 1120 A).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a fluctuation interruption flag indicating that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol being executed is suspended (measurement of the fluctuation time) is set (step 138IWS1121A). If not, subtract 1 from the first variable time timer (
When the first variable time timer times out (step 138IWS1122A) (step 138IWS1123A), control is performed to transmit a symbol fixing designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 138IWS1125A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 138I).
WS1126A). Whether the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, The second showing that a big hit will be made based on the change display of the second special symbol
The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the big hit flag is set. If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 138I.
The process shifts to WS1124A to perform control of transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS1124A), and also sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A). Update (step 138)
IWS1125A).

When the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 10
3 confirms whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (
Step 138IWS1127A). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103
It is confirmed whether the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating (step 138IWS1128A).
If the big hit is fluctuating, the process shifts to step 138IWS1124A and the CPU for effect control.
The control for transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the CPU 120 is performed (step 138IWS1124A).
), The value of the first special figure process flag is set to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A).
) Is updated (step 138IWS1125A). Step 138
Before executing the process of the IWS 1125A, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag. On the other hand, if the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the CPU 103 sets the change interruption flag (step 138IWS1129A).

If the fluctuation interruption flag is set in step 138 IWS 1121 A, C
The PU 103 checks whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 138IWS1130A). If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed, the fluctuation interruption flag is reset (step 138). 138IWS1131A).

By executing the processing of step 138IWS1126A, this characteristic unit 014I
In W, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol,
The variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which a big hit occurs in the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time does not occur. Step 138 IWS1127A
If the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol which becomes a big hit by the processing of ~ 138 IWS 1128A, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly made. When a small hit occurs as a display result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, a situation where a big hit occurs as a display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variable display of the first special symbol is determined to be forcible, based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S111A, the decorative display variable display result is displayed. Control is performed to forcibly display the missing symbol.

In addition, by executing the processing of steps 138IWS1127A to 138IWS1129A, in the present feature part 014IW, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is to be lost, the execution is performed. Suspended the floating display of the first special symbol inside (
The measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted). In the case where a small hit is provided as a display result of the first special symbol change display, the first special symbol change display is performed during the execution of the second special symbol change display.
When the change display of the special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the change display of the second special symbol may be forcibly stopped or interrupted (measurement of the change time is interrupted).

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 138)
N) of the IWS 1125A, the processing is terminated as it is.

FIG. 18-12 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 resets the extension flag if it has been set (
(Step 138IWS2014A), the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Step 138IWS2015A). Next, the CPU 103
Determines whether the first big hit flag is set (step 138IWS20).
16A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal 1 (
A jackpot signal output flag indicating that a jackpot game is being externally output and a jackpot signal 2 (a signal indicating that the game is being played) are set externally (step 138IWS).
2022A). In the characteristic portion 014IW, based on the setting of the jackpot signal output flag in step 138IWS2022A, the information output process (step S23) is executed, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal 2 , The external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening timer before opening (step 138 IWS20).
24A), set the round 1 release pattern data according to the jackpot type (step 1)
38IWS2025A), sets "1" to a round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot (step 138IWS2026A), and sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step 138IWS2027A). .

If the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 138IWS2016A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 014IWS050A).

If the first small hit flag is set (Y in step 014IWS050A)
The CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-open timer (step 014IWS051A).
The special winning opening opening pattern data corresponding to the small hit type is set (step 014IWS).
052A), and transmits a small hit start designation command (step 014IWS053A).
The value of the special figure process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first small hit opening pre-processing (step 01).
4IWS054A).

If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step 014 IWS050A)
), The CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 138IWS2028A).

In the present example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right strike notification that prompts the player to fire a game ball to the right of the game area. I have. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification for prompting the player to fire the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 as the right strike notification can be executed. ing.

However, in this example, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right hit notification and the launch promotion notification are not executed. In this state, when the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening, the right hit notification is performed. (In this case, since the game is in the gate waiting state, even if a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening, the first special symbol change display is not immediately started but the first hold storage is performed). Becomes).

Conversely, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, a sound output of a small volume or a small screen display). Thus, a left-handed notification that prompts the player to perform a shooting operation of a game ball to the left of the game area may be performed. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a sound output of a large volume, Left-handed notification may be performed by a large-screen display). With such a configuration, the launch notification can be accurately performed. In particular, with the above-described configuration, for a player who accidentally fires a game ball to the right of the game area, a slight left-handed notification is made in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is low. , For players who intentionally perform a right-hand operation,
A left-handed notification may be performed in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high.
With such a configuration, it is possible to urge a player who intentionally performs a right-hand operation to return to a left-hand operation from a store clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, a left-handed notification may be made when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. Passing gate 4
In 1, when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-hitting notification is performed, and a specific number smaller than the predetermined number in the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is performed. A left strike notification may be made when more than one (for example, one) game ball is detected.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the gate passing designation command in the normal state (low probability state), it executes a left strike notification process, and in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first valid start A winning designation command or the like. Upon receiving the general winning opening winning designation command, a right strike notification process may be executed.

Also, for example, an external signal is not output in the detection of a game ball at the passage gate 41, while an external signal is output in the detection of a game ball at the second start winning opening or the special winning opening. You may.

In the present feature part 014IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be ended and the left-handed notification may be performed.

FIG. 18-13 is a flowchart showing the first gate passage waiting process (step S114A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU
103 checks whether a detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 1).
38IWS2501A). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 1
03, if set, resets the probable change flag indicating the probable change state, the high base flag, the special figure time saving flag, and the second KT shift flag, and resets the value of the high base number counter and the small hit number counter to 0. Clear (step 138 IWS2504A). Then, CPU1
03 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step 138IWS2505A), and sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first big hit opening pre-processing (step 1).
38IWS2506A).

In the characteristic portion 014IW, the first gate passing waiting process is executed, so that the big hit game is not immediately started when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol, but the pass gate 41 is started. , And a transition to a big hit game is made on condition that the game ball passes through and is detected by the gate switch 21.

FIGS. 18-14 and 18-15 are flowcharts showing the first big hit end process (step S118A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first big hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a big hit end display timer is set (step 1).
38IWS2200A), if the big hit end display timer is set, step 1
Then, the flow shifts to 38IWS2204A. If the big hit end display timer is not set,
The first big hit flag is reset (step 138IWS2201A), and control for transmitting the first big hit end designation command is performed (step 138IWS2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step 138IWS220).
3A), the process ends.

In step 138IWS2204A, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 138IWS2204A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 138IWS2205A). If not, the process ends.

If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 138 IWS2205A), the CP
U103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the probability variable jackpot A (step 138IWS2206A). It is to be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is the jackpot type A, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 138IWS62A of the first special symbol normal process. If it is the probability change jackpot A, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag indicating that the state is the probability change state, and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step 138IWS2207A).
At the same time, a special figure time reduction flag indicating that the shortening control of the special symbol variable display is being performed is set, and the state shifts to the KT state (step 138IWS2208A). Then, step 138I
The process proceeds to WS2223A. In the case of the probability variation big hit A, since the high base flag is not set, the state is controlled to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is not the probability jackpot A, the CPU 103 determines that the type of the jackpot ended this time is the probability jackpot B
To F (step 014IWS100A). In addition, whether it is any of the probability change big hits B to F is determined, for example, in step 13 of the first special symbol normal processing
It can be determined by checking the jackpot type stored in the 8IWS 62A. Probable change big hit B ~
If it is any of F, the CPU 103 sets the probable change flag and shifts to the probable change state (high probability state) (step 014IWS101A), and sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 014IWS102A). Then, the special figure time saving flag is set, and the state shifts to the KT state (step 014IWS103A). Therefore, the probability change jackpot B ~
If it is any of F, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

Further, the CPU 103 sets a value of 90, 65 or 40 in the high base number counter in accordance with the type of big hit (step 014IWS 104A). Specifically, the probability change jackpot B,
In either case of E or F, “90” is set in the high base number counter, in the case of the probability variation big hit C, “65” is set in the high base number counter, and in the case of the probability variation big hit D, ,
"40" is set to the high base number counter. Further, the CPU 103 sets the second KT shift flag (step 014IWS015A).

Further, when the type of the jackpot ended this time is either the probable variable jackpot E or F (Y in step 014IWS106A), the CPU 103 sets a value of 30 or 70 in the small hit number counter according to the jackpot type. (Step 014 IWS 107A). Specifically, in the case of the probability change big hit E, "30" is set to the small hit number counter, and the probability change big hit F
In this case, "70" is set in the small hit counter. Then, step 138IW
The process moves to S2223A.

If it is one of the large hits B to F by the processing of steps 014 IWS 100A to S105A, the high base number counter and the second KT shift flag are set. That is, the setting of the first transition condition is performed. Therefore, after the big hit game based on any of the probable big hits B to F, the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Therefore, it is determined as N in Step 014IWS001A of the first special symbol stop processing, and Step 014IWS
A subtraction process of the high base number counter of 002A is performed. Then, until the next big hit occurs or the set first transition condition is satisfied, the high probability / high base state (high probability / 1K
T state) is maintained. When the set first transition condition is satisfied,
The state transitions from the first KT state to the second KT state.

Further, in the case of one of the large hits E and F by the processing of steps 014 IWS 106A to S107A, the small hit count counter is further set. That is, the setting of the second transition condition is also performed. Therefore, in the case of the probability change big hits E and F among the probability change big hits B to F, the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. Since the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the first
It is determined to be N in step 014IWS010A of the special symbol stop processing, and step 014IW
The subtraction process of the small hit number counter of S011A is performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs or one of the set first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied. Will be done. Also,
When either one of the first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied, the state transitions from the first KT state to the second KT state. With this configuration, the control is controlled to the first KT state A when the hit is one of the probable big hits B to D, and is controlled to the first KT state B when the hit is either the positive hit E or F. Will be done.

If it is not any of the large hits B to F (that is, if it is any of the normal big hits A to C), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 014IWS108A), and Set the time reduction flag and shift to the KT state (
Step 014 IWS109A). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value of 90, 65 or 40 in the high base number counter in accordance with the type of big hit (step 014IWS110A).
). Specifically, in the case of the normal big hit A, “90” is set in the high base number counter, and in the case of the normal big hit B, “65” is set in the high base number counter, and the normal big hit C is set.
In this case, "40" is set in the high base number counter. Then, step 138I
The process proceeds to WS2223A. Therefore, if it is one of the normal jackpots A to C, the state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). If the hit is one of the normal jackpots A to C, a value is set in the high base number counter (that is, the first transition condition is set). Since the value is not 0, N is set at step 014IWS001A of the first special symbol stop processing.
Thus, the subtraction process of the high base number counter of step 014IWS002A is performed. Then, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition is satisfied. Further, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the state transits from the first KT state to the non-KT state.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) (step 138IWS2223A).

FIGS. 18-16 and 18-17 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is the second special symbol normal process.
This is a case where the value of the special figure process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. Note that the case where the value of the second special figure process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing is as follows.
While the second special symbol display device 4B is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and during the second big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times), the small hit game (
This is the case where the special variable winning ball device 17 is not open).

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks the value of the second reserved storage number (step 138IWS51).
B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked.

If the second number of stored memories is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is sent to the effect control CPU1.
20 (step 138 IWS 52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100
02, the respective random number values stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer are read and stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 138IWS53B), and the second reserved storage is performed. The value of the number is reduced by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is reduced by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 138IW).
S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is represented by the second reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the second reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, and 4 in order. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 138IWS55B). It should be noted that the specific way of transmitting the background designating command is determined in step 138 IWS of the first special symbol normal processing.
This is the same as the processing indicated by 55A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 138IWS56B). Specifically, if the first big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 138I without performing the processing after step 138IWS57B.
Move to WS001B. With this, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly be out regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 138IWS56B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a hit as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 138IWS58B, so that at the time of the start winning, May be forcibly removed regardless of whether the hit determination random number has been acquired.

In addition, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 138IWS56B, the process of steps 138IWS57B to S62B is not performed, and the random number for hit determination (a random number common to the random number for hit determination used for the big hit determination. Or a completely different random number)
By setting a random number value (fixed value) for the outlier and performing the small hit determination, the hit may be forcibly determined to be absent regardless of which hit determination random number was obtained at the time of the start winning. .

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads the random number for collision determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 138IWS57B).
), And executes the big hit determination module (step 138IWS58B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In addition, in step 138IWS58B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit using one of the non-probable change big hit determination table and the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state. If you decide to win a jackpot (
(Step 138IWS59B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating a big hit based on the change display of the second special symbol (Step 138IWS60B). Then, it is determined whether the big hit type is the probable big hits A to F or the normal big hits A to C based on the hit type determining random number (step 138IWS).
61B), and stores the jackpot type (step 138IWS62B), and step 014IWS.
001B.

If it is determined in step 138IWS59B that it is not a big hit, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 138IWS6).
3B). The small hit determination module uses a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination)
This is a program for determining a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 138IWS64B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 138IWS64B). Step 138IWS65B). Also,
The small hit type is any of the small hit A, the small hit B, and the small hit C based on the hit type determining random number (which may be a small hit type determining random number different from the big hit type determining random number). Is determined (step 138IWS66B), and the small hit type is stored (step 138IW).
S67B) Then, the flow shifts to step 014IWS001B.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 18-1 (C), if the small hit is not determined in the small hit determination table 138IW130c for the second special symbol, the small hit is determined. In addition to the above, there is a case in which a big hit may occur, but if a big hit is not determined, a small hit may be determined with a probability of 100%. In this case, without being limited to the processing mode shown in the present example, for example, when it is determined not to make a big hit, the second processing is unconditionally performed without performing a lottery process of whether to make a small hit. By setting the small hit flag, a small hit may be achieved with a probability of 100%. With such a configuration, the processing of steps 138IWS63B to S67B becomes unnecessary. In addition, the configuration may be such that when it is determined not to make a big hit, it may be determined to be a deviation with a low probability.

In step 014IWS001B, the CPU 103 sets the value of the high base number counter to “
It is determined whether it is “0” or not, and if it is “0” (Y in step 014IWS001B),
The process proceeds to step 014IWS009B. When the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, when the state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state or the high probability / first KT state and the first transition condition is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base The value of the number counter is decremented by "1" (step 014IWS002B), and it is determined whether or not the value has become "0" (step 0).
14 IWS003B). If the value of the high base frequency counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step 014IWS009B, and if the value of the high base frequency counter becomes “0”, the CPU 103 resets the high base flag (step 014IWS004B), and sets an extension flag (step 014IWS005B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second KT shift flag has been set (
Step 014IWS006B). If the second KT transition flag is not set,
The CPU 103 resets the special figure time saving flag (step 014IWS007B). Then, control goes to a step 014IWS009B. On the other hand, if the second KT shift flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second KT shift flag (step 01).
4IWS008B). Then, control goes to a step 014IWS009B.

In step 014IWS009B, when the first small hit flag is set (Y in step 014IWS009B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the small hit count counter is "0" (step 014IWS009B). 014IWS010B), if it is “0”, that is, if the second transition condition has not been set, step 138IWS
Go to 68B. If the value of the small hit counter is not “0”, that is, after the big hit game based on either the large hit E or F, the control is controlled to the high probability / first KT state (first KT state B), and the second shift is performed. If the condition has been set, the CPU 103 subtracts “1” from the value of the small hit counter (step 014IWS011B), and determines whether or not the value has become “0” (step 014IWS012B). If the value of the small hit counter does not become "0", the flow shifts to step 138IWS68B.
U103 resets the high base flag (step 014IWS01B), sets the extension flag (step 014IWS014B), and resets the second KT shift flag (step 014IWS014B).
Step 014IWS015B). Then, the flow shifts to step 138IWS68B.

Then, in step 138IWS68B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 138IWS68B). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 138IWS68B is determined.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) illustrated in FIG. 18-10. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 18-10, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process has been described. However, in the second variation pattern setting processing, the CPU 103 firstly performs step 1
The same processing as that of the 38IWS1700A is performed, and it is confirmed whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, it is not in the KT state)
The game control microcomputer 100 selects the non-KT second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 18C as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability change flag and the high base flag are set or not, and As a variation pattern table for determining a pattern, any of the second KT-time second patterns shown in FIGS. 18-3 (D) to 18-4 (j) is used.
Select the special pattern variation pattern table. For example, if the probable change flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first change is shown in FIG.
) Is selected, and if the big hit game based on any of the big hits A to C is ended, the change is from 2 to 39, 41 to 64, or 66 to 89. -3 (E), the second special symbol variation pattern table is selected, and the normal big hit A
If the 40th, 65th, or 90th change has occurred since the end of the big hit game based on any one of C to C, the second special symbol change pattern table shown in FIG. For example, if both the probable change flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first change is the second special symbol change shown in FIG. If the pattern table is selected, and if it is the 2nd to 39th, 41st to 64th or 66th to 89th variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 18-4 (I) is selected. Also, for example, if the probable variable flag is on and the high base flag is off (if high probability / second KT state)
And the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 18-4 (j).

The second special symbol variation process is the first special symbol variation process (step S1) shown in FIG.
12A). That is, in the first special symbol variation process shown in FIG.
If "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol variation process has been described. In the characteristic portion 014IW, since no small hit is provided as a display result of the first special symbol change display, in the second special symbol change process, the first special symbol change process shown in FIG. Step 138IW1121A, Step 138IW1127A to Step 13
The processing corresponding to 8IW1131A may be omitted.

FIG. 18-18 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 resets the extension flag if it has been set (
In step 138IWS2014B), the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol (step 138IWS2015B). Next, the CPU 103
Determines whether the second big hit flag is set (step 138IWS20).
16B). If the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 138IWS2021B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), step 1 is performed as it is.
Then, the flow shifts to 38IWS2024B.

If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the CPU 10
No. 3 sets a jackpot signal output flag (step 138IWS2022B). In the characteristic portion 014IW, based on the setting of the jackpot signal output flag in step 138IWS2022B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal 2 , The external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening timer before opening (step 138 IWS20).
24B), and sets round 1 release pattern data according to the jackpot type (step 1)
38IWS2025B), and sets “1” in the round number counter (step 138IW).
S2026B), the value of the second special map process flag is set to a value corresponding to the second gate passage waiting process (step 138IWS2027B).

If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 138IWS2016B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 014IWS050B).

When the second small hit flag is set (Y in step 014IWS050B)
The CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-open timer (step 014IWS051B).
The special winning opening opening pattern data corresponding to the small hit type is set (step 014IWS).
052B), and transmits a small hit start designation command (step 014IWS053B).
The value of the special figure process flag is set to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening pre-processing (step 01).
4IWS054B).

If the second small hit flag is not set (N in step 014IWS050B)
), The CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 138IWS2028B).

FIG. 18-19 is a flowchart showing the second gate passage waiting process in the second special symbol process process. In the second gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step 138IWS2501B).
. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends.
If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 138IWS2502B). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), step 138I is left as it is.
The process moves to WS2504B.

If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), CP
U103 sets the jackpot signal output flag (step 138IWS2503B).
In the characteristic unit 014IW, based on the setting of the jackpot signal output flag in step 138IWS2503B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal 2 is output. If the external output is not being performed, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, the special figure time saving flag, and the second KT shift flag, and clears the values of the high base number counter and the small hit number counter to 0 (step 138IWS2504B). ). Next, the CPU 103 transmits the second big hit start designation command (step 138IWS2505B), and sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second big hit opening pre-processing (step 138I).
WS2506B).

In the characteristic portion 014IW, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the second gate passage waiting process. , And a transition to a big hit game is made on condition that the game ball passes through and is detected by the gate switch 21.

FIGS. 18-20 and 18-21 are flowcharts showing the second big hit end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second big hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a big hit end display timer is set (step 138IWS2200B).
If the big hit end display timer is set, the flow shifts to step 138 IWS2204B. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step 138IWS2201B), and control for transmitting the second big hit end designation command is performed (step 138IWS2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step 138 IWS 2203 B), and the process ends.

In step 138IWS2204B, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 138IWS2204B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 138IWS2205B). If not, the process ends.

If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 138IWS2205B), the CP
U103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the probable variable jackpot A (step 138IWS2206B). It is to be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is the large hit jackpot A, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 138IWS62B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the probability change jackpot A, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag and sets the probability change state (
The state shifts to the high probability state (step 138IWS2207B), and at the same time, sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 138IWS2208B). Then, the flow shifts to step 138IWS2223B. In the case of the probability variation big hit A, since the high base flag is not set, the state is controlled to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is not the probability jackpot A, the CPU 103 determines that the type of the jackpot ended this time is the probability jackpot B
To F (step 014IWS100B). In addition, whether it is any of the probable variable big hits BF is determined, for example, in step 13 of the second special symbol normal processing.
The determination can be made by checking the jackpot type stored in the 8IWS 62B. Probable change big hit B ~
If it is any of F, the CPU 103 sets the probable change flag and shifts to the probable change state (high probability state) (step 014IWS101B), and sets the high base flag and moves to the high base state (step 014IWS102B). Then, the special figure time saving flag is set and the state shifts to the KT state (step 014IWS103B). Therefore, the probability change jackpot B ~
If it is any of F, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

Further, the CPU 103 sets a value of 90, 65 or 40 in the high base number counter according to the type of big hit (step 014IWS104B). Specifically, the probability change jackpot B,
In either case of E or F, “90” is set in the high base number counter, in the case of the probability variation big hit C, “65” is set in the high base number counter, and in the case of the probability variation big hit D, ,
"40" is set to the high base number counter. Further, the CPU 103 sets a second KT shift flag (step 014IWS015B).

Further, when the type of the jackpot ended this time is either the probable variable jackpot E or F (Y in step 014IWS106B), the CPU 103 sets a value of 30 or 70 in the small hit number counter according to the jackpot type. (Step 014 IWS 107B). Specifically, in the case of the probability change big hit E, "30" is set to the small hit number counter, and the probability change big hit F
In this case, "70" is set in the small hit counter. Then, step 138IW
The process moves to S2223B.

In the case of any one of the large hits B to F by the processing of steps 014IWS100B to S105B, the high base number counter and the second KT shift flag are set. That is, the setting of the first transition condition is performed. Therefore, after the big hit game based on any of the probable big hits B to F, the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Therefore, it is determined as N in step 014IWS001B of the second special symbol stop processing, and step 014IWS
A subtraction process of the high base number counter of 002B is performed. Then, until the next big hit occurs or the set first transition condition is satisfied, the high probability / high base state (high probability / 1K
T state) is maintained. When the set first transition condition is satisfied,
The state transitions from the first KT state to the second KT state.

Further, in the case of any one of the large hits E and F by the processing of steps 014 IWS 106B to S107B, the small hit count counter is further set. That is, the setting of the second transition condition is performed. Therefore, in the case of the probability change big hits E and F among the probability change big hits B to F, the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. Since the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the second
It is determined as N in step 014IWS010B of the special symbol stop processing, and step 014IW
The subtraction process of the small hit counter in S011B is performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs or one of the set first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied. Will be. When either one of the set first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied, the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state. Therefore, if it is any of the probability variable big hits B to D, it is controlled to the first KT state A, and if it is any of the variable big hits E and F, it is controlled to the first KT state B. Become.

If it is not any of the probable big hits B to F (that is, the normal big hits B and C are not obtained in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the normal big hits are A), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and sets the high base flag. With the transition to the base state (step 014 IWS108B),
The special figure time saving flag is set and the state shifts to the KT state (step 014IWS109B). Further, the CPU 103 sets the value of 90 in the high base number counter (step 014I).
WS110B). Then, the flow shifts to step 138IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of the normal jackpot A, the state is controlled to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). Also, when the hit is the normal big hit A, a value is set in the high base number counter (that is, the first transition condition is set), and the value of the high base number counter is not 0 in the subsequent variable display. Step 014IWS001B of the second special symbol stop processing
Is determined to be N, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter of step 014IWS002B is performed. Then, until the next big hit occurs or the set first transition condition is satisfied,
The low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) will be maintained. When the set first transition condition is satisfied, the state transits from the first KT state to the non-KT state.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 138IWS2223B).

Here, the transition of the game state in the present feature part 014IW will be described. Fig. 18-22
Is an explanatory diagram for explaining a manner of transition of a gaming state in the feature section 014IW.
In FIG. 18-22, among the arrows indicating the transition of the game state, the solid arrows indicate the transition of the game state triggered by the end of the big hit game of the corresponding big hit type. The broken arrow indicates a transition of the game state triggered by the establishment of the first transition condition of executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the first KT state A or the first KT state C. Further, the dotted arrow indicates that one of the first transition condition of executing the predetermined change display in the first KT state B and the second transition condition of occurrence of the predetermined small hitting game state is satisfied. This shows the transition of the gaming state as an opportunity.

First, in the characteristic portion 014IW, in a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), a player performs a shooting operation (left-handed) of a game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning prize mainly occurs in the first start winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the change display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the probability change big hits A to F and the normal big hits A to C mainly occur.

As shown in FIG. 18-22, when the probability change big hit A occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) after the end of the big hit game, The high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 138I)
WS2206A to S2208A).

Also, if any of the probable big hits B to D occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game,
The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first shift condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type is satisfied (step 014IWS001B-0).
14 IWS008B, steps 014IWS100A to 014IWS105A etc.).

In addition, when either of the probability change big hits E and F occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game,
Either the first transition condition that the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type is executed, or the second shift condition that the small hitting game state occurs the number of times according to the big hit type The high probability / high base state is maintained until the transition condition is satisfied (step 014 IWS)
001B to 014IWS015B, Step 014IWS100A to 014IWS107
A etc.).

Also, if any one of the normal jackpots A to C occurs in the low probability / low base state, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game,
The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type is satisfied (step 014IWS001B-0).
14 IWS 007B, steps 014 IWS 109A to 014 IWS 110A, etc.).

After shifting to the KT state (high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state, high-probability / low-base state), in this characteristic portion 014IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. To launch the game ball (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning prize occurs mainly in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, when the big hit occurs in the KT state, the probable variable big hits A to F and the normal big hit A mainly occur.

As shown in FIG. 18-22, when the probability change big hit A occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), after the big hit game ends, the high probability / low base state (high probability / high (2nd KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 138IWS2206B to S2208B).

If any of the probable big hits B to D occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / high
(1st KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first shift condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type is satisfied (step 014IWS001B to 014IWS001B). 014IWS008B, step 014IWS100B to 014
IWS105B etc.).

In addition, if any of the probable big hits E and F occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability /
(First KT state), the first transition condition that the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the number of times corresponding to the big hit type is executed, and the second shift condition that the number of small hitting game states corresponding to the big hit type occurs. The high probability / high base state is maintained until one of the transition conditions is satisfied (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS015B, step 014IWS10).
0B-014 IWS107B etc.). In the characteristic portion 014IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the probability of a large hit (that is, any of the large hits BF) is 50% in total (FIG. 18). -1 (E)), once the high probability / high base state is reached, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%.

In addition, when a normal jackpot A (normal jackpots B and C do not occur when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed) occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). After the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and is kept low until the next big hit occurs or the first shift condition of executing the variable display 90 times is satisfied. The probability / high base state is maintained (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS0).
07B, steps 014IWS108B to 014IWS110B, etc.).

Further, in the feature portion 014IW, if any of the probable big hits B to D occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, the next big hit occurs. If the first transition condition of executing the variable display of the number of times corresponding to the type of the big hit is satisfied without performing, the transition is made to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) (step 014I).
WS001B to 014IWS008B, steps 014IWS100B to 014IWS1
05B etc.). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18-22, when the probability change big hit B occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, the next big hit is made. When the fluctuation display is performed 90 times without occurrence, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Also, when the probability change big hit C occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, the fluctuation display is performed 65 times without the next big hit occurring. , High probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state)
Move to Also, if the probability change big hit D occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, the fluctuation display is performed 65 times without the next big hit occurring. , Transition to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

Also, in the present feature part 014IW, if any of the probable variable big hits E and F occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, the next big hit occurs. Either the first transition condition of executing the variable display of the number of times corresponding to the big hit type or the second transition condition of generating the small hitting game state of the number of times corresponding to the big hit type is satisfied without performing Then, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS015B, steps 014IWS100B to 0014W).
14IWS107B etc.). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18-22, when the probability change big hit E occurs and shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, the next big hit is If any one of the first transition condition of the execution of the variable display 90 times and the second transition condition of the occurrence of the small hitting game state of 30 times does not occur, a high probability / low base is achieved. State (high probability / second KT state). Also, when the probability change big hit F occurs and the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, the change display is executed 90 times without the occurrence of the next big hit. If either one of the first transition condition of the first transition condition and the second transition condition of the occurrence of the small hitting game state of 70 times is satisfied, the transition is made to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). .

In addition, in addition to the probable big hits A to F shown in the characteristic portion 014IW, for example, a probable big hit G is provided, and when the probable big hit G occurs, the game shifts to the first KT state after the big hit game, and the first big hit occurs until the next big hit occurs. The 1KT state may be maintained. That is, when the probability change big hit G occurs, the first shift condition and the second shift condition are not set, and the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is looped until the next big hit occurs. Is also good. Also, in this case, the presence or absence of execution of various effects (for example, a battle rush effect or a chance battle effect battle effect to be described later, a continuation suggestion effect, and the like) between the probability variable hit G and other types of probability variable hits, and the effect pattern May be different.

As shown in FIG. 18-22, when the probability variation big hit A occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / low base state (high probability / high (2nd KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 138IWS2206B to S2208B).

Also, if any of the probability change big hits B to D occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability /
(1st KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first shift condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type is satisfied (step 014IWS001B to 014IWS001B). 014IWS008B, step 014IWS100B to 014
IWS105B etc.).

In addition, when either of the probability change big hits E and F occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability /
(First KT state), the first transition condition that the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the number of times corresponding to the big hit type is executed, and the second shift condition that the number of small hitting game states corresponding to the big hit type occurs. The high probability / high base state is maintained until one of the transition conditions is satisfied (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS015B, step 014IWS10).
0B-014 IWS107B etc.).

In addition, when the normal big hit A (the normal big hits B and C do not occur when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed) occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). After the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and is kept low until the next big hit occurs or the first shift condition of executing the variable display 90 times is satisfied. The probability / high base state is maintained (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS0).
08B, steps 014IWS108B to 014IWS110B). In the characteristic portion 014IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the normal big hit A is 35% (see FIG. 18-1 (E)). When the high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%.

Also, in the feature portion 014IW, when one of the normal jackpots A to C occurs and the game machine shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game, the next jackpot occurs. If the first transition condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the type of big hit is satisfied without performing, the transition is made to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (step 014).
IWS001B to 014IWS008B, step 014IWS108B to 014IWS
110B etc.). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18-22, a big hit A usually occurs,
In the case of shifting to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, if the change display is executed 90 times without the occurrence of the next big hit, the low probability / low base state (normal state) (Non-KT state)). Also, when the normal big hit B occurs and the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, the fluctuation display is performed 65 times without the occurrence of the next big hit. , Transition to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)). Also, when the normal big hit C occurs and the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the big hit game, the fluctuation display is executed 40 times without the occurrence of the next big hit. , Transition to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

As shown in FIG. 18-22, when the probability change big hit A occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), after the big hit game ends, the high probability / low base state (high probability / high (2nd KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 138IWS2206B to S2208B). Note that this feature part 01
In the 4IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the probability of being a large hit A is 15% when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (FIG. 18-1). (See (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%.

Also, if any of the probability change big hits B to D occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / high
(1st KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first shift condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the big hit type is satisfied (step 014IWS001B to 014IWS001B). 014IWS008B, step 014IWS100B to 014
IWS105B etc.).

In addition, if any of the probable big hits E and F occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability /
(First KT state), the first transition condition that the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the number of times corresponding to the big hit type is executed, and the second shift condition that the number of small hitting game states corresponding to the big hit type occurs. The high probability / high base state is maintained until one of the transition conditions is satisfied (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS015B, step 014IWS10).
0B-014 IWS107B etc.).

Also, when a normal jackpot A (normal jackpots B and C do not occur when the change display of the second special symbol is executed) occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). After the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and is kept low until the next big hit occurs or the first shift condition of executing the variable display 90 times is satisfied. The probability / high base state is maintained (steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS0).
07B, steps 014IWS108B to 014IWS110B, etc.).

Note that in FIG. 18-22, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the first
Although the case where the special symbol variable display is executed has been described, there is a possibility that the special special symbol variable display is executed at a low rate. In this case, when the probability change big hit A occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Also, if any of the probable variable hits B to D occurs, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state)
And the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the first transition condition of executing the variable display 90 times, 65 times or 40 times is satisfied. In addition, when either of the probability variation big hits E and F occurs, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first K
T state), and either the next big hit occurs or the first shifting condition of executing the variable display 90 times, or the second shifting condition of 30 or 70 occurrences of the small hitting game state The high probability / high base state will be maintained until one of the transition conditions is satisfied. Also, when the normal jackpot A occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state),
The low probability / high base state will be maintained until the next big hit occurs or 90 changes are displayed.

Also, in FIG. 18-22, the case where the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is described, but the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the probability change big hit A occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, probability change big hit B
If any one of -D occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs, or 90, 65, or 40 times of the variable display are displayed. The high probability / high base state is maintained until the first transition condition of execution is satisfied. Also, if any of the probability variable jackpots E and F occurs, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT
State), and either one of the first transition condition that the next big hit occurs or the execution of the variable display 90 times and the second transition condition that the small hitting game state occurs 30 or 70 times The high probability / high base state is maintained until the transition condition is satisfied. When one of the big hits A to C occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs, or 90, 65, or 40 times. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the first transition condition of executing the variable display is satisfied.

Also, in FIG. 18-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the probability change big hit A occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, probability change big hit B
If any one of -D occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs, or 90, 65, or 40 times of the variable display are displayed. The high probability / high base state is maintained until the first transition condition of execution is satisfied. Also, if any of the probability variable jackpots E and F occurs, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT
State), and either one of the first transition condition that the next big hit occurs or the execution of the variable display 90 times and the second transition condition that the small hitting game state occurs 30 or 70 times The high probability / high base state is maintained until the transition condition is satisfied. When one of the big hits A to C occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs, or 90, 65, or 40 times. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the first transition condition of executing the variable display is satisfied.

Also, in FIG. 18-22, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the probability change big hit A occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, probability change big hit B
If any one of -D occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs, or 90, 65, or 40 times of the variable display are displayed. The high probability / high base state is maintained until the first transition condition of execution is satisfied. Also, if any of the probability variable jackpots E and F occurs, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT
State), and either one of the first transition condition that the next big hit occurs or the execution of the variable display 90 times and the second transition condition that the small hitting game state occurs 30 or 70 times The high probability / high base state is maintained until the transition condition is satisfied. When one of the big hits A to C occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs, or 90, 65, or 40 times. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the first transition condition of executing the variable display is satisfied.

FIG. 18-23 is an explanatory diagram for describing an external output signal output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The award ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball signal is
This signal is output externally every time a predetermined number (10 in this example) of prize balls are paid out. Also,
The jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal board. The jackpot signal 1 is
This is a signal that is continuously output externally during the entire jackpot game (that is, a signal indicating that a jackpot game is being performed). The jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal board. The big hit signal 2 is a signal that is externally output continuously during all the big hit games and during the KT state (that is, a signal indicating that the game is being played). A special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal that is externally output based on detection of winning of a game ball in the special winning opening. The terminal 09 of the external output terminal board is assigned a signal of the expected number of prize balls. The prize ball expected number signal is a signal that is externally output each time the expected prize ball payout number reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

Note that the external signals shown in FIGS. 18 to 23 include, for example, the timing of paying out 10 prize balls, the timing of occurrence of a big hit, the timing of occurrence of a prize in a special winning opening, and the expected number of prize balls.
At the timing when the number of the external signals is reached (for example, step 138IW).
S2021A, S2023A, S2022B, S2023B, S2503B) and a timer are set, and based on the setting of those flags and the timer, an information output process (step S23) is executed to output to a hall computer or the like externally. Is done.

Next, the output timing of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 among the external output signals will be described. FIG. 18-24 is an explanatory diagram for describing the output timing of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2. In this example, when the gaming state is the normal state, step 138IW
Based on the jackpot signal output flag being set in S2022A and S2503B,
The information output process (step S23) is executed, and external output of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 is started. Thereafter, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the big hit game is finished. In the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 2 is stopped at the timing when the KT state ends. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the KT state, steps 138IWS2022A, S20
Based on the setting of the jackpot signal output flag at 22B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started. In this case, KT
Since it is in the state, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output to the outside. Thereafter, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the big hit game is finished.

First, the output timing of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / non-KT state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18-24 (
As shown in 1), when the gaming state is the normal state, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit signal is derived at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. 1 and the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is started (
Step 138 IWS2022A). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 are displayed. External output is not started, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the external output of the jackpot signal 2 are started at the timing when the game ball wants to pass through the passing gate 41 (see step 138IWS2503B).

Next, referring to FIG. 18-24 (2), the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot when the gaming state is the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) The output timing of the signal 2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18-24 (2), when the gaming state is the KT state, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. The external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started at the same timing (see step 138IWS2022A). Also, when the gaming state is the KT state, the second
Even when the special symbol change display is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the big hit signal 1 is started at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 138I).
WS2022B). As shown in FIG. 18-24 (2), in the KT state, the big hit signal 2 is continuously output to the outside.

Next, the ordinary symbol processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 18-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the ordinary symbol process process. In the ordinary symbol processing, the game control microcomputer 10
0 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 138IWS5111), and issues a gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 138)
IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passage processing (step 138).
IWS5113).

In the present characteristic portion 014IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 138IWS5111 to S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this characteristic portion 014IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also serves as an operation area. However, after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, is the gate passing waiting state before starting the big hit game? Regardless of whether the command is passed or not, a gate passage designation command is transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 determines in step 138 IWS according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag.
One of the processes shown in 5100 to S5104 is executed.

In this characteristic portion 014IW, regardless of whether or not the state is a gate passage waiting state, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 138IWS5111, the gate switch passage processing in step 138IWS5113 is executed. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the normal symbol change display is executed. May not be executed.

Further, in the present feature part 014IW, the passing gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area, but the special symbol processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Since the process is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), the process of detecting the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operation region is performed, and then the process of the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal start region. A detection process is performed.
Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 138 IWS 5113): The CPU 103 stores a gate passage memory counter (a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41).
It is determined whether or not the count value (the number of stored gate passages) has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one.
In addition, the LED of the general-purpose reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination and storing the value in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gate passages.

Ordinary symbol normal processing (step 138IWS5100): The CPU 103 is ready to start changing the ordinary symbol (for example, when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is set to step 138I
When the value indicates WS5100, specifically, the normal symbol display 20 does not display the variable display of the normal symbol, and the variable based on the fact that the symbol hits the normal symbol display 20 and the symbol is derived and displayed. If it is not during the opening and closing operation of the winning ball device 6B), the value of the number of stored gate passages is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage storage number counter is confirmed.
If the number of stored gate passages is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not a stop symbol of a normal symbol is a hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set in the ordinary symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation processing (step 138 IWS 5101).

Ordinary symbol variation processing (step 138 IWS 5101): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary symbol stopped symbol display time in the ordinary symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the ordinary symbol stop processing (step 138 IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 138IWS5102): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether or not the stopped symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is set to the ordinary symbol normal processing (step 138IWS5100).
(Specifically, “0”). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the ordinary symbol process timer is set to the time before the opening of the ordinary electric accessory, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is set in the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step 138).
IWS5103) (specifically, “3”).

Normal electric accessory opening pre-process (step 138IWS5103): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary electric accessory operating time to the ordinary symbol process timer and sets the timer. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “4”) indicating the ordinary electric auditors product activation process (step 138 IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory actuation processing (step 138IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures a normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the ordinary symbol normal processing (step 138 IWS5100).

FIG. 18-26 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal processing (step 138IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the number of stored gate passages is 0 by checking the count value of the stored number of gate passages counter (step 138IWS5121). If the number of stored gate passages is 0 (step 138 IWS)
5121, Y), the process ends as it is. If the number of stored gate passages is not 0 (N in step 138IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out a random number for normal symbol per contact determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = 1 (step 138IWS512).
2). Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the gate passage storage number counter by one and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 138IWS5123). That is, the random number for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for normal symbol determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective numbers of gate pass storage numbers are always the same as the order of the gate pass storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4 They match.

Next, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number (ordinary symbol hit determination random number value) by using a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol, and determines whether or not to hit the normal symbol. Is determined (step 138 IWS5127). Note that this feature part 01
In 4IW, in step 138IWS5127, the CPU 103 determines 100% regardless of whether the state is the probable change state, the KT state, or the high base state.
It is determined to be a normal symbol with a probability of%.

In step 138IWS5127, if the read-out normal symbol hit determination random number is within the hit range (if it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets a hit symbol as a display result (step 138IWS5128), and proceeds to step 138IWS5130. Also, in step 138IWS5127, if the read-out normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (if it is a loss), the CPU 103 sets a loss symbol as a display result (step 138IWS5129), and proceeds to step 138IWS5130. In the characteristic portion 014IW, since the general-purpose game is configured to be 100% per game regardless of the playing state, the process of step 138IWS5127 is omitted and step 1 is executed.
The processing of 38IWS5128 may be executed.

In step 138IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the ordinary symbol process timer (
Step 138: IWS5130 Y, S5131). If the high base flag has not been set, that is, if the normal state or the second KT state, the normal symbol variation time is set to 1.0 second in the ordinary symbol process timer (N, N in step 138 IWS5130).
S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation process (step 138IWS5101) (step 138IWS5133).

FIG. 18-27 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol stop processing (step 138 IWS 5102). In the ordinary symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the ordinary symbol process timer by one (step 138IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step 138IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 138 IWS 3702), the process ends.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 138IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (step 138IWS5127). Is confirmed) (step 138IWS3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol is determined by, for example, setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined as a hit in step 138IWS5127, and confirming whether or not the flag is set. Can be.

When it is determined that the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol is not a hit symbol but a lost symbol (N in step 138IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value indicating the ordinary symbol normal process (step 138IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to “0” (step 138 IWS3708).

If the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol in step 138IWS3703 (Y in step 138IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag or the extension flag is set (step 138IWS3704). Is set, that is, in the first KT state, or when the extension flag is set, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 138IWS3706). ). When the high base flag is not set, that is, when the normal state or the second KT state is set, 2.6 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 138IW).
S3705). In this feature section 014IW, the general-purpose game is set to 100 regardless of the playing state.
%, The processing of step 138 IWS 3703 may be omitted and the processing of step 138 IWS 3704 may be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step 138IWS5103) (step 1).
38IWS3707)

FIG. 18-28 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening pre-process (step 138 IWS 5103). In the normal electric accessory pre-opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by one (step 138IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 138IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 138IWS3802),
The process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal electric accessory pre-opening time has elapsed (Y in step 138IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag or the extension flag has been set ( Step 138 IWS380
3) When the high base flag is set, that is, in the first KT state, or when the extension flag is set, 5.5 seconds as the normal electric accessory opening time is set to the normal symbol process timer. It is set (step 138IWS3805). When the high base flag is not set, that is, when the normal state or the second KT state is set, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 138IWS3804).

As described above, in the characteristic portion 014IW, the normal electric accessory opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the ordinary electric accessory opening time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is set to a state in which the second start winning opening is easier to start and win than the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls are less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the method of controlling the second start winning opening so as to make it easier to start the winning when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to the method shown in the present characteristic portion 014IW. For example, the first
In the KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened). The number of times may be set to one, whereas in the first KT state, the number of times the variable prize ball device 6B is opened may be set to two). If you do that,
In the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened,
It is possible to make it easier for the second start winning opening to receive a start winning.

In addition, for example, in the first KT state, compared to the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B described above and the variable prize ball device 6B May be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step 138).
IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the ordinary electric auditors product operation process (step 138 IWS5104) (step 13).
8IWS3807).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.

The characteristic portion 014IW is configured to be controlled to one of a plurality of effect modes according to a game state. Specifically, when being controlled to the non-KT state (that is, the normal state (low probability / low base state)), the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode. When the state is controlled to the second KT state (that is, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state)), the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode.

In addition, after the jackpot game of the first special figure game, the first KT state (ie, low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) or the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state)
), The effect mode is controlled to a battle challenge mode in which a battle challenge effect is executed.

Also, after the big hit game by the second special figure game, the first KT state (that is, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) or the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state)
), The effect mode is controlled to a chance battle mode in which a chance battle effect is executed.

That is, whether the state is controlled to the low probability state or the high probability state,
Regardless of which of the state A, the first KT state B, and the first KT state C is controlled,
When the game is controlled to the first KT state after the big hit game by the first special map game, the game is controlled to the battle challenge mode, and when the game is controlled to the first KT state after the big hit game by the second special map game, the game is controlled to the chance battle mode. .

As described above, in the characteristic portion 014IW, when the first KT state is controlled after the big hit game in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, whether the state is controlled to the low probability state or the high probability state, Further, the first KT state A, the first KT state B, and the first KT state C
Irrespective of which is controlled, a battle challenge effect or a chance battle effect in a common mode is executed. Therefore, when the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect is executed, the state is controlled to the low probability state or the high probability state, and any one of the first KT state A, the first KT state B, and the first KT state C It is difficult for the player to guess whether the game is controlled or not, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

FIGS. 18 to 29 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a battle challenge effect and a chance battle effect. First, the battle challenge production will be described.

The battle challenge effect is an effect in which a moving image with a story is displayed, and the story is configured to shift in the order of the effect explanation unit, the first battle unit, the second battle unit, and the third battle unit. . Also, as shown in FIG. 18-29 (1), the first to fifteenth fluctuations after the big hit game by the first special figure game correspond to the effect description part, and the sixteenth to fortyth fluctuations correspond to the fourth fluctuation fluctuation. It corresponds to one battle part, and the 41st to 65th changes correspond to the second battle part,
The 66th change to the 90th change correspond to the third battle portion.

In the effect explanation section from the first change to the fifteenth change, the contents of the battle challenge effect and the story are explained. Further, in the first battle section from the 16th change to the 40th change, a first battle effect in which a battle between the ally character and the enemy character A is performed is performed, and a win / loss is notified at the 40th change. Further, in the second battle section from the 41st change to the 65th change, a second battle effect in which a battle between the ally character and the enemy character B is performed is performed, and the winning or losing is notified at the 65th change. In the third battle section from the 66th change to the 90th change, a third battle effect in which a battle between the ally character and the enemy character C is performed is performed, and the victory or loss is reported at the 90th change. As described above, the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed for every 25 changes after the first change to the 15th change after the effect explanation section, and the win or loss is notified.

As shown in FIG. 18-29 (1), in the battle challenge effect, when the effect explanation section ends, the story moves to the first battle section. Then, in the first battle effect in the first battle portion, when the ally character defeats the enemy character A, the battle challenge effect continues, and the story moves to the second battle portion. On the other hand, when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character A, it is notified that the ally character will transition to the normal state, and the battle challenge effect ends at that time.

Also, in the second battle effect in the second battle portion, if the ally character beats the enemy character B, the battle challenge effect continues, the story moves to the third battle portion, and the ally character loses to the enemy character B, A notification to the effect that a transition to the normal state is made,
At that point, the battle challenge production ends. Then, in the third battle effect in the third battle section, when the ally character defeats the enemy character C, a notification that the small hit RUSH is to be made is given, and the battle challenge effect ends, and the ally character becomes the enemy character C. When defeated, the player is notified that the game will return to the normal state, and the battle challenge effect ends.

In the first battle production and the second battle production of the battle challenge production, the battle challenge production is continued at the time of victory and the high base state is continued. At the time of the defeat, the battle challenge production ends and the high base state ends and the normal state is completed. Therefore, whether the battle challenge effect is continued or not and whether or not the high base state is continued are notified by the notification of winning or losing. Further, in the third battle production of the battle challenge production, when the victory is made, the game shifts to the small hit RUSH, and when the game is defeated, the game shifts to the normal state. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 18-29 (1), in the present feature portion 014IW, the staging description section, regardless of whether a probability change big hit (except a probability change big hit A) or a normal big hit occurs in the first special figure game, A battle challenge effect of a common mode in which the story moves in the order of the first battle section, the second battle section, and the third battle section is executed. In the battle challenge production, a plurality of production patterns with different story developments are provided.

As shown in FIG. 18-29 (1), the first effect pattern of the battle challenge effect is 40
To win the first battle effect on the change, win the second battle effect on the 65th change, final victory in the third battle effect on the 90th change, end the battle challenge effect, and shift to small hit RUSH This is an effect pattern in which the notification is made. In this feature part 014IW, among the victory in the battle challenge production and the battle production in the chance battle production, after winning, the small hit RU
The victory that leads to SH is also called the final victory.

In the second production pattern of the battle challenge production, the first battle production wins at the 40th change,
This is an effect pattern in which a victory is given in the second battle effect at the 65th change, but a defeat is made in the third battle effect at the 90th change, and the battle challenge effect ends, and a notification is made that the game is shifted to the normal state.

In the third effect pattern of the battle challenge effect, the first battle effect is won at the 40th change, but the second challenge effect is defeated at the 65th change. Is an effect pattern to be made.

The fourth effect pattern of the battle challenge effect is an effect pattern in which at the 40th change, the player loses in the first battle effect, ends the battle challenge effect, and is notified that the game mode shifts to the normal state.

In the feature portion 014IW, the second to fourth effect patterns of the battle challenge effect are usually used when a big hit occurs (see FIG. 18-35 (C)). Therefore, when the battle is defeated and the battle challenge effect ends, the low probability state is determined.

In the feature part 014IW, in the battle challenge effect, the battle challenge effect continues when the battle is won (that is, the high base state continues), and the battle challenge effect ends when the battle is lost (that is, the high base state ends). ) When winning three battles, it is configured to shift to the small hit RUSH.
It is configured so that there is a case where the player wins the second battle (that is, the final victory) and shifts to the small hit RUSH (that is, a case where the advantage is higher than the high base state is continued).

The first special production pattern of the battle challenge production is that the 40th variation wins the first battle production, the 65th variation makes the final victory in the second battle production, the battle challenge production ends, and shifts to the small hit RUSH. This is an effect pattern in which the notification is made.

The second special effect pattern of the battle challenge effect is an effect pattern informing that the battle victory effect ends with the final victory in the first battle effect at the fortieth change, and shifts to the small hit RUSH.

Next, the chance battle effect will be described. The chance battle effect is an effect in which a moving image having a story is displayed, and the story is shifted in the order of the effect explanation unit, the first battle unit, the second battle unit, and the third battle unit. . FIG. 18-29 (2)
As shown in the figure, the first to fifteenth fluctuations after the big hit game in the second special map game correspond to the effect description part, the sixteenth to fortyth fluctuations correspond to the first battle part, and the 41st fluctuation part. The 65th to 65th variation corresponds to the second battle portion, and the 66th to 90th variation corresponds to the third battle portion.

In the effect explanation section from the first change to the fifteenth change, the content of the chance battle effect and the story are explained. Further, in the first battle section from the 16th change to the 40th change, a first battle effect in which a battle between the ally character and the enemy character A is performed is performed, and a win / loss is notified at the 40th change. Further, in the second battle section from the 41st change to the 65th change, a second battle effect in which a battle between the ally character and the enemy character B is performed is performed, and the winning or losing is notified at the 65th change. In the third battle section from the 66th change to the 90th change, a third battle effect in which a battle between the ally character and the enemy character C is performed is performed, and the victory or loss is reported at the 90th change. As described above, the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed for every 25 changes after the first change to the 15th change after the effect explanation section, and the win or loss is notified.

As shown in FIG. 18-29 (2), in the chance battle effect, the story shifts to the first battle portion when the effect explanation portion ends. Then, in the first battle effect in the first battle section, when the ally character wins the enemy character A, a game ball is given, and the story moves to the second battle section. On the other hand, when the ally character loses to the enemy character A, the story moves to the second battle section without giving a game ball.

Also, in the second battle effect in the second battle section, when the ally character wins the enemy character B, a game ball is given, the story moves to the third battle section, and when the ally character defeats the enemy character B, The story moves to the third battle section without a game ball being given. Further, in the third battle effect in the third battle section, if the ally character wins the enemy character C, a game ball is given, and if the ally character defeats the enemy character C, the game ball is not given.

Then, when the third battle effect in the third battle section ends, a rush determination effect that notifies whether or not to shift to the small hit RUSH is executed. In the rush determination effect, whether or not to shift to the small hit RUSH is notified in a mode using the game ball given so far. Further, in the rush judgment effect, the ratio of shifting to the small hit RUSH increases as the number of game balls awarded so far increases (see FIG. 18-35 (E)).

As shown in FIG. 18-29 (2), in the characteristic portion 014IW, any of the probable big hit (excluding the probable big hit A) and the normal big hit (excluding the probable big hit B and C) by the second special figure game occurs. Also in this case, a chance battle effect in a common mode in which the story shifts in the order of the effect explanation unit, the first battle unit, the second battle unit, and the third battle unit is executed. In the chance battle production, a plurality of production patterns with different story developments are provided.

As shown in FIG. 18-29 (2), in the first effect pattern of the chance battle effect, the 40th variation is notified of the win / loss of the first battle effect and the presence / absence of a game ball, and the 65th variation is the second battle effect. Of the third battle effect is notified at the 90th variation, and whether or not the third ball effect has been provided is used after the end of the third battle effect. This is an effect pattern in which a rush determination effect is performed, and a notification is made to the effect of shifting to the small hit RUSH as a result of the rush determination effect.

In the second effect pattern of the chance battle effect, the 40th variation is notified of the win / loss of the first battle effect and presence / absence of a game ball, and the 65th variation is notified of the win / loss of the second battle effect and presence / absence of a game ball. At the 90th change, the result of the third battle production and the presence or absence of the game ball are notified,
This is an effect pattern in which, after the end of the third battle effect, a rush judgment effect in a mode using the game balls awarded so far is performed, and as a result of the rush judgment effect, a transition to the normal state is made.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, the second effect pattern of the chance battle effect is used when the big hit A usually occurs (see FIG. 18-35 (D)). Therefore, when a notification to the effect of transition to the normal state is given as the entry determination effect, the low probability state is determined.

In this feature part 014IW, in the chance battle production, basically, regardless of the outcome of the battle production, the process moves to the next story, and three battle productions are executed (that is, the high base state is maintained until the 90th fluctuation). Exceptionally, when the first or second battle is won (that is, the final victory) and then the small hit RUSH is made (that is, the high base state is maintained until the 90th change). (The case where the degree of advantage is higher than that of the case).

In the first special effect pattern of the chance battle effect, the 40th variation is notified of the win / loss of the first battle effect and the presence or absence of a game ball, and the 65th variation is the final victory in the second battle effect, and the chance battle effect is completed. , Is an effect pattern for notifying that a shift to the small hit RUSH is made.

The second special effect pattern of the chance battle effect is an effect pattern informing that the first battle effect is finally won at the 40th change, the chance battle effect is completed, and a shift to the small hit RUSH is made.

Comparing the Battle Challenge production with the Chance Battle production, in the Battle Challenge production, the battle challenge production ends when the battle is lost (that is, the high base state ends). The difference is that the battle effect is continued (that is, the high base state is continued). With such a configuration, the playability and the degree of advantage between the battle challenge effect and the chance battle effect can be different.

In the chance battle effect, a winning ball is awarded when the player wins the battle, and the greater the number of awarded winning balls, the higher the ratio of shifting to the small hit RUSH. Therefore, even if the player loses the battle, the challenge battle effect is continued (that is, the high base state is continued), but the player can pay attention to the result of the battle.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, the effect pattern of the battle challenge effect is configured to be determined according to the type of the generated big hit (step 014IWS203 described later).
Therefore, when being controlled to any one of the first KT states A and B, at the 40th, 65th, or 90th change in which the first transition condition is satisfied, a final victory is obtained in the battle effect of the battle challenge effect, and the first transition condition is satisfied. At the 40th or 65th change that is not established, the user wins the battle effect of the battle challenge effect. Also, when controlled to the first KT state C, the player loses in the battle effect of the battle challenge effect at the 40th, 65th, or 90th change when the first transition condition is satisfied.

In addition, the characteristic portion 014IW is configured such that the effect pattern of the chance battle effect is also determined according to the type of the generated big hit (step 014IWS203 described later).
). Therefore, when being controlled to any one of the first KT states A and B, at the 40th or 65th change in which the first transition condition is satisfied, the final victory is achieved in the battle effect of the battle challenge effect, and the first transition condition is not satisfied. At the 40th or 65th change, a victory or a defeat is made in the battle effect of the battle challenge effect, and at the 90th change at which the first shift condition is satisfied, a notification is made to shift to the small hit RUSH in the rush judgment effect. . Further, when the first KT state C is controlled, the 90th change that satisfies the first transition condition is notified that the transition to the normal state occurs in the rush determination effect.

Thus, each battle production of the battle challenge production and the chance battle production is the first.
This is an effect that suggests that the transition condition is satisfied. Further, in each battle effect of the battle challenge effect and the chance battle effect, depending on the type of the set first transition condition (that is, big hit type), whether the effect continues or ends (the effect ends and the normal state). And the second
(Including transition to the KT state). With such a configuration, attention can be paid to whether the battle challenge effect and the chance battle effect continue or end, and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, during the period in which the battle transition mode or the chance battle mode is being controlled, the establishment of the second transition condition is performed in parallel with the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect that suggests the establishment of the first transition condition. The suggested small hit meter effect is configured to be executed. The small hit meter effect is an effect mode different from the battle challenge effect and the chance battle effect (see FIGS. 18-41 and the like). With such a configuration, attention can be paid to both the establishment of the first transition condition and the establishment of the second transition condition, and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, a description will be given of a process related to an effect in the present feature unit 014IW.

FIG. 18-30 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (step 138IWS811). Whether or not a variation pattern command has been received is determined, for example, by setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). Step 138 IWS811
Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command has been received, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 138I).
WS 812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 138 IWS813). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 07. Can be determined by confirming whether If it is not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, to execute the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated. If the variation display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 12
0 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 138IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (ie,
If it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (step 138IWS814). It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is to be performed is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 32. Can be determined by confirming whether Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is,
If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. In the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 138IWS816).

By executing the processing of steps 138IWS812 to S815, this feature unit 0
In the 14IW, when the state is the non-KT state, the decorative display is displayed in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and in the KT state, the decorative pattern is displayed in the second special symbol. In the image display device 5, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variation display. In other words, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is not the KT state. , The display of the decoration design is not changed.

FIG. 18-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 138IWS920). In the characteristic portion 014IW, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of position), only the out-of-left design in which the middle left and right decoration patterns do not completely match or only the left and right decoration designs match. The combination of out-of-reach symbols is determined. When the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot A), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are arranged in odd numbers is determined. When the display result 3 to 10 designation command is received (when it is determined to be one of the probability variable jackpot BF and the normal jackpot A to C), the left middle right decorative symbol is arranged in an even number symbol. Is determined. In addition, when the display results 11 to 13 designation commands are received (when it is determined that the small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is controlled to the first KT state (step 138IWS921). Note that whether or not the KT state is controlled can be determined by checking the effect mode. Specifically, when the control mode is controlled to one of the battle challenge mode and the chance battle mode, it can be determined that the state is the first KT state. If it is not controlled to the first KT state, the effect control CPU 12
0 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step 138IWS933), and proceeds to step 138IWS934.

If it is controlled to the first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation since the control to the first KT state (step 138I).
WS922). In addition, whether or not it is the 40th, 65th, or 90th fluctuation after the control to the first KT state is determined by checking the value of the effect high base number counter for managing the remaining number of times of the high base state on the effect control side. Can be determined. Specifically, the value of the effect high base number counter is set to one of “90”, “65”, and “40” when shifting to the first KT state, and is decremented by one each time the change ends. Therefore, if the value is any one of “0”, “25”, and “50”, it can be determined that it is the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation after shifting to the first KT state.

If it is not the 40th, 65th or 90th change after the control to the first KT state (step 1
In N) of 38IWS 922, effect control CPU 120 selects a variation table indicated by the received variation pattern command and a process table according to the effect pattern of the determined effect mode (step 138IWS923), and step 138IWS934.
Move to In the characteristic portion 014IW, a step 138IWS935 and a variable display effect process (step S172), which will be described later, are executed in accordance with the process table selected in the step 138IWS923, so that a battle challenge effect, a chance battle effect, and the like are performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Is executed.

If it is the 40th, 65th or 90th change after the control to the first KT state (step 13
At 8IWS 922, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the high base state continues (
That is, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuation suggestion effect indicating that the battle challenge effect is continued (step S138IWS924). In step S138IWS924, the effect control CPU 120 uses the continuation suggestion effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the continuation suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to determine whether to execute.

FIG. 18-32 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the continuation suggestion effect determination table. In this example,
As shown in the continuation suggestion effect determination table in FIG. 18-32, if the variable times are winning the battle, the continuation suggestion effect is determined to be executed with a probability of 70%, and the variable times losing the battle is determined. In some cases, it is decided to execute the continuous suggestion effect with a probability of 30%. It can be determined whether or not the number of times of variability to win the battle is by confirming the effect pattern of the battle challenge effect determined in step 014 IWS 203 described later and the value of the effect high base number counter. For example, if the effect pattern is any of the second to fourth effect patterns and the value of the effect high base number counter is “0”, it can be determined that it is time to lose the battle.

As shown in FIG. 18-32, when the battle is won and the battle challenge effect continues (
That is, when the high base state is continued), the rate at which the continuation suggestion effect is executed increases, so that it can be expected that the continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, since the continuation suggestion effect is executed before notifying whether or not the battle challenge effect is continued (that is, whether or not the high base state is continued), the degree of attention to the notification can be increased.

In the characteristic portion 014IW, when the game shifts to the first KT state and the chance battle effect is executed after the big hit game by the second special figure game, the special effect pattern for shifting to the small hit RUSH before 90 fluctuations is set. Except for this, the effect pattern is basically such that the high base state is maintained until the 90th change. Therefore, when the chance battle effect is being executed, the continuation suggestion effect contents are won in the battle of the 40th, 65th, or 90th change (that is, the game ball is given and the small hit RUSH is entered). It is also possible to indicate that the possibility increases.) Further, in the case of such a configuration, when the number of times the game ball is fluctuated is determined (the game ball can be specified by the game ball providing pattern determined in step 014 IWS 203 described later).
(See FIG. 18-35 (E).)), The rate at which the effect is executed may be increased.

In addition, the present feature unit 014IW is configured such that the continuation suggestion effect is executed at the 40th, 65th, or 90th variation at which it is notified whether or not the high base state is continued by the battle effect. The present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the continuation suggestion effect may be executed at a change before the change at which it is notified whether or not the high base state is continued by the battle effect, for example, at the 39, 64, or 89 change. . With such a configuration, the degree of attention in the battle effect can be increased in advance.

When it is not determined to execute the continuation suggestion effect (N in Step 138IW925)
Then, the process proceeds to step 138IWS923, and if it is determined that the continuation suggestion effect is to be executed (
In step 138IW925, the effect control CPU 120 selects the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the effect pattern of the determined effect mode, and the process table corresponding to the continuation suggestion effect determined to be executed (step S138IW925). 138 IWS926
), And proceeds to step 138 IWS 934. In this feature part 014IW, step 138
Step 138 according to the process table selected in the IWS 926
By executing the variable display effect process (step S172), a battle challenge effect, a chance battle effect, a continuation suggestion effect, and the like are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 138 IWS 923, S 926, S 93
The process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 3 is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step 138IWS934).
. Next, effect control CPU 120 determines the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1).
The control of the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L and 8R) is executed according to the lamp control execution data 1 and the sound number data 1 (step 138IWS 935). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps.
Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decoration symbol variation time timer and starts the decoration symbol variation time timer (step 138IWS936). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 138IWS937).

FIG. 18-33 is a flowchart showing the effect mode setting process. The effect mode setting process is a process performed as a part of the special figure waiting process (S173) in FIG.

In the effect mode setting process, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 014IWS200). If not, the process proceeds to step 014IWS209. If a jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) is received, that is, if a big hit occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode for controlling after the big hit game. The effect mode determination process to be determined is executed (step 014IWS201).

FIGS. 18-35 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect mode determination table for determining the effect mode. The first effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 18-35 (A) is used when a big hit has occurred in the first special figure game. That is, it is used when the first big hit start designation command is received. The second effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 18-35 (A) is used when a big hit occurs in the second special figure game. That is, it is used when the second big hit start designation command is received. Step 014
The IWS 201 determines an effect mode to be controlled after the big hit game using one of the first effect mode determination table and the second effect mode determination table.

As shown in FIGS. 18-35 (A) and (B), when the probability variation big hit A occurs, it is determined to control to the small hit RUSH mode. In addition, the first special map game has a certainty big hit B
If any one of .about.F and the normal big hits A.about.C has occurred, it is decided to control the battle challenge mode. In addition, when any one of the probable big hits B to F and the normal big hits A to C occurs in the second special map game, it is determined to control the chance battle mode. The type of the generated big hit can be determined by confirming which display result designation command has been received.

Next, when the probability change big hit A has occurred (Y in step S014IWS202), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the probability change big hit A has not occurred (N in step S014IWS202), An effect pattern determination process for determining an effect pattern in the effect mode (specifically, an effect pattern of a battle challenge effect or a chance battle effect) is executed (step S014IWS203).

FIGS. 18-35 (C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect pattern determination table for determining the effect pattern. The first effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-35 (C) is used when the effect mode is determined to be the battle challenge mode. Figure 1
The second effect pattern determination table shown in 8-35 (D) is used when the effect mode is determined to be the chance battle mode. In step 014IWS203, an effect pattern is determined using one of the first effect pattern determination table and the second effect mode determination table.

When determining the effect pattern of the battle challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (C), when the jackpot type is the probable big hits B, E, and F, the first effect pattern is determined. In the first production pattern, the first battle is won on the 40th variation, the second battle is won on the 65th variation, and the final battle is won on the 90th variation in the third battle.
This is an effect pattern for notifying the transition to the small hit RUSH (see the first effect pattern in FIG. 18-29 (1)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (C), when the probability is the big hit C, the first special effect pattern is determined. In the first special effect pattern, the first battle was won on the 40th change, the last battle was won on the 65th change in the second battle, and the battle challenge effect was completed.
This is an effect pattern for notifying the transition to H (refer to the first special effect pattern in FIG. 18-29 (1)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (C), in the case of the probability change big hit D, the second special effect pattern is determined. This second special effect pattern is an effect pattern for notifying the transition to the small hit RUSH after the final victory in the first battle at the 40th variation and the end of the battle challenge effect (FIG. 18-29 (1)). (See 2 special production patterns).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (C), when the normal jackpot is A, the second effect pattern is determined. In the second production pattern, the first battle is won on the 40th variation, and the second battle is won on the 65th variation. However, the third battle is defeated on the 90th variation, and the battle challenge production ends. This is an effect pattern for notifying the transition to (see the second effect pattern in FIG. 18-29 (1)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (C), in the case of the normal big hit B, the third effect pattern is determined. In the third production pattern, the first battle is won at the 40th change,
This is an effect pattern for notifying the transition to the normal state by losing in the second battle on the fifth change and ending the battle challenge effect (see the third effect pattern in FIG. 18-29 (1)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (C), when the hit is the normal big hit C, the fourth effect pattern is determined. This fourth effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the player loses in the first battle at the 40th variation and ends the battle challenge effect, and notifies the transition to the normal state (FIG. 18-2).
9 (1) 4th production pattern).

When determining the effect pattern of the chance battle effect, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (D), when the jackpot type is the probable big hit B, E, F, the first effect pattern is determined. The first effect pattern includes the first battle at the 40th change, the second battle at the 65th change,
This is an effect pattern in which a third battle is performed at the fluctuation, a rush judgment is performed after the third battle, and the transition to the small hit RUSH is notified (see the first effect pattern in FIG. 18-29 (2)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (D), in the case of the probability change big hit C, the first special effect pattern is determined. The first special effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the first battle is performed at the 40th change, the second battle is performed at the 65th change, and the transition to the small hit RUSH is notified after the second battle (FIG. 18-29 ( 2) 1st special effect pattern).

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (C), in the case of the probability change big hit D, the second special effect pattern is determined. In the second special effect pattern, the first battle is performed at the 40th change,
This is an effect pattern that notifies the shift to the small hit RUSH after the first battle (FIGS. 18-29).
(Refer to the second special effect pattern in (2)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (C), when the normal jackpot is A, the second effect pattern is determined. In the second effect pattern, the first battle is performed at the 40th variation, the second battle is performed at the 65th variation, the third battle is performed at the 90th variation, and a rush determination is performed after the third battle to notify the transition to the normal state. (Refer to the second effect pattern in FIG. 18-29 (2)).
.

In step 014IWS203, when the effect mode is determined to be the chance battle mode, an effect pattern relating to the game ball giving pattern is further determined using the third effect pattern determination table.

FIG. 18-35 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third effect pattern determination table.
In this example, first to eighth application patterns are provided. For example, the first giving pattern is 4
This is a pattern in which a game ball is provided at each of the 0th variation, the 65th variation, and the 90th variation. That is, it is a pattern that wins any of the first to third battles in the chance battle effect. Further, for example, the eighth giving pattern includes the 40th variation, the 65th variation, and the ninth variation.
This is a pattern in which no game ball is given in any of the 0th fluctuation. That is, this is a pattern in which the player loses in any of the first to third battles in the chance battle effect.

In the example shown in the third effect pattern determination table of FIG. 18-35 (E), when the type of jackpot of the generated jackpot is a probable variable jackpot, the total number of game balls given is larger than in the case of a normal jackpot. It is configured such that the ratio determined for the large number of applied patterns is high. That is,
The greater the total number of winning balls, the higher the possibility of being controlled to a high probability state,
It is configured to increase the possibility of shifting to the small hit RUSH. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to winning a battle in a chance battle effect and to be given a game ball, thereby improving amusement in a game.

In the feature part 014IW, steps S014IWS201 and S014IW
The information determined in S203 is stored, and after the big hit game, control is performed to one of the effect modes based on the information determined and stored in step S014IWS201. If the control is to be performed in one of the battle challenge mode and the chance battle mode, step S01 is executed.
Based on the information determined and stored in the 4IWS 203, a battle challenge effect or a chance battle effect is executed according to any effect pattern. The information on the effect pattern of the battle challenge effect and the chance battle effect is discarded when the battle challenge mode and the chance battle mode end due to the occurrence of the big hit or the transition to the second KT state or the non-KT state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 014IW, after the big hit game, it is controlled to the effect mode determined in step S014IWS201. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, during the big hit game, a mode according to the effect mode determined in step S014IWS201. May be performed. Specifically, during the big hit game, the effect of the mode suggesting the shift to the battle challenge mode or the chance battle mode or the effect of the mode suggesting the shift to the small hit RUSH may be executed. Good.

When the effect pattern of the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value of 90, 65 or 40 to the effect high base number counter according to the type of big hit (step 014IWS204). Specifically, the probability change jackpot B,
In the case of any of E, F and the normal jackpot A, “90
”Is set. In the case of the probability change big hit C and the normal big hit B,“ 65 ”is set in the effect high base number counter. In the case of the probability change big hit D and the normal big hit C, the effect high base number counter is set. Set "40".

When the type of the generated big hit is the probable change big hit (Y in step 014IWS205), the effect control CPU 120 directs the transition from the first KT state to the second KT state when the set transition condition is satisfied. Second KT for production for management on the control side
A transition flag is set (step 014 IWS 206).

If the type of the generated big hit is one of the certain variable big hits E and F (Y in step 014IWS207), the effect control CPU 120 determines the small hit required to satisfy the second transition condition according to the big hit type. A value of 30 or 70 is set in the small effect counter for effect for managing the number of occurrences of the game state on the effect control side (step 014IWS208)
). Specifically, in the case of the probability change big hit E, "30" is set in the effect small hit number counter, and in the case of the probability change big hit F, "70" is set in the effect small hit number counter. Then, the process ends.

If the jackpot start designation command has not been received (N in step 014IWS200), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 014IWS209). Step 014 IWS220
Move to

If the small hit start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect small hit number counter is “0” (step 014IWS210).
, "0", that is, if the game is not controlled to the high probability / first KT state (first KT state B) after the end of the big hit game based on one of the probability change big hits E and F, the process proceeds to step 014IW211. Transition. If the value of the effect small hit number counter is not “0”, that is, after the big hit game based on one of the probability variable big hits E and F, the high probability / first K
If the state is controlled to the T state (first KT state B), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts “1” from the value of the effect small hit counter (step 014IWS011A), and determines whether the value has become “0”. Is determined (step 014IWS211). When the value of the effect small hit number counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step 014IWS211. When the value of the effect small hit counter becomes “0”, that is, when the set second transition condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode. (Step 014IWS213).

The effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit transition condition satisfaction flag indicating that the set second transition condition has been met (step 014IWS214), and clears the value of the effect high base number counter (step 014). 014IWS215), 2K for staging
The T shift flag is reset (step 014IWS216). Then, the process ends.

In the present feature part 014IW, after the small hit game, the small hit RUSH mode determined in step S014IWS213 is controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, during the small hit game, the small hit RUSH mode is shifted. May be performed.

In step S014IWS220, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the command waiting time has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Then, when the reception waiting time has elapsed (Y in step S014IWS220), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the display result in the special figure game is "losing", and the value of the effect high base number counter is reduced. It is determined whether the value is “0” (step 138 IWS 221).

If the value of the effect high base number counter is “0”, the process is terminated, and if the value of the effect high base number counter is not “0”, that is, low probability / first KT state or high probability / second 1KT state, when the first transition condition is set, the effect control CPU
120 subtracts “1” from the value of the effect high base number counter (step 138 IWS22).
2) It is determined whether or not "0" has been reached (step 138IWS223). If the value of the effect high base number counter does not become “0”, the processing is terminated, and if the value of the effect high base number counter becomes “0”, that is, if the set first transition condition is satisfied. If it is established, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the effect second KT shift flag is set (step 138IWS224).

When the second KT shift flag for effect is set (Y in step 138 IWS224)
), That is, when the state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state and the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state based on the satisfaction of the first shift condition, the effect control CPU 120
Determines that the production mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 014IW).
S225). The effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the effect high base number counter (step 014 IWS 226) and resets the effect second KT transition flag (step 014 IWS 227). Then, the process ends.

If the second KT transition flag for staging is not set (N in step 138 IWS224), that is, it is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, and the first KT state is switched to the non-KT state based on the first transition condition being satisfied. When transitioning to the state, the effect control CPU 120
Determines that the production mode is controlled to the normal mode (step 014IWS228).
.

In the present characteristic portion 014IW, at the start of the next fluctuation, the small hit RUSH mode determined in step S014IWS225 and the normal mode determined in step S014IWS228 are controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. Before the start of fluctuation, small hit RUS
The mode may be controlled to the H mode or the normal mode.

In the effect mode setting process shown in FIGS. 18-33 and 18-34, step 014IW
By the processing of S200 to S208, after the big hit game, it is controlled to one of the battle challenge mode, the chance battle mode, and the small hit RUSH mode.

Further, if the second transition condition is satisfied during the control in the first KT state B by the processing of steps 014 IWS 209 to S216, the control is changed from the battle challenge mode or the chance battle mode to the small hit RUSH mode.

In addition, when the first transition condition is satisfied while being controlled to one of the first KT states A and B by the processing of steps 014IWS220 to S227, the control is changed from the battle challenge mode or the chance battle mode to the small hit RUSH mode. Will be.

Further, if the first transition condition is satisfied during the control in the first KT state C by the processing of steps 014IWS220 to S224 and S228, the control is changed from the battle challenge mode or the chance battle mode to the normal mode.

FIG. 18-36 is a flowchart showing the meter increase effect processing. The meter increase effect process is a process performed as part of the small hit effect process (S174) in FIG. Note that the meter increase effect process is a process related to a meter increase effect that increases the scale of a meter displayed in the small hit meter effect, and is controlled to a normal mode in which the small hit meter effect is not executed or a small hit RUSH mode. May not be executed.

In the meter increase effect processing, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a meter increase effect flag indicating that the meter increase effect is being executed is set (step 01).
4IWS300), if it is set, the process proceeds to step 014IWS310.

If the meter increase effect flag has not been set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the effect small hit counter is “0” (step 014IWS3).
01). If the value of the effect small hit counter is not “0”, that is, if the set second shift condition has not yet been satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing the meter increase effect. (Step 014IWS303). Also, effect control CP
U120 sets the meter increase effect flag (step 014IWS304), and proceeds to step 014IWS310.

The value of the effect small hit number counter is “0” (Y in step 014IWS301),
If the small hit transition condition satisfaction flag is set (Y in step 014 IWS 305), that is, if the set second transition condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 12
0 is a meter increase effect and a transition notification effect for notifying the transition to the small hit RUSH state (in this example, the character display of “small hit RUSH rush” is displayed on the movable body 32 and the movable body 32 An effect of moving to the front of the display device 5 is performed (see FIG. 18-41 (8)) (step 014IWS307). Then, step 014IW
The process moves to S304. It should be noted that the small hit transition condition satisfaction flag is determined in step 014IWS307.
Is reset before the processing of.

The value of the effect small hit number counter is “0” (Y in step 014IWS301),
If the small hit transition condition satisfaction flag is not set (step 014IWS305)
N), that is, when the second transition condition is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing the meter increase effect (step 014IWS309). Then, control goes to a step 014 IWS 304.

In step 014IWS310, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the meter increase effect (step 014IWS110), and if it is the end timing, resets the meter increase effect flag (step 014IWS111).

When the meter increase effect of increasing the meter displayed in the small hit meter effect is executed by the processing of steps 014IWS303, S307, and S309, the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect executed in parallel is executed. Control may be provided to temporarily stop the progress of the story. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the small hit meter effect and the meter increase effect, and it is possible to improve a game entertainment.

In this characteristic portion 014IW, regardless of whether the second transition condition is set or not, the small hit meter effect indicating that the second transition condition is satisfied is executed in parallel with the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect. However, when the second transition condition is not set, the meter displayed by the small hit meter effect does not become full. Therefore, the meter increase effect executed by the process of step 014 IWS 309 corresponds to step 01
An effect mode different from the meter increase effect executed by the processing of the 4IWS 303 (for example, a mode in which the scale of the meter is hard to increase) may be adopted.

Next, a description will be given of an effect mode of the effect executed in the present feature part 014IW. First, an effect mode of the battle challenge effect will be described. 18-37 and 18-38
FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of a battle challenge effect. FIG. 18-3
7 and FIGS. 18-38, the display screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), (3).

When the battle challenge effect is executed after the big hit game by the first special map game, as the effect explanation unit from the first change to the fifteenth change after the big hit game, image display is performed as shown in FIG. 18-37 (1). In the device 5, a battle challenge commentary image 014IW001 for commenting the content and story of the battle challenge effect is displayed.

Next, when the story shifts to the first battle section from the 16th change to the 40th change after the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 18-37 (2), the friend is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first battle effect. A display control in which the character 014IW002 and the enemy character A014IW003a battle is performed.

Then, at the 40th change, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 014IW002.
Display control is performed to notify the player of the battle between the enemy character A014IW003a and the enemy character A014IW003a. If the battle is won, the battle challenge effect is continued as shown in FIG. 18-37 (3-1). Battle challenge continuation notification image 014IW for notification
004a (including the character display of “Continue Battle Challenge” in this example) is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of losing the battle, as shown in FIG. 18-37 (3-2), a battle challenge end notification image 014IW004 for notifying that the battle challenge effect is ended.
b (in this example, the character display of “End of Battle Challenge” is displayed), the battle challenge effect ends, and the state shifts to the normal state (non-KT state).

In addition, if the battle is won and this victory is the final victory, FIG. 18-37 (3-3)
As shown in the figure, the small hit RUSH entry notification image 014IW004c (including the character display of "small hit RUSH entry" in this example) is displayed for notifying that the battle challenge effect has ended and the shift to the small hit RUSH is performed. After that, the battle challenge production is over and the small hit RU
Shift to SH (second KT state).

The example illustrated in FIG. 18-37 (3-1) corresponds to one of the first to third effect patterns and the first special effect pattern of the battle challenge effect, and is an example illustrated in FIG. 18-37 (3-2). Is
The example shown in FIG. 18-37 (3-3) corresponds to the second special effect pattern of the battle challenge effect.

Next, in the battle challenge effect, if the enemy character A is won in the first battle effect of the first battle portion, the story moves to the second battle portion. And 65 from the 41st fluctuation
When the process proceeds to the second battle section up to the change, as shown in FIG. 18-37 (4), display control in which the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character B014IW003b battle on the image display device 5 is performed as a second battle effect. Done. Here, when the continuation suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 18-37 (4), the image display device 5 wins the next battle and suggests that the battle challenge effect is continued. Continuation suggestion image 014IW
005 (including the character display of “Win!” In this example).

Then, at the 65th change, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 014IW002.
The display control for notifying the victory or defeat of the battle with the enemy character A014IW003b is performed. When the battle is won, the battle challenge continuation notification image 014IW004a is displayed as shown in FIG. 18-37 (5-1). You. On the other hand, if the player has lost the battle, the battle challenge end notification image 014IW00 is displayed as shown in FIG.
4b is displayed, the battle challenge effect ends, and the state shifts to the normal state (non-KT state).

In addition, if the battle is won and this victory is the final victory, FIG. 18-37 (5-3)
As shown in the figure, the small hit RUSH intrusion notification image 014IW004c is displayed, the battle challenge effect ends, and the mode shifts to the small hit RUSH (second KT state).

The example illustrated in FIG. 18-37 (5-1) corresponds to one of the first and second effect patterns of the battle challenge effect, and the example illustrated in FIG. 18-37 (5-2) corresponds to the battle challenge effect. Third
The example shown in FIG. 18-37 (3-3) corresponds to the first special effect pattern of the battle challenge effect.

Next, in the battle challenge effect, if the enemy character B is won in the second battle effect of the second battle portion, the story moves to the third battle portion. And 90 from the 66th fluctuation
When the process proceeds to the third battle section up to the change, as shown in FIG. 18-38 (6), display control in which the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character C014IW003c battle on the image display device 5 is performed as a third battle effect. Done.

Then, at the 90th change, the image display device 5 displays the friendly character 014IW002 on the image display device 5.
Display control is performed to notify the player of the battle between the enemy character A014IW003b and the enemy character A014IW003b. When the battle is won, as shown in FIG.
The SH rush notification image 014IW004c is displayed, the battle challenge effect ends, and the routine shifts to the small hit RUSH (second KT state). On the other hand, if you lose the battle,
As shown in 38 (7-2), the battle challenge end notification image 014IW004b is displayed, the battle challenge effect ends, and the state shifts to the normal state (non-KT state).

The example shown in FIG. 18-38 (7-1) corresponds to the first effect pattern of the battle challenge effect, and the example shown in FIG. 18-38 (7-2) corresponds to the second effect pattern of the battle challenge effect. I do.

Next, an effect mode of the chance battle effect will be described. 18-39 and FIG.
40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of a chance battle effect. In addition, FIG.
In FIGS. 39 and 18-40, the display screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), (3).

When the chance battle effect is executed after the big hit game by the second special map game, as the effect explanation unit from the first change to the fifteenth change after the big hit game, image display is performed as shown in FIG. 18-39 (1). In the device 5, a chance battle commentary image 014IW011 for commenting on the content and story of the chance battle effect is displayed.

Next, when the story shifts to the first battle section from the 16th change to the 40th change after the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 18-39 (2), the ally is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first battle effect. A display control in which the character 014IW002 and the enemy character A014IW003a battle is performed.

Then, at the 40th change, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 014IW002.
A display control is performed to notify the player of the battle between the enemy character A014IW003a and the enemy character. If the battle is won, the player is notified that the game ball has been given as shown in FIG. 18-39 (3-1). A game ball giving notification image 014IW012a (including a character display of “game ball get” in this example) is displayed. On the other hand, if the player loses the battle, no game ball is given, and as shown in FIG. 18-39 (3-2), the game ball addition notification image 0 is displayed.
14IW012a is not displayed.

If the battle is won and this victory is the final victory, FIG. 18-39 (3-3)
As shown in the figure, a small hit RUSH rush notification image 014IW012b (including a character display of "small hit RUSH rush" in this example) for notifying that the chance battle effect has ended and the shift to the small hit RUSH is displayed. The chance battle production ends, and the small hit RUSH
(2nd KT state).

The example shown in FIG. 18-39 (3-1) corresponds to one of the first and second effect patterns and the first special effect pattern of the chance battle effect, and the first to the first game effect giving patterns.
The example illustrated in FIG. 18-39 (3-2) corresponds to one of the first and second effect patterns and the first special effect pattern of the chance battle effect, and the example illustrated in FIG. FIG. 18C corresponds to one of the fifth to eighth giving patterns of the game ball giving pattern.
The example shown in 9 (3-3) corresponds to the second special effect pattern of the chance battle effect.

Next, in the chance battle production, regardless of the outcome of the first battle production in the first battle section,
The story moves to the second battle section (however, in the case of the second special effect pattern, the chance battle effect ends when the first battle portion ends). And 65 from the 41st fluctuation
When the process moves to the second battle section up to the change, as shown in FIG. 18-39 (4), the display control in which the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character B014IW003b battle on the image display device 5 is performed as the second battle effect. Done.

Then, at the 65th change, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 014IW002.
Display control is performed to notify the player of the battle between the enemy character B014IW003b and the enemy character. When the battle is won, as shown in FIG. 18-39 (5-1), it is notified that the game ball has been given. The game ball giving notification image 014IW012a for performing the game is displayed. On the other hand, when the player loses the battle, the game ball addition notification image 014IW012a is not displayed as shown in FIG. 18-39 (5-2).

In addition, if the battle is won and this victory is the final victory, FIG. 18-39 (5-3)
As shown in the figure, the small hit RUSH rush notification image 014IW012b is displayed, the chance battle effect ends, and the mode shifts to the small hit RUSH (second KT state).

The example shown in FIG. 18-39 (5-1) corresponds to one of the first and second effect patterns of the chance battle effect, and the first and second effect patterns of the game ball and the fifth effect pattern.
18 to 39 (5-2). The example shown in FIG. 18-39 (5-2) corresponds to any of the first and second effect patterns of the chance battle effect and the game ball effect pattern. FIG. 18 corresponds to one of the third to fourth application patterns and the seventh to eighth application patterns.
The example shown in −39 (5-3) corresponds to the first special effect pattern of the chance battle effect.

Next, in the chance battle production, regardless of the outcome of the second battle production in the second battle section,
The story moves to the third battle section (however, in the case of the first special effect pattern, the chance battle effect ends when the second battle portion ends). And 90 from the 66th fluctuation
When the process shifts to the third battle section up to the change, the display control in which the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character C014IW003c battle on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Done.

Then, at the 90th change, the image display device 5 displays the friendly character 014IW002 on the image display device 5.
The display control is performed to notify the player of the battle with the enemy character C014IW003c. When the battle is won, as shown in FIG. 18-40 (7-1), it is notified that the game ball has been given. The game ball giving notification image 014IW012a for performing the game is displayed. On the other hand, if the player loses the battle, the game ball addition notification image 014IW012a is not displayed as shown in FIG. 18-40 (7-2).

The example shown in FIG. 18-40 (7-1) corresponds to one of the first and second effect patterns of the chance battle effect, and the first, third, fifth, and seventh effect of the game ball giving pattern. The example shown in FIG. 18-40 (7-2) corresponds to one of the patterns in the first chance battle effect.
To the second effect pattern, and the second, fourth, and fourth game ball giving patterns.
This corresponds to one of the sixth and eighth application patterns.

Next, at the 90th change, after the end of the third battle effect, a rush determination effect that notifies whether or not to shift to the small hit RUSH is executed. As shown in FIG. 18-40 (8), in the rush judgment effect, a game ball image 014IW013 indicating the game ball given so far is displayed (in the example of FIG. 18-40 (8), three spheres are displayed). Is displayed, indicating that three game balls are awarded.) Then, in the rush judgment effect, whether or not to shift to the small hit RUSH is notified in a manner using the displayed game ball.

When shifting to the small hit RUSH, as shown in FIG. 18-40 (9-1), the small hit RUSH rush notification image 014IW012b is displayed, and the chance battle effect ends.
The state shifts to the small hit RUSH (second KT state). On the other hand, when the shift to the small hit RUSH is not performed, the chance battle end notification image 014IW0 is displayed as shown in FIG.
12c is displayed, the chance battle effect ends, and the state shifts to the normal state (non-KT state).

The example shown in FIG. 18-40 (9-1) corresponds to the first effect pattern of the chance battle effect, and the example shown in FIG. 18-40 (7-2) corresponds to the second effect pattern of the chance battle effect. I do.

Next, an effect mode of the small hit meter effect will be described. Drawing 18-41 is an explanatory view for explaining the production mode of the small hit meter production. In FIG. 18-41, (1) (
2) The display screen changes in the order of (3).

When the Battle Challenge or Chance Battle effect is executed after the big hit game,
As shown in FIG. 8-41 (1), in the image display device 5, the ally character 014IW00 is displayed.
2 and the enemy character A014IW003a perform a display control of a battle.

Also, in the present characteristic portion 014IW, when the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect is executed, the small hit meter effect is executed in parallel, so that the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. In, the meter image 014IW021 is displayed. In the example of the battle challenge effect shown in FIGS. 18-37 and 18-38 and the example of the chance battle effect shown in FIGS. 18-39 and 18-40, the meter image 014IW021 is displayed to simplify the description. It is not displayed, but is actually displayed as shown in FIG. 18-41 (1).

Here, when a small hit occurs and the small hit is played, as shown in FIGS. 18-41 (2), (3), and (4), the image display device 5 is set as a meter increase effect of the small hit meter effect. At
When the mini-character 014IW023 appears and throws a block toward the meter image 014IW021, display control is performed to increase the scale of the meter (in the example of FIG. 18-41, the shaded portion in the meter is increased). Thereafter, each time a small hit occurs, a meter increase effect in which the scale of the meter increases is executed. In the case where the small hitting game is being played in the second KT state, the effect of emphasizing that the game is controlled to the small hitting game state is executed because the game ball is easy to win in the special winning opening (for example, an image is displayed). An image indicating that a small hit game is being played is displayed on the display device 5). If the small hit game is being played in the first KT state, the game ball is difficult to win in the special winning opening, so that the small hit game is performed. An effect that emphasizes that the state is controlled may not be executed. Further, in this example, during the small hit game, the battle challenge animation or the battle battle animation in the chance battle production is configured to be continuously played back, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. May be controlled to temporarily stop the progress of the story.

As shown in FIG. 18-41 (5), in the image display device 5, the ally character 014I
When a small hit occurs during the display control in which the W002 and the enemy character B014IW003b battle, and the small hit is being played, the small hit meter effect is increased as shown in FIG. 18-41 (6). As shown in (7), when the mini-character 014IW023 appears on the image display device 5 and throws a block toward the meter image 014IW021, display control for increasing the scale of the meter is performed.

Here, when the number of occurrences of small hits reaches a predetermined number (30 or 70 times in this example) and the second transition condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. In, the display control that the meter is full is performed, and as the transition notification effect, "Small hit RUS
The movable body 32 on which the text “H rush” is displayed moves to the front of the image display device 5.

In the present feature part 014IW, as shown in FIG. 18-41, a battle challenge effect or a chance battle effect indicating that the first shift condition is satisfied, and a small hit meter effect indicating that the second shift condition is satisfied. It can be executed in the period. In addition, the small hit meter effect can be executed in a mode in which the visibility is lower than the battle challenge effect and the chance battle effect. Specifically, in the small hit meter effect, the display size of a character or the like is smaller than in the battle challenge effect and the chance battle effect, and the display position is also located away from the center of the display area of the image display device 5. With such a configuration, while paying attention mainly to the battle challenge effect or the chance battle effect, by simultaneously executing the small hit meter effect, it is possible to pay attention to both the first transition condition and the second transition condition. Can improve the entertainment interest of the game.

It should be noted that the effect suggesting that the second transition condition is satisfied (that is, transition to the small hit RUSH state) is not limited to the effect mode such as the small hit meter effect of the present example, but may be, for example, the image display device 5.
The display mode of the display area at the end of the display screen and the light emission mode of the lamp provided separately from the image display device 5 change to a mode indicating the number of small hits (for example, white → blue → green → red → rainbow). , The color changes in this order, and when the color changes to iridescent, the establishment of the second transition condition is determined).
In addition, depending on whether or not the second transition condition is set, and in accordance with the type of the second transition condition that is set, the effect mode of the effect that suggests the establishment of the second transition condition is determined at different rates. Is also good. That is, the degree of expectation that the second transition condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the small hit RUSH state may be suggested by the effect mode of the effect indicating that the second transition condition is satisfied. In this case, among the plurality of types of effect modes, the effect mode in which the visibility of the effect is high (for example, the display size of an image related to the effect is large, the display position is close to the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the like) However, the expectation that the second shift condition is satisfied and the shift to the small hit RUSH state may be increased. Further, the effect indicating that the second transition condition is satisfied may be executed not only during the small hit game but also during the fluctuation display.

The configuration indicated by the present feature part 014IW may be configured to be applied to a pachinko gaming machine configured to change a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) according to a set value. FIG. 18-42 is an explanatory diagram for describing a case where the setting value is configured to be changeable. Among them, FIG.
42 (A) shows a winning probability of a big hit and a winning probability of a small hit for each set value in a non-probable change state (low-probability state). FIG. 18-42 (B) shows the winning probability of the big hit and the winning probability of the small hit for each set value in the probable change state (high probability state). Fig. 18-4
In the example shown in FIG. 2, there is shown a case where the setting can be changed in six stages of the setting values “1” to “6”. It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in six stages, but may be configured such that the setting can be changed in two to five stages, or the configuration can be changed in seven or more stages.

In the example shown in FIG. 18-42 (A), in the non-probable change state (low probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest as the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “255/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 18-42 (B), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times higher in the probability-change state (high-probability state) than in the non-probability-change state (low-probability state). If the value is “1”, the jackpot probability “2050/6553”
"6", which is the lowest setting for the player. Then, the set value “2”,
The big hit probability increases in the order of the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6”
Is the highest with the jackpot probability “2550/65536”, which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 18-42 (A) and (B), the set value “1” is set.
~ 6, irrespective of the non-probable state (low probability state) or the probable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is "62986/65536". Is constant. Even if the big hit probability is made different according to the set value and the small hit probability becomes constant as described above, as shown in FIGS. May be made different for the set values “1” to “6” so that the number of determination values for each set value matches. With such a configuration, since the small hit probability is constant irrespective of the set value, it is possible to suppress the gambling property from becoming excessively high. FIG. 18-42 (
In (A) and (B), the small hit probability is matched in the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state), and the outlier probability is different. The small hitting probability may be made lower than that of the non-probable changing state (low-probability state) by the increase in the big hitting probability with respect to the probable changing state (low-probability state), and the outlier probability may be matched. Further, the set values are, for example, “1” and “2”.
, The big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. Thereby, in a gaming machine having substantially less than six settable stages or a gaming machine having no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a gaming machine of a type having a six-stage setting change function and a hardware / software configuration Can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Note that the determination value is not limited to the examples illustrated in FIGS. 18-42 (A) and (B), and the determination value may be set so that there is a case where the set value “6” is out of order in the surely changed state. By doing so, there is a case where all the set values are shifted, so that it is possible to increase the difficulty of the setting guess by the player and to enhance the interest.

In addition, when the configuration shown by this characteristic portion 014IW is applied to a pachinko gaming machine configured to change a winning probability (a payout rate) of a big hit according to a set value, during a change display, during a big hit game During at least one of the small hit games, a setting suggestion effect indicating the set value may be executed. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only when the KT state (or the second KT state) is controlled. As a setting suggestion effect, for example, a setting suggestion effect during a fluctuation display executed during a fluctuation display, a setting suggestion effect during a big hit executed during a big hit game, and a setting suggestion effect during a small hit game executed during a small hit game Alternatively, it may be possible to perform the execution in a plurality of types of effect modes each having a different suggestion reliability, or the reliability of the suggestion may be different for each type of setting suggestion effect. The execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be settable. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine may be able to change the setting so that some or all of the setting suggestion effects are not executed or the execution ratio is reduced (or increased). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the push button 31 is displayed.
By operating an operation means such as B or an operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate), the setting relating to the setting suggestion effect may be changed.

As described above, a configuration for solving the following problem is disclosed in the characteristic portion 014IW. That is, some gaming machines are configured to be controllable to a special state (for example, a small hit RUSH) in which a gaming value is more easily provided in a special state (small hit gaming state) than in a normal state. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127 discloses that when a variable display is performed a specified number of times in a probable mode in which a high probability state and a time saving state are set, a transition to a small hit RUSH mode in which a small hit occurs with high frequency is performed. Has been described.

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127, it is clear that in the probable mode, the display is shifted to the small hit RUSH mode by performing the variable display a specified number of times. Can not be improved.

Therefore, in the present characteristic part 014IW, the following configurations (means D1) to (means D8) are disclosed in order to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of improving a gaming interest.

(Means D1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs a variable display (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol changing display), and is a variable device (for example, a variable device that can be changed between an accessible state and a difficult-to-enter state). Special variable winning prize ball device 17), special state control means capable of controlling a variable state to a state in which the variable means can enter (for example, a small hitting game state), and a special state (eg, , A second KT state), and a first condition (for example, a variable number of times) related to a variable number of display times when controlled to a non-special state (for example, a first KT state) different from the special state. A first transition condition) and a second condition (for example, a second condition) different from the first condition.
(For example, the CPU 103 performs steps 014IWS001B to 014 when the CPU 103 executes steps 014IWS001B to 014).
IWS015B).
According to such a configuration, the conditions for shifting to the special state can be given a variety, and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

(Means D2) In the means D1, the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied based on the number of executions of the control of the special state (for example, the number of occurrences of the small hitting game state), and is derived and displayed as a variable display result. Sometimes, there may be a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) in which the control of the special state is performed, and a non-special display result (for example, a missing symbol) in which the control of the special state is not performed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times the special display result is derived and displayed, and it is possible to improve a game entertainment.

(Means D3) In the means D1 or the means D2, a plurality of types of second conditions having different degrees of advantage (for example, a second transition condition A that is satisfied by occurrence of 30 small hitting game states, or 70 small hitting game states) May be satisfied when the second transition condition B) is satisfied.
According to such a configuration, the variety of the game can be increased, and the type of the second condition can be noticed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means D4) In any one of the means D1 to D3, a plurality of types of first types having different degrees of advantage are provided.
(For example, the first transition condition A that is satisfied by executing the change display 90 times,
The first transition condition B that is satisfied by performing the variable display four times and the first transition condition C that is satisfied by performing the variable display forty times may be used.
According to such a configuration, the variety of games can be increased, and the type of the first condition can be noticed, and the interest in the games can be improved.

(Means D5) In any one of the means D1 to D4, there is provided an advantageous state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and the advantageous state control means has an advantage in the advantageous state May be controllable to a plurality of types of advantageous states (e.g., probable big hits B to F) having different conditions for shifting to the special state (e.g., the number of rounds is common in 5Rs). .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of the game and to pay attention to the types of advantageous states, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Means D6) In any one of the means D1 to D5, the non-special state has a lower degree of advantage than the special state, and a disadvantageous special state (eg, 1K
T state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the diversity of the game and improve the entertainment of the game.

(Means D7) In any of means D1 to D6, control can be performed between a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) and a specific state (for example, a high probability state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Specific state control means and second transition means (for example, when the CPU 103 is capable of transitioning from the non-special state to the normal state based on the first condition being satisfied while being controlled to the non-specific state). Steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS007B), and have a plurality of types of first conditions (for example, a first transition condition A that is satisfied by performing the change display 90 times and a change condition that is performed by performing the change display 65 times). First transition condition B
, The first transition condition C) that is satisfied by performing the variable display 40 times.
According to such a configuration, the variety of games can be increased, and the type of the first condition can be noticed, and the interest in the games can be improved.

(Means D8) In the means D7, a common effect in a common mode (for example, a battle challenge) when the vehicle is controlled to the specific state and when the vehicle is controlled to the non-specific state when the vehicle is controlled to the non-special state. Common effect execution means capable of executing an effect or a chance battle effect), and an information effect (for example, a battle challenge effect or a chance battle effect) for notifying whether the common effect is continued or terminated in accordance with the type of the first condition. Notification effect execution means capable of executing each battle effect in the above).
According to such a configuration, when the common effect is executed, it is difficult for the player to guess whether the game is controlled to the specific state or the non-specific state, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to notice whether the common effect is continued or ended, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, a configuration for solving the following problem is disclosed in the characteristic portion 014IW. That is, some gaming machines are configured to be controllable to a special state (for example, a small hit RUSH) in which a gaming value is more easily provided in a special state (small hit gaming state) than in a normal state. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127 discloses that when a variable display is performed a specified number of times in a probable mode in which a high probability state and a time saving state are set, a transition to a small hit RUSH mode in which a small hit occurs with high frequency is performed. Has been described.

However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-148127, a stochastic mode, a non-stochastic time saving mode, and a small hit RUSH mode are provided as effect modes. Since it is clear that the game mode shifts to the small hit RUSH mode, it is not possible to sufficiently improve the gaming interest.

Therefore, in the present characteristic part 014IW, the following (means E1) to (means E6) configurations are disclosed in order to solve a problem of providing a gaming machine capable of improving a gaming interest.

(Means E1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 17) that can be changed between an approachable state and a difficult-to-enter state, and a special state (for example, a variable state that allows the variable means to enter). A special state control means that can be controlled to a small hitting game state), a special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state, and a non-special state different from the special state. When the state is controlled to the state (for example, the first KT state), one of the first condition (for example, the first transition condition) and a second condition (for example, the second transition condition) different from the first condition are satisfied. A transition unit (for example, the CPU 103 performs steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS015) that can transition from the non-special state to the special state based on the establishment.
B), a first suggestion effect (for example, a battle challenge effect or a chance battle effect) indicating that the first condition is satisfied, and a second suggestion effect (for example, indicating that the second condition is satisfied).
And a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the small hit meter effect in a different manner (for example, see FIGS. 18-41 and the like).
According to such a configuration, the condition for shifting to the special state can be provided with diversity, and it can be noticed whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, thereby improving the game entertainment. be able to.

(Means E2) In the means E1, a gaming machine that performs variable display, wherein the first condition is a condition that can be satisfied based on the number of times of variable display (for example, the number of times of performing variable display), and the second condition is:
The condition may be established based on the number of executions of the special state control (for example, the number of occurrences of the small hitting game state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times of variable display and the number of times of execution of control of the special state, and it is possible to improve a game entertainment.

(Means E3) In the means E1 or the means E2, the suggestion effect execution means executes the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect in a common period (for example, a period in which the battle is in the battle challenge mode or the chance battle mode). It is possible that the second suggestion effect can be executed in a mode in which the visibility is lower than that of the first suggestion effect (for example, see FIGS. 18 to 41).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make both the first condition and the second condition interested by executing the second suggestion effect while simultaneously paying attention mainly to the first suggestion effect,
Amusement in entertainment can be improved.

(Means E4) In any of the means E1 to E3, control is performed between a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) and a specific state (for example, a high probability state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Possible specific state control means and second transition means capable of transitioning from the non-special state to the normal state based on the first condition being satisfied when controlled to the non-specific state (for example, The CPU 103 executes steps 014IWS001B to 014IWS007B
And a plurality of types of first conditions (for example, a first transition condition A that is satisfied by performing the change display 90 times, and a first transition that is satisfied by performing the change display 65 times). Condition B, a first transition condition C) that is satisfied by executing the variable display 40 times may be adopted.
According to such a configuration, the variety of games can be increased, and the type of the first condition can be noticed, and the interest in the games can be improved.

(Means E5) In the means E4, when being controlled to the non-special state, a common effect in a common mode (for example, a battle challenge) between the case of being controlled to the specific state and the case of being controlled to the non-specific state Common effect execution means capable of executing an effect or a chance battle effect), and an information effect (for example, a battle challenge effect or a chance battle effect) for notifying whether the common effect is continued or terminated in accordance with the type of the first condition. Notification effect execution means capable of executing each battle effect in the above).
According to such a configuration, when the common effect is executed, it is difficult for the player to guess whether the game is controlled to the specific state or the non-specific state, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to notice whether the common effect is continued or ended, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Means E6) In the means E5, a continuation suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a continuation suggestion effect (for example, a continuation suggestion effect) indicating that the common effect is continued may be provided before the notification effect is executed. .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the attention degree of the notification effect before the execution of the notification effect,
Amusement in entertainment can be improved.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), it is clear that if the mode is the probable change mode, the display is shifted to the small hitting RUSH mode by performing variable display a specified number of times. However, it is not possible to sufficiently improve the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, in order to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of improving gaming interest, the following features (means F1) to (means F8) are disclosed in the characteristic portion 014IW.

(Means F1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs a variable display (for example, a change display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol), and is a variable device (for example, a variable device that can be changed between an accessible state and a difficult-to-enter state). Special variable winning ball device 17), special state control means that can be controlled to a special state in which the variable means can enter (for example, a small hitting game state), and special state in which a game value is easily given by the special state ( For example, a special state control means that can be controlled to a second KT state) and a first condition (for example, a variable display count) that is controlled to a non-special state (for example, a first KT state) different from the special state. , A first transition condition) and a second condition different from the first condition (for example, a second transition condition), the transition from the non-special state to the special state is possible. Means (for example , CPU103 is step 014IWS001B~01
4IWS015B).
According to such a configuration, the conditions for shifting to the special state can be given a variety, and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

(Means F2) In the gaming machine of (Means F1), the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied based on the number of executions of the control of the special state (for example, the number of occurrences of the small hitting game state). As a special display result (e.g.,
There may be a small hit symbol) and a non-special display result (for example, a missing symbol) in which the control of the special state is not performed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times the special display result is derived and displayed, and it is possible to improve a game entertainment.

(Means F3) In the gaming machine of (Means F1) or (Means F2), a plurality of types of second conditions having different degrees of advantage (for example, a second transition condition A that is satisfied by the occurrence of 30 small hitting game states, , A second transition condition B) that is satisfied by the occurrence of the small hitting game state 70 times.
According to such a configuration, the variety of the game can be increased, and the type of the second condition can be noticed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means F4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (Means F1) to (Means F3), there are a plurality of types of first conditions having different degrees of advantage (for example, a first transition which is satisfied by executing the variable display 90 times). The condition A, the first transition condition B that is satisfied by performing the change display 65 times, and the first transition condition C that is satisfied by performing the change display 40 times may be used.
According to such a configuration, the variety of games can be increased, and the type of the first condition can be noticed, and the interest in the games can be improved.

(Means F5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (Means F1) to (Means F4), there is provided an advantageous state control means capable of controlling a player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), which is advantageous to the player. The means controls a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, the probability variable hit BF) having different common conditions (eg, the number of rounds is common in 5Rs) and different conditions for shifting to the special state. It may be possible.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of the game and to pay attention to the types of advantageous states, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Means F6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (Means F1) to (Means F5), the non-special state has a lower degree of advantage than the special state, and is disadvantageous in that the special state hardly provides a game value (for example, , The first KT state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the diversity of the game and improve the entertainment of the game.

(Means F7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (Means F1) to (Means F6), a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) and a specific state that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state (
For example, a specific state control means that can be controlled to a high probability state) and a transition from the non-special state to the normal state based on the first condition being satisfied when controlled to the non-specific state. Possible second shifting means (for example, when the CPU 103 executes the steps 014IWS001B to 01
4IWS007B), and has a plurality of types of first conditions (for example, 9
The first transition condition A, which is satisfied by performing the variable display 0 times, the first transition condition B, which is satisfied by performing the variable display 65 times, and the first transition condition C, which is satisfied by performing the variable display 40 times. It may be.
According to such a configuration, the variety of games can be increased, and the type of the first condition can be noticed, and the interest in the games can be improved.

(Means F8) In the gaming machine according to (Means F7), when the game machine is controlled to the non-special state, the game machine is controlled to the specific state and is controlled to the non-specific state. A common effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, a battle challenge effect or a chance battle effect), and an information effect (for example, a battle) for notifying whether the common effect is continued or terminated in accordance with the type of the first condition. A notification effect execution means capable of executing a challenge effect or a chance effect in a chance battle effect) may be provided.
According to such a configuration, when the common effect is executed, it is difficult for the player to guess whether the game is controlled to the specific state or the non-specific state, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to notice whether the common effect continues or ends, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 012SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 012SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 012SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 012SH includes game control means. The game control means controls the progress of the game. The game control means can control the game state to an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a specific state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state for the player, for example, a jackpot gaming state. When the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the game control means controls to the advantageous game state.

The special state is a special state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small hitting game state. The game control means controls the small hitting game state when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B.

The special state is a state in which a game value is easily given by the special state, for example, a second KT state. The specific state is a state different from the special state, for example, a first KT state. The game control means controls in a specific state after the end of the big hit game state when any of the large-variable big hits B to D described later with reference to FIG. 19A occurs.

The game control means can shift from the specific state to the special state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition while controlling to the specific state. The satisfaction of the predetermined condition is, for example, a condition of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols) of the number of times according to the type of big hit. Satisfaction of the predetermined condition is, for example, if the big hit type is the probable big hit B, the change display is executed 90 times after being controlled to the specific state. If the big hit type is the probable big hit C, The variable display is executed 65 times after being controlled to the specific state, and if the big hit type is the probable variable big hit D, the variable display is executed 40 times after being controlled to the specific state. In other words, the game control means shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state by performing any one of 90, 65, and 40 variable displays while controlling in the first KT state. It is possible. That is, in the characteristic portion 012SH, the type of the advantageous state (probable variation big hit B to D
), The type of the predetermined condition is different.

However, the establishment of the predetermined condition may be a condition of occurrence of the number of small hit games according to the big hit type. For example, establishment of the predetermined condition may be execution of a small hit game of 70 times or 30 times depending on the big hit type. In other words, the game control means may execute the small hitting game of 70 times or 30 times during the control in the first KT state, thereby shifting the state from the first KT state to the second KT state. Good.

Further, the game control means can control, as the advantageous state, a plurality of types of advantageous states having different degrees of advantage for the player. The plurality of types of advantageous states having different degrees of advantage are, for example, probability variable hits B to D described later with reference to FIG. Here, even if any of the big hits A to C occurs, the game control means can control the game in a specific state after the big hit game state ends. Further, the game control means can shift from the specific state to the non-KT state based on the satisfaction of the condition for shifting to the normal state (non-KT state) while controlling to the specific state. .

The satisfaction of the condition for shifting to the non-KT state is, for example, a condition of executing the variable display of the number of times according to the type of big hit. For example, the satisfaction of the condition for shifting to the non-KT state is that if the big hit type is the normal big hit A, the display is changed 90 times after being controlled to the specific state, and if the big hit type is the normal big hit B, The variable display is executed 65 times after being controlled to the specific state. If the big hit type is the normal big hit C, the variable display is executed 40 times after being controlled to the specific state. That is, when the game control means is performing control in the specific state (first KT state), any one of 90 times, 65 times, and 40 times of the variable display is executed, thereby changing the state from the specific state to the non-KT state. It is possible to shift to. That is, in the characteristic portion 012SH, whether or not the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (probable variable hit or normal hit).

Further, the gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 012SH includes an effect control unit capable of executing an effect. The effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect indicating that the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state. The suggested effect may be an effect that is performed within a period from being controlled to a specific state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and may be, for example, an effect performed continuously until the predetermined condition is satisfied, or a predetermined condition. Only for a specific period of time (for example, only one change)
The effect may be performed.

The effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects having different modes as the suggestion effect. The plurality of types of suggested effects in different modes may be effects in an effect mode in which the color and the mode of the background image are different, or effects in which characters appear differently. Characteristic part 012S
In H, the rate at which the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state differs depending on which type of the suggestion effect is executed.

For example, when the specific suggestion effect (for example, an effect mode in which the background image is red or an effect in which a specific character appears) is performed, the characteristic unit 012SH is more effective than when the specific suggestion effect is not performed. The game state may be shifted from the specific state to the special state at a high rate.

Further, the effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect in which the mode of the effect changes as the suggestion effect. In the characteristic part 012SH, the degree of expectation that the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state and the length of the remaining period of the specific state are suggested by the mode of the specific suggestion effect. The specific suggestion effect includes, for example, a stage effect (effect mode) in which a plurality of stages are changed and the stage changes, an effect of accumulating level values (an effect of increasing the gauge, and adding the number of defeated enemies). Directing). Further, the specific suggestion effect may be, for example, an effect having a plurality of stories and the stories changing (developing).

Here, a case where the specific suggestion effect is a stage effect will be described as an example. The stage effect is an effect in which one of a plurality of stages is selected and executed. For example,
The stage effect is an effect of different background images depending on the stage, and is an effect performed over one or a plurality of variable displays. In addition, in the stage effect, in addition to the background image, the character image, the BGM, the hold image, the active display image, the display mode of the remaining number display, the interface image, the display mode of the decorative pattern, and the like are different depending on the stage. Is also good.

For example, it is assumed that the stage production has a strong stage and a weak stage. For example, if the number of fluctuations controlled in the specific state (the first KT state) after the big hit game is longer (in the case of 90 times) than in the case of being short (in the case of 40 times), the strong stage can be easily executed. Good. Thus, the strong stage can be an effect indicating that the remaining period of the specific state is long. Further, when shifting from the specific state (first KT state) to the special state (second KT state), the strong stage may be more easily executed than the weak stage. This allows
The strong stage may be an effect that indicates that the degree of expectation (possibility) of the game state shifting from the specific state to the special state is high.

On the other hand, if the number of changes controlled in the specific state (first KT state) after the big hit game is long (
If it is shorter than 90 (in the case of 90 times) (in the case of 40 times), the weak stage may be easily executed. Thus, the weak stage can be an effect indicating that the remaining period of the specific state is short. Further, when shifting from the specific state (first KT state) to the special state (second KT state), the weak stage may be more easily executed than the strong stage. Thus, the weak stage can be an effect indicating that the degree of expectation (possibility) of the game state shifting from the specific state to the special state is low.

Further, the effect executing means can execute an information effect for informing that the gaming state shifts from the fixed state (first KT state) to the special state (second KT state). The effect execution means is capable of executing the notification effect in response to the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 90 times, 65 times, or 40 times) in the specific state. In this case, for example, in the specific state controlled after the jackpot game state of the probability change jackpot B, the effect execution means executes the notification effect in response to the execution of the variable display 90 times.

In addition, the notification effect may include an effect of notifying that the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the normal state (non-KT state). In this case, for example, the effect execution means changes the gaming state from the specific state to the normal state (non-KT) in response to the 90 times of variable display being executed in the specific state controlled after the normal jackpot A gaming state. The notification effect for notifying the transition to the (state) may be executed.

In addition, the notification effect is an effect that notifies that the game state does not change from the specific state in response to the execution of the variable number of times of the predetermined number of times (an effect that notifies the stage shift, an effect that notifies that the stage does not shift). ) May be included. In this case, for example, the effect execution means does not change the gaming state from the specific state in response to the variable display being performed 40 or 65 times in the specific state controlled after the jackpot gaming state of the probability change jackpot B. What is necessary is just to perform the notification effect which notifies that.

In addition, when the establishment of the predetermined condition is the occurrence of the small hit game of the number of times corresponding to the big hit type, the effect execution means, in the specific state, in response to the occurrence of the predetermined number of small hit games, the notification effect, May be performed.

In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of small hit games corresponding to the type of big hit occurs, and the stage indicates the degree of expectation (possibility of shifting) to the special state (second KT state) based on the number of small hits. May be. For example, in a configuration in which a transition from the first KT state to the second KT state can be made by executing a predetermined number of small hit games (for example, 30 or 70 times) according to the type of big hit, When shifting to the second KT state by executing the small hitting game, the strong stage may be more easily selected than when shifting to the second KT state by executing the small hitting game 70 times. Further, as the number of transitions to the second KT state approaches the specified number, the strong stage may be more easily selected. Specifically, when the state shifts to the second KT state by performing the small hitting game 30 times, when the number of small hitting game executions is 20 or more than when the number of small hitting game executions is less than 10 times, The strong stage may be easily selected. Thereby, the degree of transition expectation to the second KT state and the transition time can be indicated by the stage.

(About the jackpot type determination table in the characteristic part 012SH)
Next, the jackpot type determination table according to the characteristic portion 012SH will be described. Fig. 19-1
(A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table 12SH10a relating to the characteristic portion 012SH. FIG. 19-1 (B) shows a jackpot type determination table 012S relating to the characteristic portion 012SH.
It is explanatory drawing which shows H10b. In the big hit type determination tables 012SH10a and 10b shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the big hit type determination tables 138IW131a and 131b shown in FIGS. It differs from the jackpot type determination tables 138IW131a and 131b in that they do not include E and F. In the following, FIG. 18-1 (D
) And (E) different points from the big hit type determination tables 138 IW 131 a and 131 b will be described.

The big hit type determination tables 012SH10a and 10b indicate that when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit is “probably variable big hit A” and “probably variable big hit B” based on the random number for hit type determination. , "Probable jackpot C", "probable jackpot D", "normal jackpot A"
, "Normal big hit B" and "normal big hit C".

As shown in FIG. 19A, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, 15%
Is determined as “probable variable jackpot A” with a probability of 25%, and is determined as “probable variable jackpot B” with a probability of 25%.
It is determined as “probable jackpot C” with a probability of 5%, determined as “probable jackpot D” with a probability of 10%, determined as “ordinary jackpot A” with a probability of 8%, and determined as “ordinary jackpot A” with a probability of 12%. B "and" normal jackpot C "with a probability of 15%.

Here, each jackpot type will be supplemented. When the probability change big hit A occurs, the game shifts to the second KT state after the big hit game, and the second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. That is, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) loops until a big hit occurs.

In addition, when the probability change big hit B occurs, it is controlled to the first KT state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and when the special symbol change display is performed 90 times in the first KT state, the first KT state is changed to the second KT state. Transition. When the probability change big hit C occurs, the state is controlled to the first KT state after the big hit game state ends, and when the special symbol is displayed 65 times in the first KT state, the state shifts from the first KT state to the second KT state. . If the probability change big hit C occurs,
The state is controlled to the first KT state after the end of the big hit game state, and when the special symbol change display is performed 40 times in the first KT state, the state is shifted from the first KT state to the second KT state.

In addition, when the normal big hit A occurs, the first KT state is controlled after the big hit game state is ended, and when the special symbol change display is performed 90 times in the first KT state, the first KT state is changed to the non-KT state ( Normal state). When the normal big hit B occurs, the big hit game state is controlled to the first KT state after the end of the big hit game state, and when the special symbol variation display is performed 65 times in the first KT state, the KT state is changed to the non-KT state (the normal state). ). When the normal big hit C occurs, the state is controlled to the first KT state after the big hit game state ends, and when the special symbol variation display is performed 40 times in the first KT state, the first KT state is changed to the non-KT state (
Normal state).

Here, the tendency of each big hit type to be determined in the big hit type determination table 012SH10a will be described. If any of the large-variable big hits B, C, and D occurs, the state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state after the big hit game state ends. When the probability variable jackpots B, C, and D are compared, the probability variable jackpot B is most easily determined (25%), and then the variable probability jackpot C is determined easily (
15%), and the probability variable hit D is most difficult to be determined (10%). That is, the number of times of the variable display controlled in the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variable big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol is most likely to be 90 times, and then 65 times. Is high, and the possibility of reaching 40 times is the lowest.

Also, when any of the normal big hits A, B, and C occurs, the state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state after the big hit game state ends. When comparing the normal jackpots A, B, and C, the normal jackpot C is most easily determined (15%), then the ordinary jackpot B is easily determined (12%), and the ordinary jackpot A is most difficult to be determined (8%). . That is, the number of times of the variable display controlled in the first KT state after the end of the big jackpot game state based on the variable display of the first special symbol is most likely to be 40 times, and then 65 times. And the probability of reaching 90 times is the lowest.

For this reason, the player can expect a transition from the first KT state to the second KT state as the first KT state continues for a longer time. More specifically, according to the big hit type determination table 012SH10a, the probability of transition to the second KT state after the 40th variation display in the first KT state is 59%, and the transition to the second KT state after the 65th variation display in the first KT state. 67%, and the probability of shifting to the second KT state after 90 times of fluctuation display in the first KT state is 76%.

The procedure for calculating the probability will be described below. The probability of shifting to the second KT state after the 40th fluctuation display in the first KT state is “4 in the first KT state after the big hit game.
For each of the jackpots (probably variable jackpots B to D and normal jackpots A to C) that can be displayed 0 times, the number of judgment values that can be obtained is added, and It can be obtained as a ratio of "a number obtained by adding the number of each determination value that can be taken by the probability variable jackpot (probably variable jackpot BD)". That is, “the number of determination values“ 25 ”that“ probably variable jackpot B ”can take, the number“ 15 ”of determination values that“ probable variable jackpot C ”can take, and the number of determination values that“ probable variable jackpot D ”can take” 10
", The number of judgment values that the" normal jackpot A "can take, the number of judgment values that the" normal jackpot B "can take, and the number of judgment values that the" normal jackpot C "can take. 15 "and the number"
85 ”,“ 25 ”, the number of judgment values that“ probably big hit B ”can take,“ 15 ”the number of judgment values that“ probably big hit C ”can take, and the judgment value that“ probable big hit D ”can take Number of "10"
And (50 ÷ 85 = 59%).

Similarly, the probability of shifting to the second KT state after the 65th variation display in the first KT state is:
"6 which is the number obtained by adding the number of judgment values that can be taken by each of the big hits (probably variable big hits B and C, and the normal big hits A and B) that can be displayed 65 times in the first KT state after the big hit game"
It can be obtained as a ratio of "a number obtained by adding the number of each determination value that can be taken by each probability jackpot (probability jackpot B, C) in which the variable display is performed up to five times." That is, “the number of determination values“ 25 ”that“ probably variable jackpot B ”can take, the number“ 15 ”of determination values that“ probability variable jackpot C ”can take, and the number of determination values that“ normal jackpot A ”can take“ 8 ”and the number of judgment values that“ normal jackpot B ”can take“
"12" and "60", the number of "judgment values""
25 "and the number" 15 "of determination values that can be taken by the" probable change big hit C "can be obtained as a ratio (40/60 = 67%) of the number" 40 ".

Similarly, the probability of shifting to the second KT state after 90 times of fluctuation display in the first KT state is:
"Change display up to 90 times" with respect to "the number obtained by adding the number of judgment values that can be taken by each big hit (probable change big hit B, normal big hit A) that can be displayed 90 times in the first KT state after the big hit game" Is performed, the number of the determination values that can be taken by each of the probable variable jackpots (probable variable jackpots B) is calculated. That is, “the number“ 33 ”obtained by adding the number“ 25 ”of determination values that“ probable variable big hit B ”can take and the number“ 8 ”of determination values that“ normal big hit A ”can take
Of “the number of judgment values“ 25 ”that can be taken by“ probable change big hit B ”” (25 ÷ 33 =
76%).

Next, FIG. 19-1 (B) will be described. As shown in the big hit type determination table 012SH10b in FIG. 19-1 (B), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, 15%
Is determined to be “probable jackpot A” with a probability of 30%, and is determined to be “probable jackpot B” with a probability of 30%.
With a probability of 5%, it is determined as "probably big hit C", and with a probability of 5%, it is determined as "probable big hit D".
With 5% probability, "normal jackpot A" is determined, with 15% probability "normal jackpot B", and with 20% probability "normal jackpot C".

Here, in the big hit type determination table 012SH10b, the tendency to determine each big hit type is the same as the big hit type determination table 012SH10a, but is set to be more remarkable than the big hit type determination table 012SH10a. Specifically, in the big hit type determination table 012SH10b, when the probability change big hits B, C, and D are compared,
Like the big hit type determination table 012SH10a, the probability variable big hit B is most easily determined, the next probability variable big hit C is easily determined, and the probability variable big hit D is most difficult to be determined. Furthermore, when compared with the big hit type determination table 012SH10a, the big hit type determination table 012S
In the case of H10b, the probability variation big hit B is more easily determined, and the probability variation big hit D is more difficult to determine. That is, the number of times of the variable display controlled in the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variable big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol is determined by the big hit type determination table 012.
Compared to SH10a, the probability of being 90 times is higher and the probability of being 40 times is lower.

Also, comparing the normal jackpots A, B, and C in the jackpot type determination table 012SH10b, the normal jackpot C is most easily determined, and then the normal jackpot B is easily determined, as in the jackpot type determination table 012SH10a. A is the least determined.
Furthermore, in comparison with the jackpot type determination table 012SH10a, in the case of the jackpot type determination table 012SH10b, the normal big hit C is more easily determined, and the normal big hit A is more difficult to be determined. In other words, the number of times of the variable display controlled in the first KT state after the end of the normal jackpot big hit game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol may be 40 times as compared with the big hit type determination table 012SH10a. Higher, less likely to be 90.

For this reason, from the player's point of view, as the first KT state continues for a longer time after the big hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the transition from the first KT state to the second KT state can be more expected. It has become. More specifically, the big hit type determination table 012
By using the SH10b, the probability of shifting to the second KT state after the 40th variation display in the first KT state is 59%, and the second KT state after the 65th variation display in the first KT state.
The probability of transition to the state is 75%, and after the 90th fluctuation display in the first KT state,
The probability of transition to the T state is 86%. Note that the procedure for calculating the probability is the same as the calculation procedure in the big hit type determination table 012SH10a, and a description thereof will be omitted.

(About the effect in the first KT state by the characteristic portion 012SH and the effect after the end of the first KT state)
Next, an effect in the first KT state by the characteristic portion 012SH and an effect after the end of the first KT state will be described. FIG. 19B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the effect in the first KT state and the effect after the end of the first KT state by the characteristic unit 012SH. As shown in FIG. 19-2, after a big hit game of a certain big hit (probably big hit B to D) or a normal big hit (normal big hit A to C), the game is controlled to the first KT state (high base state). As the effect mode indicating the first KT state (high base state), the effect description is performed from the first change to the fifteenth change. In the effect description, the contents of the stage effect are explained. Specifically, in the stage effect, an explanation is given to the effect that the degree of expectation to shift to the small hit RUSH differs depending on the stage in which the user stays.

Here, in the first KT state, the number display indicating the number of changes after the transition to the first KT state is performed, but the number display is not performed in the first to fifteenth changes. about this,
Supplementally, for example, when a big hit (so-called first hit) based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol occurs and the control of the first KT state is started after the big hit game, the first hold memory may be stored. is there. In this case, the change display of the first special symbol by the first holding storage and the change display of the second special symbol by the winning in the second starting winning opening (variable winning ball device 6B) by being controlled in the first KT state. Are performed simultaneously (simultaneous fluctuation). In the first KT state, if such a simultaneous variation is performed despite the effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of one variation of the second special symbol mainly on the image display device 5, if the simultaneous variation is performed, If the number of times is displayed, the number of times is changed by two changes. For this reason,
From the viewpoint of the player, if the display of the number of times changes by two changes even though the effect of the decorative symbol for one change of the second special symbol is performed, the game content may not be understood. . Therefore, in the characteristic portion 012SH, the number of changes is not displayed in the first to fifteenth changes after the shift to the first KT state.

As an effect mode indicating the first KT state (high base state), a stage effect (first stage effect) is performed from the 16th change to the 40th change. Stage production is small hit RUSH
It consists of three stages with different expectations for transition to. For this reason, by performing a stage effect on a stage having a high degree of expectation, the player can be expected to shift to the small hit RUSH. On the other hand, by performing a stage effect with a low degree of expectation, it is possible to indicate to the player that the possibility of shifting to the small hit RUSH is low.

Then, after being controlled in the first KT state (high base state), a branch effect is produced at the 40th variation (first state).
Branch effect) is performed. The branch effect is an effect that notifies the effect contents to be performed thereafter. Specifically, the branching effect is, for example, any of transition to another stage, holding the current stage, transition to the normal mode, transition to the small hit RUSH, and winning the big hit. It is a production that informs you whether to perform. For example, the branch effect is a roulette effect in which a roulette notifies which one to perform. However, the branch production may be another production such as a battle production that confronts an enemy or a story production that develops a story.

When the transition to the small hitting RUSH is notified in the first branch effect, the first stage effect (the first KT state: the high base state) is ended, and the process shifts to the small hitting RUSH (the second KT state). Here, when the notification of the shift to the small hit RUSH is performed in the first branch effect,
In the first stage effect performed before the first branch effect, a stage effect of a stage with high expectation is easily performed.

In addition, when the transition to the normal mode is notified in the first branch effect, the first stage effect (the first KT state) is ended, and the mode shifts to the normal mode (the non-KT state: the normal state). Here, when the transition to the normal mode is notified in the first branch effect, in the first stage effect performed before the first branch effect, a stage effect by a stage having a low degree of expectation is easily performed. .

In addition, when the transition to another stage is notified in the first branch effect, the stage effect (
(1st KT state) is continued, and in the 2nd stage production from the 41st change to the 65th change,
Stage effects will be performed by other stages. The other stage referred to here is a stage having a higher degree of expectation to shift to the small hit RUSH than the current stage. That is, the expected degree does not decrease due to the shift of the stage, so that the effect does not fall. By shifting to another stage in the branching effect, the player is expected to shift to the small hit RUSH or to a stage with a higher expectation in the next branching effect (the branching effect at the 65th variation). be able to.

Also, when the current stage holding is notified in the first branch effect, the stage effect (
(1st KT state) is continued, and in the 2nd stage production from the 41st change to the 65th change,
A stage effect is performed on the same stage as the first stage effect. For example, when a stage with a low degree of expectation continues in the second stage effect, it can be suggested to the player that the possibility of shifting to the small hit RUSH is low.

Then, after being controlled in the first KT state (high base state), a branch effect is produced at the 65th change (second state).
Branch effect) is performed. When the transition to the small hit RUSH is notified in the second branch effect, the second stage effect (the first KT state) is ended, and the process shifts to the small hit RUSH (the second KT state). Here, when the notification of the shift to the small hit RUSH is performed in the second branch effect,
In the second stage production performed before the second branch production, the stage production by the stage with high expectation is more easily performed than in the first stage production.

In addition, in a case where a branch effect in which the transition to the normal mode is notified is performed in the second branch effect, the second stage effect (the first KT state) is ended, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. Here, when the transition to the normal mode is notified in the second branch production, in the second stage production performed before the second branch production, compared to the case where the transition to the normal mode is not performed after the second stage production, It is easier for stage productions to be performed on stages with low expectations.

In addition, when the transition to another stage is notified in the second branch effect, the stage effect (
(1st KT state) is continued, and in the third stage production from the 66th change to the 90th change,
A stage effect is performed on the same stage as the second stage effect.

Then, after being controlled in the first KT state (high base state), a branch effect is produced at the 90th fluctuation (third effect).
Branch effect) is performed. In the third branch effect, since the first KT state ends, the notification of the stage transition is not performed, and any one of the transition to the normal mode, the transition to the small hit RUSH, and the winning of the big hit is notified. You. In the third branch effect, when the transition to the small hit RUSH is notified, the third stage effect is ended and the process shifts to the small hit RUSH. Here, when the notification of the shift to the small hit RUSH is performed in the third branch production, the stage having a higher degree of expectation in the third stage production performed before the third branch production compared to the second stage production. Stage performances are easier to perform.

In addition, in the third branch effect, when the transition to the normal mode is notified, the stage effect is terminated, and the process shifts to the normal mode. Here, when the transition to the normal mode is notified in the third branch production, in the third stage production performed before the third branch production, compared to the case where the transition to the small hit RUSH is performed after the third stage production. However, it is easier for stage productions to be performed on stages with low expectations.

In the characteristic portion 012SH, it is possible to indicate that the higher the degree of expectation of the stage is, the higher the possibility of shifting to the small hit RUSH is, and that the stage effect (the first KT state) is likely to be continued. Can be. On the other hand, the lower the degree of expectation of the stage, the higher the possibility that the stage effect (first KT state) ends earlier (ends in the first branch effect) and the lower the possibility that the stage effect shifts to the small hit RUSH. Can be suggested.

(Example of stage effect determination table in feature section 012SH)
Next, an example of the stage effect determination table in the characteristic portion 012SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-3 to 19-5. FIGS. 19-3 to 19-5 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the stage effect determination table in the feature unit 012SH.

(About stage 1 production decision table)
The first stage effect determination table 012SH20a illustrated in FIG. 19C is a table used to determine the stage of the first stage effect. The first stage effect determination table 012SH20a is used, for example, when a big hit occurs due to a special figure game, and specifically, used when a big hit start designation command is received (01 in FIG. 19-7).
2SHS124).

In the first stage effect determination table 012SH20a, the big hit types indicate normal big hits A to C and positive variable big hits BD. In addition, the first stage effect determination table 012SH20
For the case of the probable big hit A not included in a, no stage performance is performed and the small hit RUS
An effect mode indicating H is performed. In the first stage effect determination table 012SH20a, the stages are stage a (weak stage), stage b (middle stage) having a higher degree of expectation than stage a, and stage c (strong stage) having a higher degree of expectation than stage b. And

As shown in the first stage effect determination table 012SH20a, the stage at the start of the first stage effect is most easily selected as stage a, regardless of the jackpot type.
Stage c is most difficult to select. Specifically, for example, in the case of the normal big hit C, the selected ratio of the stage a is 85%, the selected ratio of the stage b is 14%, and the selected ratio of the stage c is 1%. is there. Further, in the case of the probability change big hit D, the selected ratio of the stage a is 45%, the selected ratio of the stage b is 35%, and the selected ratio of the stage c is 20%. For this reason, in any of the jackpot types, in the first stage effect, the stage effect by the stage a is most likely to be performed, and it is difficult for the player to guess which jackpot type is. Can be.

Further, in the first stage effect determination table 012SH20a, the probability change big hit (B to D
In the case of ()), the stage a is less likely to be selected and the stage c is more likely to be selected than in the case of the normal big hits (A to C).

Also, comparing the normal jackpots A to C in the first stage effect determination table 012SH20a, the smaller the number of changes controlled in the high base state (first KT state), the easier the stage a is selected and the stage c is selected. Hateful. Specifically, for example, in the case of the normal big hit C, the stage a is more easily selected and the stage c is harder to be selected than the normal big hit B. Also, in the case of the normal big hit B, the stage a is easily selected and the stage c is hard to be selected, as compared with the normal big hit A.

On the other hand, in the first stage effect determination table 012SH20a, probability change big hits B to D
In comparison, the smaller the number of changes controlled in the high base state, the more difficult it is to select the stage a and the easier it is to select the stage c. Specifically, for example, in the case of the probability variation big hit D, the stage a is less likely to be selected and the stage c is more easily selected than the probability variation big hit C. Also, in the case of the probable jackpot C, the stage a is less likely to be selected and the stage c is more likely to be selected than the probable jackpot B.

For this reason, when the stage production by the stage a is performed in the first stage production,
Expressing the possibility of each jackpot type using an inequality sign, "ordinary jackpot C> ordinary jackpot B>
Ordinary jackpot A> probably variable jackpot B> probably variable jackpot C> probably variable jackpot D ". For this reason, in the first stage production, when the stage production by the stage a is performed, it is difficult for the player to guess which jackpot type is, and the possibility of the normal jackpot C (ie,
It is possible to suggest that the period controlled in the first KT state is short.

In addition, when the stage production by the stage c is performed in the first stage production, when the possibility of each big hit type is expressed by using an inequality sign, “probable big hit D> probable big hit C> probable big hit B> normal big hit A> normal Big hit B> normal big hit C ". For this reason, in the first stage production, when the stage production by the stage c is performed, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the probability is the probability variation D, that is, there is a high possibility of shifting to the second KT state. (Small hit RUSH is near).

(About stage 2 production decision table)
The second stage effect determination table 012SH20b illustrated in FIG. 19-4 is a table used for determining the stage of the second stage effect. The second stage effect determination table 012SH20b is used at the 40th variation after being controlled to the first KT state, and is specifically used in the variable display start setting process (see 012SHS105 in FIG. 19-6).
. In the description of the second stage effect determination table 012SH20b, the description of the contents described in the first stage effect determination table 012SH20a in FIG. 19C is omitted.

In the second stage effect determination table 012SH20b, the stages from the 16th change to the 40th change indicate the stages in the first stage effect. Stage after transition is 4
The stage of the 2nd stage production from the 1st change to the 65th change is shown.

In addition, in the second stage effect determination table 012SH20b, the probability change big hit D and the normal big hit C are controlled in the high base state, and the variable display is executed 40 times. Since the stage effect is not performed, the columns corresponding to the probability jackpot D and the normal jackpot C in the table are blank.

As shown in the second stage effect determination table 012SH20b, no matter what the big hit type, the expected degree does not decrease (the effect does not drop) due to the stage transition. Specifically, when the first stage effect is stage b, in the second stage effect, either stage b or stage c is determined. Also, if the first stage production is stage c, the stage c must be (100%) in the second stage production
It is to be decided.

Further, as shown in the second stage effect determination table 012SH20b, for any of the jackpot types, the transition from the stage a to the stage b rather than the transition from the stage a to the stage c.
The transition to is becoming easier. In other words, the expectation of the stage gradually (gradually)
The stage is determined so as to be higher. This makes it possible to increase the expectation of the player step by step, while further increasing the expectation of the player when shifting from stage a to stage c.

In addition, as shown in the second stage effect determination table 012SH20b, when the probability change big hit and the normal big hit are compared, the stage shift is easily performed in the case of the probability change big hit. Thereby, it can be suggested that the possibility of shifting to the small hitting RUSH increases due to the stage shifting.

In addition, a comparison between a jackpot that is controlled in a high base state with a small number of times (for example, a probable variable hit C) and a large jackpot that is controlled in a high base state for a large number of times (for example, a probable variable hit B) is performed. The smaller the number of jackpots (for example, the probability variable jackpot C), the easier the stage transition is made. As a result, the possibility of shifting to the small hit RUSH in the next branch effect (the branch effect at the 65th variation) increases due to the stage shift (small hit RU).
SH is imminent).

(About stage 3 production decision table)
The third stage effect determination table 012SH20c illustrated in FIG. 19-5 is a table used to determine the stage of the third stage effect. The third stage effect determination table 012SH20c is used at the 65th change after being controlled to the first KT state.
It is used in the variable display start setting process (see 012SHS105 in FIG. 19-6). In the description of the third stage effect determination table 012SH20c, the description of the contents described in the first stage effect determination table 012SH20a and the second stage effect determination table 012SH20b will be omitted.

In the third stage effect determination table 012SH20c, the stages from the 41st change to the 65th change indicate the stages in the second stage effect. Stage after migration is 6
The stage of the third stage effect from the sixth variation to the 90th variation is shown.

In the third stage effect determination table 012SH20c, in the case of the probable change big hit C and the normal big hit B, the high base state is ended due to the progress of the change that the fluctuation display is performed 65 times after being controlled in the high base state. Since the third stage effect is not performed, the columns corresponding to the probability jackpot C and the normal jackpot B in the table are blank.

As shown in the third stage effect determination table 012SH20c, when the probability change big hit B and the normal big hit A are compared, the stage shift is easily performed in the case of the probability change big hit B. Thus, it can be suggested that the stage shift increases the possibility of shifting to the small hit RUSH in the next branch effect (the branch effect at the 90th change).

(Variable display start setting processing in the characteristic unit 012SH)
Next, an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7 will be described. FIG. 19-6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process in the characteristic unit 012SH.

In FIG. 19-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 012SHS101). Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is controlled to the first KT state (step 012SHS102). In addition, whether or not the control is performed in the first KT state can be determined by confirming whether or not the control is performed in a stage effect (effect mode) indicating the first KT state. The effect control CPU 120 is the first KT
If it is determined that the state is not controlled (step 012SHS102: NO), a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is selected (step 012SHS109), and the process proceeds to step 012SHS110.

If it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the first KT state (step 012SHS102: YES), the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the 40th variation, the 65th variation, and the 90th variation after being controlled to the first KT state. It is determined whether or not there is (Step 012 SHS10
3). Note that whether or not any of the 40th variation, the 65th variation, and the 90th variation after being controlled to the first KT state is determined by determining the remaining number of times in the first KT state (high base state) on the production control side. It can be determined by confirming the value of the effect high base number counter for management. Specifically, the value of the effect high base number counter is set to one of “90”, “65”, and “40” when shifting to the first KT state, and “1” is subtracted every time the change ends. Therefore, if the value is, for example, any one of “0”, “25”, and “50”, any one of the 40th variation, the 65th variation, and the 90th variation after shifting to the first KT state. Can be determined.

The effect control CPU 120 determines that none of the 40th variation, the 65th variation, and the 90th variation has been performed since the first KT state was controlled (step 012SHS103: NO).
, A process table corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command and the determined stage effect is selected (step 012 SHS108), and step 0 is selected.
The process proceeds to 12SHS110. In accordance with the process table selected in step 012SHS108, step 012SHS111 described later and effect processing during variable display (step S1
By performing 72), a stage effect or the like is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

After being controlled to the first KT state, effect control CPU 120 determines that it is any of the 40th variation, the 65th variation, and the 90th variation (step 012SHS103: YE
In S), it is determined whether or not the 90th change has occurred after the first KT state is controlled (step 012SHS104). After the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the first KT state,
If it is determined that it is the 90th variation (step 012 SHS104: YES), step 0
The processing shifts to 12SHS106.

The effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not the 90th change after being controlled to the first KT state (step 012SHS104: NO), that is, at the 40th change or the 65th change after being controlled to the first KT state. When it is determined that there is a stage effect, a stage effect determination process for determining a stage in the stage effect is performed (step 012SHS105). In the stage effect determination processing in step 012SHS105, the second stage effect determination table 012SH20b (see FIG. 19-4) and the third stage effect determination table 012SH2
0c (see FIG. 19-5).

The stage effect determination processing is also performed when the high base state is not continued, that is, for example, when the first KT state ends at the 40th change after being controlled to the first KT state (the probability variable hit D and the normal big hit). C)). However, in this case, as shown in the second stage effect determination table 012SH20b (see FIG. 19-4), the columns corresponding to the probability change big hit D and the normal big hit C are blank, so that in the stage effect determination process, The stage is not determined. However, in this case, it is also possible not to perform the stage effect determination processing.For example, before the stage effect determination processing, whether the high base state is continued with reference to the value of the effect high base number counter. If it is determined whether or not the high base state is to be continued, the stage effect determination process may be performed, and if it is determined that the high base state does not continue, the stage effect determination process may not be performed.

Next, effect control CPU 120 performs a branch effect determination process (step 012SHS).
106). In the branch effect determination process, the result of the stage effect determination process (transition or holding of the stage), the end of the high base state (transition to the normal mode, transition to the small hit RUSH), and the determination of the big hit The effect contents are determined based on the result (win of the jackpot). Here, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, as the content of the branch effect,
The content for notifying the winning of the jackpot is selected. In this case, regardless of the determination result in the stage effect determination process or the end of the high base state, a branch effect of notifying the jackpot winning may be selected, or the determination result in the stage effect determination process, The branch effect of the content of notifying the jackpot winning may be selected while using the effect content of the end of the high base state.

The effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command,
Select a process table according to the determined stage effect, branch effect, etc. (Step 01)
2SHS107), and proceeds to step 012SHS110. Step 012 SHS10
By executing step 012 SHS111 and variable display effect processing (step S172), which will be described later, according to the process table selected in step 7, a branch effect or the like is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Then, effect control CPU 120 determines in steps 012SHS107, S108, S10
9, the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 9 is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step 012SHS1).
10). Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders the effect device (the image display device 5) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1).
, Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R) (step 012SHS111).
. For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, VD
A control signal (display control execution data) is output to P. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decoration symbol variation time timer and starts the decoration symbol variation time timer (step 012SHS112). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 012SHS113), and the variable display start setting process ends.

(Effect mode setting processing in the characteristic part 012SH)
Next, an example of the effect mode setting process in the characteristic unit 012SH will be described. FIG.
-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect mode setting process in the feature unit 012SH. The effect mode setting process is a process performed as a part of the special figure waiting process (S173) in FIG.

In FIG. 19-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) has been received (
Step 012SHS121). If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot start designation command has not been received (step 012 SHS122: NO), step 012.
Move to SHS128. When the big hit start designation command is received (step 012 SHS122: YES), that is, when a big hit occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode determination processing for determining the effect mode to be controlled after the big hit game (step). 012SHS122).

Here, the effect mode is determined by the jackpot type. For example, when the jackpot types are the probable big hits BD and the normal big hits A to C, an effect mode based on the stage effect indicating the first KT state is determined. If the big hit type is the probable big hit A, the small hit RU
An effect mode indicating the SH mode is determined.

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit type is the probability variable big hit A (step 012 SHS123). If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the big hit type is the probability variable big hit A (step 012SHS123: YES), the effect mode to be controlled is determined to be the small hit RUSH mode (step 012SHS137), and the effect mode setting process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the big hit type is not the probability change big hit A (step 012SHS123: NO), the effect mode to be controlled is set to the effect mode of the stage effect, and the stage for the stage effect is determined. A stage effect determination process is performed (step 012 SHS124). Step 012 SHS124
In the stage effect determination process of the first stage effect determination table 012SH20a (FIG. 19)
-3) is used.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect high base number counter to 90,
One of the values 65 and 40 is set (step 012SHS125).
Specifically, in the case of the probability variable jackpot B or the normal jackpot A, the effect high base number counter is set to “90”. The number-of-times counter is set to "65", and in the case of the probability change big hit D and the normal big hit C, "40" is set to the effect high base number counter.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the type of the generated big hit is a probable variable big hit (step 012SHS126). If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the type of the generated big hit is not the probability variable big hit (step 012SHS126: NO), the effect mode setting process ends. On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 120 determines that the type of the generated big hit is the probable variable big hit (step 012SHS126: YES), when the set transition condition is satisfied, the transition from the first KT state to the second KT state is performed. An effect second KT shift flag for management on the effect control side is set (step 012SHS1).
27), the rendering mode setting process ends.

If the effect control CPU 120 has not received the jackpot start designation command (step 012SHS121: NO), the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small jackpot game state, and continues for a predetermined period (the command Is determined (step 012SHS128). If the reception waiting time has elapsed (step 012SHS128: YES), effect control CPU 120 determines that the display result in the special figure game is "losing", and the value of the effect high base number counter is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (Step 012 SHS129).

If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the effect high base number counter is “0” (step 012SHS129: YES), the effect mode setting process ends. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the effect high base number counter is not “0” (step 012SHS129: NO), that is, it is controlled to the low probability / first KT state or the high probability / first KT state. If yes, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts "1" from the value of the effect high base number counter (step 012SHS130).

Then, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect high base number counter has become “0” (step 012SHS131). The effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the effect high base number counter does not become “0” (step 012SHS131: N
O), the effect mode setting process ends. When the value of the effect high base number counter becomes “0” (step 012 SHS 131: YES), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect second KT shift flag is set (step 012 SHS 132).
.

When the second KT transition flag for production is set (step 012 SHS132: Y
ES), that is, controlled to the high probability / first KT state, and from the first KT state to the second KT state.
When shifting to the state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode to be controlled to the small hit RU.
The mode is determined to be the SH mode (step 012SHS133). And effect control CPU12
0 clears the value of the effect high base number counter (step 012SHS1
34), the effect second KT shift flag is reset (step 012SHS135), and the effect mode setting process ends.

When the second KT transition flag for staging is not set (step 012 SHS132:
NO), that is, in the case of being controlled to the low probability / first KT state and shifting from the first KT state to the non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode to be controlled to the normal mode (step 012SHS136). ), End the effect mode setting process.

The characteristic portion 012SH is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode determined in step S012SHS133 or the normal mode determined in step S012SHS136 with the start of the next fluctuation, but is not limited to such a configuration. Before starting, small hit RUSH
The mode or the normal mode may be controlled.

In the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 19-7, by the processes of steps 012SHS121 to S127, after the big hit game, control is performed to one of the effect mode of the stage effect indicating the first KT state and the effect mode of the small hit RUSH mode. Becomes possible.

(An example of the production mode of the production performed in the characteristic portion 012SH)
Next, an example of an effect mode of the effect performed in the characteristic portion 012SH will be described.
FIGS. 19-8 and 19-9 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of a production mode of the production performed in the feature unit 012SH. Note that (1), (2), and (1) shown in FIGS. 19-8 and 19-9.
3) The display screen changes in the order of.

When the state shifts to the first KT state after the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (1), the first to fifteenth change after the big hit game is to explain the contents of the stage effect on the image display device 5. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (2), from the 16th variation to the 40th variation after the jackpot game, the stage a (weak stage), the stage b (middle stage), and the stage c (strong stage) A stage effect (first stage effect) is performed by one of them.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (3), at the 40th change after the big hit game, the current stage is held, the shift to another stage, the shift to the small hit RUSH, or the normal mode is performed. , And a branch effect (first branch effect) for notifying which of the winning and the jackpot is to be performed. In addition, in the variation in which the branching effect such as the 40th variation is performed, without performing the stage effect,
The branch effect alone may be performed, or the stage effect may be continued in the first half portion, and the branch effect may be performed midway.

In the first branch effect, when the holding of the current stage is notified, FIG. 19-8 (4-1)
As shown in), a stage effect (second stage effect) is performed on the same stage as the first stage effect from the 41st variation to the 65th variation after the big hit game.

Also, in the first branch effect, when the transition to another stage is notified, FIG.
As shown in 4-2), from the 41st variation to the 65th variation after the big hit game, a stage effect by a stage having a higher degree of expectation to shift to the small hit RUSH than the stage in the first stage effect (second stage effect) Is performed.

Also, in the first branch effect, when the transition to the small hit RUSH is notified, FIG.
As shown in (4-3), the stage effect is finished, and the mode shifts to the small hit RUSH mode (second KT state).

In addition, in the first branch effect, when the transition to the normal mode is notified, the stage effect is terminated, and the mode shifts to the normal mode (normal state: non-KT state). In addition, in the first branch effect, when the winning of the big hit is notified, the stage effect is finished and the state shifts to the big hit game state.

Then, at the 65th change after the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (5), the second branch effect is performed. In the second branch effect, when the holding of the current stage is notified, FIG.
As shown in -9 (6-1), a stage effect (third stage effect) is performed on the same stage as the second stage effect from the 65th change to the 90th change after the big hit game.

Also, in the second branch effect, when the transition to another stage is notified, FIG.
As shown in 6-2), from the 65th change to the 90th change after the big hit game, a stage effect by a stage having a higher degree of expectation to shift to the small hit RUSH than the stage in the second stage effect (third stage effect) Is performed.

Also, in the second branch effect, when the transition to the small hit RUSH is notified, FIG.
As shown in (6-3), the stage effect is finished, and the mode shifts to the small hit RUSH mode (second KT state).

Further, in the second branch effect, when the transition to the normal mode is notified, the stage effect is terminated, and the mode shifts to the normal mode (normal state: non-KT state). Also, in the second branch effect, when the winning of the big hit is notified, the stage effect is finished and the game shifts to the big hit gaming state.

Then, at the 90th change after the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (7), the third branch effect is performed. In the third branch effect, an effect for notifying the transition of the stage is not performed. In the third branch effect, when the transition to the small hit RUSH is notified, as shown in FIG. 19-9 (8-1), the stage effect is finished, and the mode shifts to the small hit RUSH mode (second KT state). .
In addition, in the third branch effect, when the transition to the normal mode is notified, the stage effect is finished, and the process shifts to the normal mode (normal state: non-KT state). In addition, in the third branch effect, when the winning of the big hit is notified, the stage effect is finished, and the state shifts to the big hit gaming state.

According to the effects shown in FIGS. 19-8 and 19-9, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the shift to the small hit RUSH according to the transition mode of the stage effect. For example, in the first KT state of the jackpot game of the probability change jackpot B, when the transition is made from the weak stage to the middle stage to the strong stage, the player's sense of expectation can be increased step by step. In addition, when both the first stage effect and the second stage effect are consecutive weak stages, it can be suggested that the possibility of shifting to the small hit RUSH is low.

In the above description, the stage transition is performed at the 40th, 65th, and 90th variation (the timing of performing the branch effect) after the big hit game, but is not limited thereto. For example, the stage transition may be made executable at a specific timing, such as when a special symbol is changed and a predetermined number of times (for example, a 25th, 50th, or 75th change) is displayed after a big hit game. . In this case, the characteristic unit 012SH determines whether or not to perform the stage transition at the specific timing, and when it is determined to perform the stage transition, determines the transition destination stage,
Stage transition may be performed. In addition, the branch effect may be performed at a timing when the stage shift is performed, or may be performed at a predetermined timing such as a 40th, 65th, or 90th variation after the big hit game.

As for the stage transition, a scenario indicating the stage transition transition may be determined in advance, and the stage may be switched according to the transition order indicated by the determined scenario. For example, the scenario indicates a transition transition in which the weak stage is set to the 16th to 40th variation, the middle stage is set to the 41st to 65th variation, and the strong stage is set to the 66th to 90th variation. By preparing a plurality of such scenarios and performing the stage transition according to the determined one scenario, there is no need to perform the process of selecting (determining) the stage to be migrated when the stage is migrated. In addition, it is possible to reduce the load on the processing when the stage is shifted.

Also, a set value may be suggested depending on the stage. For example, a stage that is easy to be selected when the set value is even or a stage that is easy to be selected when the set value is odd is prepared, and the stage effect is performed using the selected stage according to the set set value. Just do it.
Also, for example, a stage that is easily selected when the set value is high (for example, when the set values are 5 and 6) and a stage that is easily selected when the set value is low (for example, when the set values are 1 and 2) are prepared. Alternatively, a stage effect may be performed using a stage selected according to the set value. Thereby, the interest of the stage effect can be improved.

Further, in the above description, the branch effect is performed by the predetermined number of times (40, 65, 90 times) after the big hit game, but may be started before the predetermined number of times of the variable display. For example, in the case of performing the branch effect at the 90th change, the branch effect may be performed at the fourth change at the 87th to 90th changes. Thereby, the period for performing the branch effect can be lengthened. Further, when shifting to the small hit RUSH in the branch effect, the branch effect may be started before the predetermined number of times of the fluctuation display. That is, the start timing of the branch effect may be changed based on the transition destination of the effect mode in the branch effect (the transition destination of the gaming state). This allows the user to pay attention to the start timing of the branch effect.

In addition, in a variable display other than the branching effect, when a big hit occurs, a big hit effect may be performed to notify the big hit. In addition, in the fluctuation display other than the branching effect, it may be possible to execute an effect that is a loss (a fuzzy effect such as a reach loss) while being the same effect as the effect for the big hit. Thereby, in the variable display other than the branch effect, when the effect for the big hit is performed, the effect does not always become the big hit, and the interest when the effect for the big hit is performed can be improved.

(Example of a stage production screen in the feature section 012SH)
Next, a screen example of a stage effect in the characteristic portion 012SH will be described. Fig. 19-1
0 is an explanatory view showing a screen example of a stage effect in the characteristic portion 012SH. Fig. 19-1
0 (A) shows a screen example of the stage a (weak stage) displayed on the image display device 5. The stage a is a stage to which the character 012SH30a is applied. For example, various effects are performed using the character 012SH30a. FIG. 19-10 (B) shows the stage b (
5 shows an example of a screen of the middle stage. The stage b is a stage to which the character 012SH30b is applied. For example, various effects are performed using the character 012SH30b. FIG. 19C illustrates a screen example of the stage c (strong stage). The stage c is a stage to which the character 012SH30c is applied, for example, the character 012SH3
Various effects are performed using 0c.

In the stage effect, the number of changes since the control in the high base state (first KT state) is displayed (addition display). Further, in the stage effect, the remaining number of fluctuations controlled in the high base state may be displayed (subtracted display). In addition, the number of times of change may be displayed (added and displayed) from “0” for each stage effect, or the remaining number of times of change until the branch effect may be displayed (subtracted and displayed) for each stage effect. Further, in each stage effect, it may be displayed which of the first stage effect, the second stage effect and the third stage effect.

The stage effect may be any effect as long as the player can recognize the plurality of different stages. For example, the stage effect may be an effect with a different background image for each stage. Further, in each stage, a character display indicating the degree of expectation (for example, weak, medium, or strong) for shifting to the small hit RUSH may be performed. In addition, the stage effect has three stages. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may have two or more stages. For example, the stage effect may have five or ten stages.

(Example screen of branching effect in feature part 012SH)
Next, a screen example of a branch effect in the characteristic portion 012SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-11 and 19-12. FIG. 19-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a screen of the first branch effect performed at the 40th variation after being controlled in the first KT state. In FIG. 19-11, the first branch effect indicates a roulette effect. Specifically, the roulette effect (the first branch effect) is, for example, an area indicating a stage to which a transition is made (a stage in the second stage effect) or a small hit RU.
An area indicating a shift to SH, an area indicating a shift to the normal mode, and an area indicating a jackpot winning are displayed. Each area is sequentially lit, so that the entire area is lit in a roulette manner.

In the roulette effect, an image prompting the push button 31B to be pressed is displayed, and in response to the player pressing the push button 31B, one region is finally turned on (stopped), thereby producing the effect indicated by the region. The content is announced. In addition, in order to stop at one area in the roulette effect, the push button 31B is pressed by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and operation to another operation unit (for example, an operation lever or the like) is performed, Detector for detecting motion (
For example, an action of the player on the sensor) may be performed.

In the roulette effect, the stop area is determined in advance regardless of whether or not the player has pressed the push button 31B. Therefore, the push button 31 by the player
If B is not pressed, one predetermined area is turned on (stopped) after the elapse of the predetermined validity period. Further, in the roulette effect, the area to be stopped may be displayed wider than other areas. Thereby, in the roulette effect, it is possible to suggest in advance a region that is likely to stop.

FIG. 19B illustrates a state in which the area indicating the stage c is finally turned on (stopped) in the roulette effect (the first branch effect), so that the stage b (middle stage) changes to the stage c.
(Strong stage). By shifting from stage b (middle stage) to stage c (strong stage) in the first branch effect, there is a possibility of shifting to the small hit RUSH in the subsequent branch effect (second branch effect or third branch effect). Can be increased.

Further, FIG. 19-11 (C) shows that in the roulette effect, the area indicating the transition to the small hit RUSH is finally turned on (stopped), so that the small hit R is changed from the stage b (middle stage).
Indicates a transition to the USH mode. FIG. 19D shows that the transition from the stage b (middle stage) to the normal mode is made when the area indicating the transition to the normal mode is finally turned on (stopped) in the roulette effect. . Although illustration is omitted, in the roulette effect, the area indicating the big hit finally lights up (stops), indicating that the stage b (middle stage) shifts to the big hit gaming state. Note that the same effect as the first branch effect is also performed for the second branch effect.

FIG. 19-12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a screen of the third branch effect performed at the 90th variation after being controlled in the first KT state. In the roulette effect (third branch effect) shown in FIG. 19-12,
The area indicating the stage is not displayed, and the area indicating the shift to the small hit RUSH, the area indicating the shift to the normal mode, and the area indicating the winning of the big hit are displayed.

FIG. 19-12 (B) shows that in the roulette effect, the area indicating the transition to the small hit RUSH is finally turned on (stopped), so that the small hit RUSH is changed from the stage c (strong stage).
Indicates transition to mode. FIG. 19-12 (C) shows the roulette effect.
Eventually, the region indicating the transition to the normal mode is lit (stopped), indicating that the stage c (strong stage) is shifted to the normal mode.

(Regarding Modification of Performance in First KT State in Characteristic Section 012SH)
Next, a modification of the effect in the first KT state in the characteristic portion 012SH will be described. FIG. 19-13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a modification of the effect in the first KT state in the characteristic portion 012SH. Although the case where the stage effect is performed in the first KT state has been described with reference to FIG. 19-2 and the like described above, the case where the zone challenge effect is performed in the first KT state will be described below. Hereinafter, the description of the contents described in FIG. 19-2 and the like will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 13, in the high base state, in the effect description performed between the first change and the fifteenth change, the content of the zone challenge effect is explained. Specifically, in the description of the effect, the degree of expectation to shift to the small hit RUSH according to the level value (gauge) increased in each of the 16th to 40th fluctuation, 41 to 65th fluctuation, and 66 to 90th fluctuation. Are described.

As an effect mode indicating the first KT state (high base state), a zone challenge effect (first zone challenge effect) is performed in a zone (first zone) from the 16th change to the 40th change. The zone challenge effect is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation to shift to the small hit RUSH after the zone by accumulating the increaseable level values performed in the zone. Specifically, the zone challenge effect is an effect in which the higher the level value (gauge) that can be increased for each variable display in the zone, the higher the degree of expectation to shift to the small hit RUSH after the first zone.

Then, a branch effect (first branch effect) is performed at the 40th variation after the control is performed in the high base state. The branching effect is an effect that informs which one of a shift to a small hit RUSH, a continuation of a zone challenge effect, a shift to a normal mode, and a winning of a big hit is performed by winning or losing by ally and enemy fighting ( Battle production). Specifically, for example, the branching effect notifies the shift to the small hit RUSH by winning the battle, notifies that the first KT state is continued by drawing the battle, and defeats the battle by losing the battle. This is an effect that informs the transition to the 1KT state. In addition, in the case of a big hit, in the branching effect, it is only necessary to perform an effect that informs the big hit, for example, an effect that has nothing to do with winning or losing of the battle may be performed, or when notifying the transition to the small hit RUSH The effect may be such that the user wins the battle in an effect mode (for example, appearance of a special character, etc.) different from the victory of the battle.

When a battle is won in the first branch effect, the first zone challenge effect (first KT state: high base state) is ended, and the state shifts to a small hit RUSH (second KT state). Here, when a battle is won in the first branch effect, the level value of the first zone challenge effect performed before the first branch effect is lower than that in the case where the game does not shift to the small hit RUSH after the first zone challenge effect. (Gauge) tends to increase.

Also, if the battle is lost in the first branch effect, the first zone challenge effect (first
(KT state), and the mode is shifted to the normal mode (non-KT state: normal state). Here, in the case of losing a battle in the first branch effect, the level value (gauge) is less likely to increase in the first zone challenge effect performed before the first branch effect than when the mode is not shifted to the normal mode.

In addition, when the game is drawn to the battle in the first branch effect, the stage effect (first KT state)
Is continued, and the zone challenge effect (the second zone challenge effect) is similarly performed from the 41st change to the 65th change. Here, when a draw is made in a battle in the first branch effect, the level value (gauge) is more likely to increase in the first zone challenge effect performed before the first branch effect than in the case of shifting to the normal mode.

After the control is performed in the high base state, a branch effect (second branch effect) is performed at the 65th change. If the battle is won in the second branch effect, the second zone challenge effect (1K
T state) and ends with the small hit RUSH (second KT state). Here, when a battle is won in the second branch production, in the second zone challenge production performed before the second branch production, compared to the case where the second zone challenge production does not shift to the small hit RUSH after the second zone production,
The level value (gauge) tends to increase. It should be noted that the level value (gauge) in the zone challenge effect that is performed before each of the branch effects is likely to increase when the battle is won in the second branch effect and when the battle is won in the first branch effect. Is equivalent.

Also, if the battle is defeated in the second branch effect, the second zone challenge effect (first
KT state), and shifts to the normal mode. Here, when the player loses the battle in the second branch effect, the level value of the second zone challenge effect performed before the second branch effect is lower than that in the case where the mode is not shifted to the normal mode after the second zone challenge effect. Hard to increase.

In the case of a draw in the second branch effect, the stage effect (first KT state)
Is continued, and a zone challenge effect (third zone challenge effect) is similarly performed from the 66th change to the 90th change. Here, when a draw is made in a battle in the second branch effect, the level value is more likely to increase in the second zone challenge effect performed before the second branch effect than in the case of shifting to the normal mode.

Then, a branch effect (third branch effect) is performed at the 90th change after the control is performed in the high base state. In the third branch effect, the first KT state ends, so no battle is drawn,
Either a battle victory, a battle defeat, or a jackpot is won. In the third branch effect, if the battle is won, the third stage effect ends, and the process shifts to the small hit RUSH. Here, when a battle is won in the third branch production, in the third zone challenge production performed before the third branch production, the small hit RUS is performed after the third zone production production.
The level value is more likely to increase than in the case where the state does not shift to H.

Also, if the battle is defeated in the third branch effect, the third zone challenge effect (first
KT state), and shifts to the normal mode. Here, in the case of losing the battle in the third branch production, in the third zone challenge production performed before the third branch production, the level value is smaller than in the case of shifting to the small hit RUSH after the third zone production. Is difficult to increase.

In such a modification, the degree of expectation to shift to the small hit RUSH in the branch effect can be suggested for each zone. Note that the zone challenge effect shown in the modified example and FIG.
It is also possible to combine the stage effects shown in 2 and the like. Specifically, an effect of increasing the level value in accordance with the stage may be performed. For example, an effect in which the level value is more easily increased in a stage with a high degree of expectation than in a stage with a low degree of expectation may be performed. Thus, the small hit RU is calculated based on the degree of expectation by the stage and the accumulation of the level value in the zone.
Since the degree of expectation to shift to SH can be suggested, it is possible to improve interest.

(Modification of Variable Display Start Setting Process in Characteristic Unit 012SH)
Next, a modified example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7 will be described. FIG. 19-14 is a flowchart illustrating a modified example of the variable display start setting process in the characteristic unit 012SH. In FIG. 19-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 012SHS1).
61).

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is controlled to the first KT state (step 012SHS162). Note that whether or not the first KT state is controlled is determined by the first KT state.
The determination can be made by confirming that the control is performed in the zone challenge effect (effect mode) indicating the KT state. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not controlled to the first KT state (step 012SHS162: NO), it selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step 012SHS).
168), and the process proceeds to step 012SHS169.

If it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the first KT state (step 012SHS162: YES), the effect control CPU 120 selects any one of the 40th variation, the 65th variation, and the 90th variation after being controlled to the first KT state. It is determined whether or not there is (Step 012 SHS16
3).

The effect control CPU 120 determines that none of the 40th variation, the 65th variation, and the 90th variation has been performed since the first KT state was controlled (step 012SHS163: NO).
Then, a gauge increase effect determination process is performed (step 012 SHS164). In the gauge increase effect determination processing, a gauge increase effect determination table described later with reference to FIGS. 19 to 15 is used. Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command, the zone challenge effect, and the gauge increase effect (step 012SHS165), and proceeds to step 012SHS169. Step 012
Step 012 SHS 170 described later according to the process table selected in SHS 165
By executing the variable display effect process (step S172), a zone challenge effect, a gauge increase effect, and the like are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

After being controlled to the first KT state, effect control CPU 120 determines that it is any of the 40th variation, the 65th variation, and the 90th variation (step 012SHS163: YE).
In S), a branch effect determination process is performed (step 012SHS166). In the branch effect determination processing, the continuation of the first KT state (high base state), the end of the first KT state (transition to the normal mode, transition to the small hit RUSH), and the result of the big hit determination (big hit Winning)
, The content of the battle effect (victory, defeat, draw, etc.) is determined.

The effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command,
And a process table corresponding to a branch effect or the like is selected (step 012SHS167),
The process proceeds to step 012SHS169. According to the process table selected in step 012SHS167, by executing step 012SHS170 and effect processing during variable display (step S172) to be described later, a branch effect and the like are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines in steps 012SHS165, S167, S16
8, the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 8 is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step 012SHS1).
69). Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders the effect device (image display device 5) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1).
, Various lamps and the speakers 8L and 8R) (step 012SHS170).
. For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, VD
A control signal (display control execution data) is output to P. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decoration symbol variation time timer and starts the decoration symbol variation time timer (step 012SHS171). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S172) (step 012SHS172), and the variable display start setting process ends.

(An example of a gauge increase effect determination table in the characteristic portion 012SH)
Next, an example of the gauge increase effect determination table in the characteristic portion 012SH will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19-15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the gauge increase effect determination table in the feature unit 012SH. In FIG. 19-15, the gauge increase effect determination table is a table for determining the presence or absence of the gauge increase effect in each change in the zone challenge effect. More specifically, the gauge increase effect determination table indicates the contents of the battle effect (branch effect) and the presence or absence of the gauge increase.

The content of the battle effect indicates the content of the branch effect (one of the first branch effect, the second branch effect, and the third branch effect) after the end of the zone, and specifically, the battle victory,
Indicates a battle draw and a battle defeat. Battle victory is 2K after finishing the 1st KT state
The notification of transition to the T state (small hit RUSH) is shown. The battle draw indicates the continuation of the first KT state. The battle defeat indicates that the first KT state has been terminated and a transition to the non-KT state has been made. In the gauge increase effect determination table, “Yes” of the gauge increase indicates that the gauge (level value) is to be increased. “None” of the gauge increase indicates that the gauge is not increased.

For example, when the content of the battle is a battle victory, “Yes” of the gauge increase is selected with a probability of 70%, and “No” of the gauge increase is selected with a probability of 30%. Also, when the effect content of the battle is a battle tie, “Yes” of the gauge increase is selected with a probability of 50%, and “No” of the gauge increase is selected with a probability of 50%. If the content of the battle is battle defeat,
The gauge increase “Yes” is selected with a probability of 30%, and the gauge increase “No” is selected with a probability of 70%.

For example, within the zone (for example, 16 to 40 fluctuations after being controlled to the first KT state), it can be suggested that as the gauge increases, the possibility of winning in the battle effect is higher. On the other hand, if the gauge does not increase in the zone, it can be suggested that the possibility of winning in the battle effect is low. Also, for example, in the zone,
If the gauge increases moderately, it can indicate that there is a high possibility of a draw in a battle effect.

In addition, when the gauge indicates MAX, it is also possible to indicate the determination of the victory in the battle effect. In this case, when winning in the battle effect, a determination is made as to whether or not the gauge is set to MAX, and the gauge may be set to MAX according to the determination result. Also, in the case where the judgment result that the gauge is not set to MAX is obtained, if the gauge reaches a certain value (for example, a value of about 90%) in the gauge increase effect, the gauge is not increased any more. Is also good.

The gauge increase effect determination table is commonly used in the first zone challenge effect, the second zone challenge effect, and the third zone challenge effect, but even if a different gauge increase effect determine table is used for each zone challenge effect. Good. For example, feature 0
In 12SH, as the first KT state continues for a longer time, the degree of expectation to shift from the first KT state to the second KT state increases, so that in the latter half of the zone challenge effect, the gauge increase effect “Yes”
May be used. Specifically, when a battle is won in the third branch production, a table in which the probability of the presence of the gauge increase production is higher than that in the case of winning the battle in the second branch production is used. In the case of winning the battle in the two-branch effect, a table having a higher probability of “present” in the gauge increase effect may be used than in the case of winning the battle in the first branch effect.

In the characteristic portion 012SH, the gauge increase effect is determined for each variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the start of each zone challenge effect, the cumulative value of the gauge that is finally increased in the zone is set. You may decide. Specifically, for example, 3,5 in the zone
, Prepare a scenario that indicates which variation in the zone will increase the gauge, such as increasing the gauge at the 10th variation, determine the scenario at the start of each zone challenge production, and based on the determined scenario Then, a gauge increase effect may be performed.

(Modified example of the production mode of the production performed in feature section 012SH)
Next, a modified example of the effect mode of the effect performed in the characteristic unit 012SH will be described. FIGS. 19-16 and 19-17 are explanatory diagrams illustrating modified examples of the effect mode of the effect performed in the characteristic unit 012SH. (1) shown in FIGS. 19-16 and 19-17.
, (2), (3),...

When the state shifts to the first KT state after the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 19-16 (1), the contents of the zone challenge effect are explained on the image display device 5 from the first change to the fifteenth change after the big hit game. Image is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-16 (2), the first zone challenge effect is performed from the 16th variation to the 40th variation after the big hit game. In the first zone challenge effect, a gauge increase effect can be executed in each change display from the 16th change to the 40th change after the big hit game, and the accumulated value of the gauge in the zone from the 16th change to the 40th change is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-16 (3), the first branch effect (battle effect) is performed at the 40th change after the big hit game. In the first branch effect, the effect of drawing in the battle shown in FIG. 19-16 (4-1) (the effect of notifying the continuation of the first KT state) and the effect of losing the battle shown in (4-2) (to the non-KT state) The effect of informing the transition of (2), the effect of winning the battle shown in (4-3) (the effect of informing the transition to the second KT state), and the effect of informing the winning of the big hit in the case of the big hit. In addition, in the variation in which the branching effect such as the 40th variation is performed, only the battle effect may be performed without performing the gauge increasing effect, or the gauge increasing effect may be performed in the first half, and the battle effect may be performed in the middle. Is also good.

In the first branch effect, when a tie is drawn, as shown in FIG. 19-16 (5),
The second zone challenge effect is performed from the 41st change to the 65th change after the big hit game.
In the second zone challenge effect, a gauge increase effect can be executed in each change display from the 41st change to the 65th change after the jackpot game, and the accumulated value of the gauge in the zone from the 41st change to the 65th change is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19F (6), the second branch effect is performed at the 65th change. In the second branch effect, the effect of drawing into the battle shown in FIG.
), An effect of losing the battle shown in (7-3), and an effect of notifying the winning of the big hit in the case of a big hit.

In the second branch effect, when the game is drawn to a battle, as shown in FIG. 19-17 (8),
The third zone challenge effect is performed from the 66th change to the 90th change after the big hit game.
In the third zone challenge effect, a gauge increase effect can be executed in each change display from the 66th change to the 90th change after the big hit game, and the accumulated value of the gauge in the zone from the 66th change to the 90th change is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-18 (9), the third branch effect is performed at the 90th change. In the third branch effect, the effect of losing the battle shown in (10-1), the effect of losing the battle shown in (10-2), and the effect of winning the battle shown in (10-2) are not performed. An effect to inform is performed.

According to the above modified example, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the battle effect for each zone where the zone challenge effect is performed. For example, since the gauge is accumulated for each zone challenge effect, even if the accumulated value of the zone is low in the first zone challenge effect, the player can expect the second zone challenge effect, and Of the game in the zone can be improved.

(Modified example of the stage effect screen in the feature part 012SH)
Next, a modified example of the stage effect screen in the characteristic portion 012SH will be described. Figure 1
9-18 is an explanatory view showing a modification of the stage effect screen in the characteristic portion 012SH. FIG. 19-18 (A) shows a first zone challenge effect screen displayed on image display device 5. For example, the first zone challenge effect is an effect in which the gauge 012SH43 is increased and displayed when the character 012SH41 defeats the small character 012SH42. The gauge 012SH43 indicates “0” at the start of the first zone challenge effect, and is increased and displayed during the fluctuation display as the character 012SH41 defeats the small character 012SH42.

FIG. 19-18 (B) shows a screen at the start of the first branch effect (battle effect). The first branch effect indicates a battle effect between the character 012SH41 and the enemy character 012SH44. The gauge 012SH43 indicates the level value accumulated in the first zone challenge effect, and suggests a possibility of winning in the battle effect. When the level indicated by the gauge 012SH43 is high, it indicates that the possibility of winning in the battle effect is high. On the other hand, if the level indicated by the gauge 012SH43 is low, it indicates that there is a high possibility of losing in the battle effect. When the level indicated by the gauge 012SH43 is medium, it indicates that there is a high possibility of a draw in a battle effect.

Here, for the enemy character 012SH44, for example, a plurality of types such as a strong character who is hard to win and a weak character which is easy to win may be prepared. May be. That is, the degree of expectation (possibility of victory in the battle effect) to shift to the small hit RUSH according to the contents of the effect in the zone (accumulation of level values in the zone challenge effect) and the effect contents in the branch effect (battle effect) ) May be suggested.

FIG. 19C illustrates a screen for a draw in a battle effect. Fig. 19-8
(D) shows a screen for winning in the battle effect. FIG. 19-8 (E) shows a screen of the defeat in the battle effect. In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the first branch effect, an effect for notifying the winning of the big hit may be performed.

Although not shown, the second zone challenge effect and the third zone challenge effect are the same as the first zone challenge effect. Also, the second branch effect is the same effect as the first branch effect. The third branch effect is the same as the first branch effect except that a draw is made in the battle effect.

In the above description, the case where the characteristic portion 012SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is controlled to the high probability state until the next big hit in the case of a certain big hit is described. It is also possible to apply the characteristic portion 012SH to a gaming machine (for example, a so-called ST machine (including a V-ST machine)) that is controlled to a high probability state until a predetermined number of times has elapsed. This will be described using a specific example. For example, in the case of the ST machine, when a probability change hit occurs, the state is controlled to a high probability state until a specified number of times (for example, 200 times) of fluctuation display is executed. Is executed, it is possible to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In addition, for example, the number of times of change in the first KT state controlled after the probability change big hit game (number of times of change in number of shifts)
Is set as a break for each change, and when the change display of the number of shift changes is executed, the state is shifted from the first KT state to the second KT state. In order to set the number of transition fluctuations as a break for each fluctuation, for example, a large hit type (for example, 90 pieces) for the number of transition fluctuations (for example, 1 to 90 times) may be prepared. As a result, the first KT state ends with one change according to the type of the big hit,
It is possible to shift to the second KT state, or to end the first KT state with five changes and shift to the second KT state. For this reason, the specified number of times controlled in the high probability state (for example, 200
Times), the remaining number of times corresponding to the number of transition fluctuations can be controlled in the second KT state, and is displayed to the player from the time the second KT state is controlled until the specified number of fluctuations are displayed. It becomes possible to get a ball.

Also, in this case, for example, when the special symbols indicating the big hit types whose transition fluctuation times are “1” to “10” are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol “7” is stopped and displayed, and the transition fluctuation frequency is “11”. "
When stopping and displaying each special symbol indicating the big hit type of "~ 40", stopping displaying the decorative symbol of "3" and stopping and displaying each special symbol indicating the big hit type of "41" to "90" , A decorative pattern other than "3" and "7" may be stopped and displayed. This allows the player to grasp the approximate number of transition changes in accordance with the stop-displayed decorative symbol, but it is difficult to estimate at what timing the transition to the second KT state is to be performed. The interest of the game can be improved.

In such an ST machine, the characteristic portion 012SH can also perform a stage effect or a zone challenge effect. Specifically, the characteristic portion 012SH may make it easier to shift to the strong zone or to make the cumulative value of the level value (gauge) closer to MAX as the number of changes to shift to the small hit RUSH becomes closer. That is, the characteristic portion 012SH is the ST
It is also possible to perform an effect that suggests a shift to the small hit RUSH.

Here, it is also possible to apply the present invention to a gaming machine having a specification in which a passing gate 41 and a first starting winning port are provided in a left area of the gaming board 2. The details will be described below. For example, ST
In the machine, a pass gate 41 is provided in the left area of the game board 2, and a first start prize is provided in the left area of the game board 2 separately from the prize ball device 6 </ b> A (first start port) provided below the image display device 5. It is also possible to provide a variable winning ball device having a mouth. In this case, in the right area, the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device having the second starting port are not provided, and the winning ball device having the second starting winning port may be provided. In a gaming machine having such an arrangement, the normal state or the first state
In the KT state, a game is played by a left strike operation, and in the second KT state, a game is played by a right strike. More specifically, in the normal state, a game is played by causing a prize ball device 6A (first starting port) provided below the image display device 5 to win. Further, in the first KT state, a game is played by passing through the passing gate 41 provided in the left area and causing the variable prize ball device (first starting port) provided in the left area to win. In the second KT state, a game is played by causing a winning ball device (second starting port) provided in the right area to win.

Further, in the first KT state, a predetermined number of fluctuations (the number of transition fluctuations) in accordance with the type of jackpot
It is also possible to take a case where the state transitions to the second KT state and a state where the state transitions to the normal state after elapse. Specifically, when the change display of the number of transition changes is executed in the first KT state controlled after the probability change big hit game, the first KT state is changed to the second KT state, and the first KT state controlled after the normal big hit game is controlled. When the change display of the number of transition changes is executed in the state, it is possible to make the transition from the first KT state to the normal state. Thereby, according to the type of jackpot (probable variable jackpot or normal jackpot), the first K
When the number of transition fluctuations elapses in the T state, it is possible to make a transition to the second KT state and a transition to the normal state. Note that the number of transition changes may be set as a break for each change, or may be set as a break of a predetermined change number such as 10 changes or 20 changes. That is, different jackpot types according to the number of transition changes may be prepared.

Further, in the first KT state, a common effect may be executed regardless of the type of the big hit. By doing so, it is possible to keep the player secret whether to shift to the second KT state or to the normal state until the number of shift changes has elapsed. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a stage effect and a zone challenge effect as a common effect. Specifically, in the first KT state, by performing a stage effect or a zone challenge effect, it is suggested that the possibility of shifting to the normal state is high, or the possibility of shifting to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is increased. Or suggest it is high. Specifically, when the state shifts to the second KT state or when the remaining number of changes until the state shifts to the second KT state is small, the first KT state
In the state, it is easy to shift to the strong zone, and the accumulated value of the level value (gauge) is MAX.
Or make it easier to approach. Thereby, interest in the first KT state can be improved.

As described above, the characteristic portion 012SH is a gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of performing a game), and a game control means (for controlling a progress of the game). For example, CPU 103) and effect executing means (effect control CPU) capable of executing an effect.
120), the game control means changes the game state to an advantageous state (
For example, a big hit game state), a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state,
It is controllable to a specific state (for example, the first KT state) different from the special state, and when controlling to the specific state, a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a jackpot game of a probability change big hit BD) It is possible to shift from the specific state to the special state based on the fact that the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times later (for example, the CPU 103 executes step 014IWS00).
1B to 008B), the effect execution means can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a stage effect or a zone challenge effect, etc.) indicating that the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state (for example, an effect) The control CPU 120 determines in steps 012SHS102 to S10
8 and the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 012SHS162 to S167).
Thereby, the transition to the special state can be suggested before the transition to the special state (for example, in the specific state), so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the characteristic portion 012SH, the effect execution means may include, as the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of suggestion effects having different aspects (for example, a stage effect having a plurality of types of stages, a zone challenge in which a gauge increase effect is performed for each zone). Effect), and the rate at which the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state differs depending on which type of the suggested effect is executed (for example, in the case of the strong stage, the small hit RUSH) Is high (stage effect determination table 012SH20 in FIGS. 19-3 to 19-5), and when the gauge increases, the ratio of shift to the small hit RUSH is high (the gauge increase effect determination in FIGS. 19-15). table)).
With this, it is possible to suggest the possibility of shifting from the specific state to the special state depending on the type of the suggested effect to be executed, so that it is possible to pay attention to the effect mode of the suggested effect, and to improve the interest of the game. it can.

Further, in the characteristic portion 012SH, the game control means may determine, as the advantageous state, a plurality of types of advantageous states having different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the probability variation big hits B to D and the normal big hits A to C: FIG. 19-1). The big hit type determination table 012SH10 in FIG. 19-2) can be controlled to determine whether or not the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state according to the type of the advantageous state (for example, the probability change big hit B to In the case of D, it shifts to the special state,
In the case of C, the type does not shift to the special state), and the type of the predetermined condition is different (for example, in the case of the probability variable hit B, execution of 90 times of change in the specific state is performed, and in the case of the probability variable hit C, the specific state is performed). Execution of 65 fluctuation times in the above).
With this, it is possible to take a case where the state does not shift from the specific state to the special state according to the type of the jackpot, and since the transition condition from the specific state to the special state differs depending on the type of the jackpot, A variety of conditions for transition can be provided. Therefore, it can be noticed which kind of jackpot is, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic part 012SH, the effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a stage effect) in which the mode of the effect changes as the suggestion effect. According to the aspect, the degree of expectation that the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state and the length of the remaining period of the specific state are suggested (for example, the degree of expectation that the gaming state shifts to the small hit RUSH depending on the mode of the stage). And the length of the remaining period of the first KT state).
Thereby, it is possible to pay attention to the production mode of the specific suggestion production before the transition to the special state,
Interestingness before the transition to the special state can be improved.

Also, in the characteristic portion 012SH, the effect executing means can execute an information effect for informing that the gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state (for example, a branch effect for informing the shift to the small hit RUSH). In the specific state, a predetermined number of times (for example, 90
(65 times, 45 times, or 45 times), the notification effect can be executed.
Thereby, it is possible to pay attention to the notification effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, by notifying the shift to the small hit RUSH, it is possible to clarify the shift to the small hit RUSH, and the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment and a sense of satisfaction.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special design display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10 General winning opening 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning prize ball device 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23… First count switch 24… Second count switch 30… Hitting operation handle 31A… Stick controller 31B… Push button 32… Movable body 41… Pass gate 100… Game control microcomputers 101, 121… ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124: random number circuit 105, 125: I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
And effect execution means capable of executing an effect.
The game control means,
The game state can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, a special state in which a game value is easily given by the special state, and a specific state different from the special state. Yes,
When controlling to the specific state, it is possible to shift from the specific state to the special state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition,
The gaming machine, wherein the effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating that a gaming state shifts from the specific state to the special state.

Images